Home

Wikibooks.org - Parent Directory

1. Brewe IM 2 qopo azebbepp t Snuru3eswy IJSTINnA D obpam V aabhep A DATO o DIATOLBTAN O 99AN FAKEN Jopo O 3ubr4jerbueraaN 4 dnobs Ise USPISON qyeyetbuetizq gt deobs ATP SOWTIO Gi uMope fjuera356TqN A snqtdn A SOUTI x SNUTWO o dneThuetzq6Tq Y dno n dun snrtdo ER puouertp o deo U wd F jduog Toquig das joquAg jduog Toqui amp g Idg Joqui s suoneaod Ku1eurq 139 Mathematics Set and or Logic Notation Symbol Script Symbol Script 3 exists gt rightarrow E nexists Vimplies V forall gt Rightarrow pre ferred for implication I neg e leftrightarrow in gt iff notin e Leftrightarrow preferred for equiva lence iff 3 ni T top A land JL bot V Mor 0 and emptyset and varnothing 140 List of Mathematical Symbols 3OOlJ2N EN HOOTITA T ULI TI99IN ysersyoeg e bueTwN jduog jj due Toqui amp g OJAPUMOQN 1t mozzedy y N IS jduog joquAg OXIPLUMOPN T mozzedn e AN j Idg Toqui amp g Sam 141 Mathematics Greek Letters Symbol Script Symbol Script A
2. Author Claudia Aragao and Luis E C Conceicao and Maria Teresa Dinis and Hans Jorgen Fyhn Title Amino acid pools of rotifers and Artemia under different conditions nutritional implications for fish larvae Journal Aquaculture Y Manage Jj Toggle abbreviation sy Year 2004 3 Volume 1234 P Pages 429 445 Y Bibtexkey faragao04 Figure 7_ JabRef 69 Bibliography Management eoe thesis bib c 4 1 N p x A O Qr Search Bibliography Sal Action New Edit Delete Preview Search Cite Drawer Keywords A 3 Keywords BibTeX Type Title m ub atutude qual articie Attitude Error Kepresentations Tor Kalman Filtering E A G article Phillips Bus f Attitude Representations Used for Aircraft Kinematics pa adantve kaiman 2 article Pittelkau 2003fk Rotation Vector in Attitude Estimation aerial H article Salamin fk Application of quaternions to computation with rotations attitude v article Schaub Principal Rotation Representations of Proper NxN Orthogonal Matrices bayesian estimation inproceedings Shoemake h Animating rotation with quaternion curves D quaternions attitude quat book techreport Shoemake 1994uq Quaternions calibration S Wertz 1980fk Spacecraft attitude determination and control computer vision context dynamics EKF euler angles Phillips and Hailey 2001 Phillips W F and Hailey C E 2001 R
3. variable values comment urlcolor cyan color of URL links mail web linkbordercolor 1 0 0 color of frame around internal links 1f colorlinks false citebordercolor 0 1 0 color of frame around cita tions urlbordercolor 0 1 1 color of frame around URL links Please note that explicite RGB specification is only allowed for the border colors like linkbordercolor etc while the others may only assigned to named colors which you can define your own see Colors In order to speed up your customization process here is a list with the variables with their default value Copy it in your document and make the changes you want Next to the variables there is a short explanations of their meaning hypersetup bookmarks true unicode false pdftoolbar true pdfmenubar true pdffitwindow false pdfstartview FitH pdftitle My title pdfauthor Author pdfsubject Subject pdfcreator Creator pdfproducer Producer pdfkeywords keyword1 pdfnewwindow true colorlinks false linkcolor red citecolor green filecolor magenta urlcolor cyan oo oo oo alo oo oo de de oo oo oo oo oe oe ode odo oo show bookmarks bar non Latin characters in Acrobat s bookmarks show Acrobat s toolbar show Acrobat s menu window fit to page when opened fits the width of the page to the window title author subject of the document creator of the document producer of the document ke
4. EO Cc gr 34 ETTETN JUTON S9IALBTAN deobtq seur3obrqw poad o3exyoed yyeusue y sormbor o3exoed yyeusuwe oy sormbor o3exoed u3eusue y sambor aseyord y7eusuwe y sarmbor 0c 6I 8I LI Aj LED Sa gr tUTTT UTA dnobs6tq dnobtq sntdo tg uns 121 Mathematics For more integral symbols including those not included by default in the Computer Modern font try the esint package The substack command allows the use of to write the limits over multiple lines NE sum_ substack O i m AM 0 j n Jets P i j N Lo lt i lt m P i j 0 lt j lt n If you want the limits of an integral to be specified above and below the symbol like the sum use the limits command NE int limits_a b b However if you want this to apply to ALL integrals it is preferable to specify the intlimits option when loading the amsmath package usepackage intlimits amsmath Subscripts and superscripts in other contexts as well as other parameters to amsmath package related to them are described in Advanced Mathematics chapter For bigger integrals you may use personal declarations or the bigint s package 2 13 9 Brackets braces and delimiters How to use braces in multi line equations is described in the Advanced Mathematics chapter 2 requires the ansmath package 22 http en wikibooks org wiki LaTex 2FAdvanced_Mathematics 23Advanced_ formatting 23
5. 1 http en wikibooks org wiki LaTeX 2Fcaption tex 2 http en wikibooks org wiki LaTeX 2Fsimple tex 3 http en wikibooks org wiki LaTeX 2Fwrapped tex 4 http www tug org pracjourn 2006 2 eglen 5 http www ctan org tex archive info lshort english 6 http www ccs neu edu course csg264 latex 7 http cristal inria fr remy latex 8 http svn openfoundry org pugs docs talks hw2005 tex 9 Chapter 30 on page 259 343 45 Command Glossary This is a glossary of LaTeX commands an alphabetical listing of LaTeX commands with the summaries of their effects Brackets are optional arguments and braces are required arguments 45 1 see slash marks following period ends sentence W extra space new line See Page Layout thin space math and text mode 5 thick space math mode X medium space math mode V negative thin space math mode M hyphenation tabbing set tab see tabbing gt tab see tabbing 1 Chapter 12 on page 95 2 Chapter 12 5 on page 107 345 Command Glossary lt back tab see tabbing W see tabbing accent or tabbing v accent or tabbing M double vertical lines math mode X start math environment end math environment M begin displaymath environment end displaymath environment 45 2 A addcontentsline file sec_unit entry adds an entry to the specified list or table addtocontents file text adds text or formatting comm
6. ER marginparsep lOpt 96 Page dimensions 2 marginparwidth 35pt 3 footskip 30pt marginparpush 7pt not shown e hoffset Opt e voffset Opt e paperwidth 597pt paperheight 845pt It will not have been immediately obvious because it doesn t really cause any serious problems that the default page size for all standard document classes is US letter This is shorter by 18 mm about 3 4 inch and slightly wider by 8 mm about 1 4 inch compared to A4 which is the standard in almost all the rest of the world While this is not a serious issue most printers will print the document without any problems it is possible to specify alternative sizes documentclass a4paper article The above example illustrates how to pass the optional argument to the documentclass which will then modify the page dimensions accordingly The standard document classes that are a part of Latex are built to be fairly generic which is why you have the flexibility of specifying the page size Other classes may have different options or none at all Normally 3rd party classes come with some documentation to let you know Readers from a word processing background are probably thinking why there is so much white space surrounding the text There is a good reason and it s all down to readability Have a look in a few books and pick a few lines at random Count the number of characters per line I bet the av
7. T In such case you need to use the ut 8x option to define more character combinations This might break up compatibility with some packages like csquotes When using the inputenc package you should consider that other people might not be able to display your input files on their computer because they use a different encoding For example the German umlaut on OS 2 is encoded as 132 on Unix systems using ISO LATIN 1 it is encoded as 228 while in Cyrillic encoding cp1251 for Windows this letter does not exist at all therefore you should use this feature with care The following encodings may come in handy depending on the type of system you are working on Operating system Encoding E Western Latin Cyrillic Mac applemac maccyr Unix latinl koi8 ru Windows ansinew cp1251 DOS OS 2 cp850 cp866nav 39 3 Output encoding fontenc package tells LaTeX how to output the text you have produced It defines at which position inside a TeX font each letter is stored Multiple input encodings could be mapped into one font encoding which reduces number of required font sets LaTeX can produce either bitmap fonts usually rasterized to 300 or 600 ppi or scalable vector fonts such as Type 1 fonts There are many different font sets available containing different sets of glyphs characters Font encoding is set with Nusepackage encoding fontenc where encoding is font encoding It is possible to lo
8. Nusepackage mystyle begin document input tex title tex maketitle tableofcontents listoffigures listoftables input tex intro tex input tex main_part tex input tex conclusions tex appendix input tex myappendix tex p Bibliography Nclearpage Naddcontentsline toc chapter Bibliography input tex mybibliography tex end document Here a lot of code expressed in previous sections has been used At the beginning there is the header discussed in the Tips amp Tricks section so you will be able to compile in both DVI and PDF Then you import the only package you need that is your mystyle sty note that in the code it has to be imported without the extension then your document starts Then it inserts the title we don t like the output of maketitle so we created our own the code for it will be in a file called title tex in the folder called tex we created before How to write it is explained in the Title Creation section Then tables of contents figure and tables are inserted If you don t want them just comment out those lines Then the main part of the document in inserted As you can see there is no text in document tex everything is in other files in the tex directory so that you can easily edit them We are separating our text from the structural code so we are improving the What You See is What You Mean nature of LaTeX Then we can see the appendix and finally the Bibliograp
9. 1 Derwaldrandfoerster 6 Dilaudid 51 Dirk H nniger 3 Dmb 3 Dncarley 1 Dporter 1 Dreaven3 2 Drevicko 72 http en wikibooks org w index php 73 http en wikibooks org w index php 74 http en wikibooks org w index php 75 http en wikibooks org w index php 76 http en wikibooks org w index php 77 http en wikibooks org w index php 78 http en wikibooks org w index php 79 http en wikibooks org w index php 80 http en wikibooks org w index php 81 http en wikibooks org w index php 82 http en wikibooks org w index php 83 http en wikibooks org w index php 84 http en wikibooks org w index php 85 http en wikibooks org w index php 86 http en wikibooks org w index php 87 http en wikibooks org w index php 88 http en wikibooks org w index php 890 http en wikibooks org w index php 90 http en wikibooks org w index php 91 http en wikibooks org w index php 92 http en wikibooks org w index php 93 http en wikibooks org w index php 94 http en wikibooks org w index php 95 http en wikibooks org w index php 96 http en wikibooks org w index php 370 ti ti ti ti ti EL ti ti ET ti ti ti ti ti ti ti ti ti ti ti ti ti EL ti ti CF ct ct ct ct ct ct ct ct ct ct ct ct ct ct ct ct ct cr ct ct ct ct ct ct Ser Ser Ser Ser Ser Ser Ser Ser Ser Ser Ser Ser Ser Ser Ser Ser Ser Ser Ser Ser
10. 13 2 SymbolS poe a DAD e Sw ce e Gd ug 13 3 Greek letters ca e e aa o o o RR Oe box RU e RR ARE oed 13 4 Operators euo ENTRE I NEL beg Sle Re RA ERE 13 5 Powers andindices e 13 6 Fractions and Binomials e e 13 7 a A AAA guess eq obe eats deg 13 8 Sums and integrals e 13 9 Brackets braces and delimiters 13 10Matrices and arrays 13 11 Adding text to equations en 13 12Formatting mathematics symbols 13 13Plus and minus signs e 13 14Controlling horizontal spacing 13 15Advanced Mathematics AMS Math package 13 16List of Mathematical Symbols les Contents 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 13 17 SUMMARY EE A a E Gk Doe beo ew dera 13 18Notes pc cM 13 19 F rther reading 2 nom mom Rue EUM SA RUE RUP a 13 20External links ee Theorems PL Basic theorems oce A Re a t te ee ege 14 2 The orem COUntETS a ar dad ERU LAC ee te RU gone RN ns 14 5 ProOfS une iue vus Rue Re RP ret REUS Mu AMI Ee ESTIS ENTE 14 4 Theorenistyles uoc a a RENT GREC Ue Y e RR NS 14 5 Conflicts 2 are hain aede eV eR eee A ave ar er de sel 14 6 Notes oil Rer eve od re an Peg p ue RE 14 7 External links 22 2 Co oo moon rs Labels and Cross referencing 15 1 Introd ctiot uu eos een a Bir PE a an 15 2 Examples A a Re IT ner 15 3 The varioref package ee a 15 4 The hyperref package and autoref
11. 217 Presentations ej pdf Okular Herramientas This is the first slide Figure 62 Usual environments itemize enumerate equation etc may be used as usual Inside of frames you can use environments like block theorem proof Also Nmaket itle is possible to create the frontpage if title and author is set Trick Instead of using begin frame end frame you can also use framef For the actual talk if you can compile it with pdfLaTeX then you could use Adobe Reader with its fullscreen mode If you want to navigate in your presentation you can use the almost invisible links in the bottom right corner without leaving the fullscreen mode 25 1 2 Document Structure Title page and information You give information about authors titles and dates in the preamble Mtitle Crisis optional only for long titles The Economics of Financial Crisis subtitle Evidence from India Nauthor Author Anders optional for multiple authors F Author inst 1 land S Anderslinst 2 218 The Beamer package institute Universit ten Hier und Dort optional inst 1 Institut f r Informatik Universit t Hier and inst 2 Institut f r theoretische Philosophie Universit t Dort date KPT 2004 optional Konferenz ber Pr sentationstechniken 2004 subject Informatik In the document you add the title page frame titlepage Table of Contents You can
12. A very versatile vector image editor is Inkscape It does not support LaTeX text by itself but you can use the plugin Textext for that This allows you to put any block of LaTeX code in your image Additionally since version 0 48 you can export to vectorgraphics with texts separated in a tex file Using this way text is rendered by the latex compiler itself LaTeXDraw is a free and open source graphical PSTricks generator and editor It allows you to draw basic geometric objects and save the result in a variety of formats including jpg png eps bmp as well as tex In the last case the saved file contains PSTricks LaTeX code only Owing to that you can include any possible LaTeX code in the picture since the file is rendered by your LaTeX environment directly Another way to generate vectorgraphics is using the Asymptote language It is a programming language which produces vector images in encapsulated postscript format and supports LaTeX syntax in any textlabels Chapter 22 1 2 on page 184 http en wikipedia org wiki Xfig http en wikipedia org wiki Ipe 28program 29 http en wikipedia org wiki Inkscape http pav iki fi software textext http en wikipedia org wiki Asymptote 28vector graphics language 29 oo DIU 293 Tips and Tricks 36 5 2 Graphs with gnuplot A simple method to include graphs and charts in LaTeX documents is to create it within a common spreadsheet software OpenOffice Calc or MS Office
13. documentclass article aes usepackage english babel begin document Without specifying width for last column begin center begin tabular 1 Lp ZS JE hline Day amp Min Temp amp Max Temp amp Summary hline Monday amp 11C amp 22C amp A clear day with lots of sunshine However the strong breeze will bring down the temperatures hline Tuesday amp 9C amp 19C amp Cloudy with rain across many northern regions Clear spells across most of Scotland and Northern Ireland but rain reaching the far northwest hline Wednesday amp 10C amp 21C amp Rain will still linger for the morning Conditions will improve by early afternoon and continue throughout the evening hline end tabular end center With width specified begin center begin tabular 1 1 1 p 5cm hline Day amp Min Temp amp Max Temp amp Summary hline Monday amp 11C amp 22C amp A clear day with lots of sunshine However the strong breeze will bring down the temperatures hline Tuesday amp 9C amp 19C amp Cloudy with rain across many northern regions Clear spells across most of Scotland and Northern Ireland but rain reaching the far northwest hline Wednesday 10C amp 21C amp Rain will still linger for the morning Conditions will improve by early afternoon and continue throughout the evening hline end tabular end center 82 The tabular environment
14. setcounter tocdepth 3 To get an unnumbered section heading which does not go into the Table of Contents follow the command name with an asterisk before the opening curly brace subsection Introduction All the divisional commands from part to subparagraph have this starred version which can be used on special occasions for an unnumbered heading when the setting of secnumdepth would normally mean it would be numbered If you want the unnumbered section to be in the table of contents anyway use the addcontentsline command like this sections Introduction addcontentsline toc section Introduction Note if you use pdf bookmarks you will need to add a phantom section so that bookmark will lead to the correct place in the document phantomsection addcontentsline toc section Introduction sections Introduction For chapters you will also need to clear the page this will also correct page numbering in the ToC cleardoublepage phantomsection addcontentsline toc chapter Bibliography bibliographystyle unsrt bibliography my_bib_file The value where the section numbering starts from can be set with the following command setcounter section 4 The next section after this command will now be numbered 5 Any counter can be incremented decremented with the following command addtocounter counter integer The phantomsection command is defined in the hyperref package 35 Docum
15. your table end tabular caption This table shows some data ttp calc2latex sourceforge net ttp www ctan org tex archive support excel2latex ttp www mathworks com matlabcentral fileexchange 4894 matrix2latex ttps code google com p matrix2latex ttp rubygems org gems latex tools ttp cran r project org web packages xtable index html ttp orgmode org ttps www gnu org software emacs manual html node org A LaTeX example html ttp emacswiki org emacs AlignCommands VD GJ Ch E AHA ra vd d dd d vd vd vd 77 Tables Mabel tab myfirsttable end table The captions show now up in the list of tables if displayed You can set the optional parameter position specifier to define the position of the table where it should be placed The following characters are all possible placements Using sequences of it define your wishlist to LaTeX h here E top b bottom p page Default is tbp which means that it is by default placed on the top of the page If it s not possible its placed on the bottom and last possibility is to place it with other floating environments on an extra page You can force LaTeX to use one given position E g h forces LaTeX to place it exactly where you place it Except when it s really impossible e g you place a table here and this place would be the last line on a page Centering the table horizontally works using the centering command just af
16. 321 Internationalization This preamble enables hyphenation and changes all automatic text to Greek A set of new commands also becomes available which allows you to write Greek input files more easily In order to temporarily switch to English and vice versa one can use the commands textlatin english text and textgreek greek text that both take one argument which is then typeset using the requested font encoding Otherwise you can use the command selectlanguage described in a previous section Use Neuro for the Euro symbol 39 4 9 Hungarian Similar to Italian but use the following lines Nusepackage magyar babel usepackage latin2 inputenc Nusepackage T1 fontenc More information in hungarian The Hungarian version of BaBeL included with standard LaTeX distribution is not perfect a much better version can be downloaded from the previous page 39 4 10 Icelandic Faroese The following lines can be added to write Icelandic text usepackage icelandic babel usepackage T1 fontenc and for some users Nusepackage ut 8 inputenc is needed This allows the user to write with Icelandic characters and changes text like the Abstract in begin abstract etta er tdr ttur end abstract into tdr ttur and turns Partinto Hluti Icelandic Special Characters vor glqq grqq TH p th p 0 O AO AE 12 http
17. 8 http miktex org 9 http www scribtex com 10 http texstudio sourceforge net ll http www xmlmath net texmaker 12 http www vim org 13 http vim latex sourceforge net 14 http www gnu org software emacs 15 http www gnu org software auctex 16 http www scribtex com 17 http www verbosus com 18 http www tug org texworks 19 http gummi midnightcoding org 20 http kile sourceforge net 21 http www uoregon edu koch texshop 334 Bibliography management e LEd TeXnicCenter WinEdt WinShell 41 3 Bibliography management Bibliography files bib are most easily edited and modified using a management system These graphical user interfaces all feature a database form where information is entered for each reference item and the resulting text file can be used directly by BibTeX Cross platform e JabRef Mendeley Mac OS X only BibDesk 41 4 Graphics tools 41 4 1 Xfig Xfig is a basic program that can produce vector graphics which can be exported to PSTEX It can be installed on UNIX Linux platforms With Ubuntu or Debian distributions it can be easily installed using apt On Microsoft Windows systems Xfig can only be installed using Cygwin X however this will require a fast internet connection and about 2 gigabytes of space on your computer With Cygwin to run Xfig you need to first start the Start X Server then launch xterm to br
18. Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document but changing it is not allowed This version of the GNU Lesser General Public License incorporates the terms and conditions of version 3 of the GNU General Public License sup plemented by the additional permissions listed below 0 Additional Defini tions As used herein this License refers to version 3 of the GNU Lesser General Public License and the GNU GPL refers to version 3 of the GNU General Public License one line to give the program s name and a brief idea of what it does Copy right C year name of author This program is free software you can redistribute it and or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Soft ware Foundation either version 3 of the License or at your option any later version This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful but WITH OUT ANY WARRANTY without even the implied warranty of MER CHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE See the GNU General Public License for more details You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program If not see lt http www gnu org licenses gt Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail If the program does terminal interaction make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode orig
19. Figure 60 336 In this case it may look too shrunk but you can manage spaces the way you like In general it is best not to add any space at all let LaTeX do the formatting work In this case the problem is the use of begin center to center the image The center environment adds extra space that can be avoided if centering is used instead 9 Chapter 24 2 8 on page 212 209 Floats Figures and Captions Alternatively you might use the picins package instead of the wrapfigure package which produces a correct version without the excess white space out of the box without any hand tuning There is also an alternative to wrapfig the package floatflt http tug ctan org tex archive macros latex contrib floatfl for documentation see http www ctan org tex archive macros latex contrib floatflt floatflt pdf 24 2 6 Subfloats A useful extension is the subcaption package ftp ftp dante de tex archive macros latex contrib caption subcaption pdf the subfigure and subfig packages are deprecated and shouldn t be used any more which uses subfloats within a single float This gives the author the ability to have subfigures within figures or subtables within table floats Subfloats have their own caption and an optional global caption An example will best illustrate the usage of this package usepackage graphicx usepackage caption usepackage subcaption begin figure begin subfigure b 0 3 textwidt
20. For relatively simple fractions it may be more aesthetically pleasing to use powers and indices 3 1 3 7 If you use them throughout the document usage of x rac package is recommended This package provides Ns rac command to create slanted fractions Usage Take sfrac 1 2 cup of sugar dots N 3 times sfrac 1 2 1 sfrac 1 2 Take 1 2 cup of sugar dots 3 times 1 _2 1 1 _2 14 requires the amsmath package 15 Chapter 13 5 on page 114 116 Fractions and Binomials Take V cup of sugar 3 x 1 2 11 2 Take 5 cup of sugar ax sl E Figure 31 Alternatively the nicefrac package provides the nicefrac command whose usage is similar to sfrac 13 6 1 Continued fractions Continued fractions should be written using cfrac command begin equation x a_0 Ncfrac l a 1 cfrac 1 a_2 cfrac l a_3 a_4 lt gt lt gt end equation x ao a i 1 a 4 a3 44 13 6 2 Multiplication of two numbers To make multiplication visually similar to a fraction a nested array can be used for example multiplication of numbers written one below the other 16 requires the amsmath package 117 Mathematics begin equation frac begin array b r Meft x 1x 2 right times left x 1 x 2 Nright end array rt left y_ly_2y_3y_4 right end equation x1x2 x xix y yay3Y
21. For some of them several dialects are supported For more information refer to the documentation that comes with the package it should be within your distribution under the name listings dvi Notes 1 It supports Mathematica code only if you are typing in plain text format You can t include NB files lstinputlisting as you could with any other programming language but Mathematica can export in a pretty formatted LaTeX source 2 Specification of the dialect is mandatory for these languages e g language x86masm Assembler 3 Modelica is supported via the dtsyntax package available here 4 Some languages have optional dialects Like C has ANSL Handel Objective Sharp ftp ftp tex ac uk tex archive macros latex contrib listings listings pdf the listings manual p12 You can modify several parameters that will affect how the code is shown You can put the following code anywhere in the document it doesn t matter whether before or after begin document change it according to your needs The meaning is explained next to any line usepackage listings usepackage color definecolor dkgreen rgb 0 0 6 0 definecolor gray rgb 0 5 0 5 0 5 definecolor mauve rgb 0 58 0 0 82 lstset language Octave the language of the code basicstyle footnotesize the size of the fonts that are used for the code numbers left numberstyle tiny color gray stepnumber 2 each line where to put th
22. XXXX uo g wg dw oW Wm misc Template useful for other kinds of publication Required fields none Optional fields author title howpublished month year note misc Xmisc Sauthor title o Showpublished Syear XXXX Smonth Snote phdthesis 59 Bibliography Management Ph D thesis Required fields author title year school Optional fields address month keywords note G proceedings The proceedings of a conference Required fields title year Optional fields editor volume number series address month organization publisher note Gtechreport Technical report from educational commercial or standardization institution Required fields author title institution year Optional fields type number address month note techreport Xtreport author m title Emm institution Stype n Snumber Saddress year Smonth Snote ww r ww XXXX n ww r unpublished An unpublished article book thesis etc Required fields author title note Optional fields month year 9 3 3 Not standard templates G patent see Cite Patents with Bibtex for more details G collection Q electronic 9 3 4 Preserving capital letters In the event that BibTeX has been set by the chosen style to not preserve all capitalization within titles problems can occur especially if you are referring to proper nouns
23. You can also create a theorem environment that is not numbered by using the newtheoremx command For instance Xnewtheoremx mydef Definition defines the mydef environment which will generate definitions without numbering This requires amsthm package 14 3 Proofs The proof environment can be used for adding the proof of a theorem The basic usage is begin proof Here is my proof end proof It just adds Proof in italics at the beginning of the text given as argument and a white square Q E D symbol also known as a tombstone at the end of it If you are writing in another language than English just use babel with the right argument and the word Proof printed in the output will be translated accordingly anyway in the source the name of the environment remains proof If you would like to manually name the proof include the name in square brackets begin proof Proof of important theorem Here is my important proof end proof If the last line of the proof is displayed math then the Q E D symbol will appear on a subsequent empty line To put the Q E D symbol at the end of the last line use the gedhere command begin proof Here is my proof NT a 2 b 2 c 2 qedhere Chapter 6 1 4 on page 34 Requires the amsthm package Requires the amsthm package http en wikipedia org wiki Q E D http en wikipedia org wiki Tombstone 20 28typography 29 Chapter 39 on page 315 J Ch tn RUF 148
24. definecolor light gray gray 0 95 gray 0 black and 1 white so 0 95 will be very light gray 0 30 will be dark gray rgb Red three numbers given in definecolor orange rgb 1 0 5 0 Green Blue the form red green blue the quantity of each color is represented with a num ber between 0 and 1 RGB Red three numbers given in definecolor orange RGB 255 127 0 Green Blue the form red green blue the quantity of each color is represented with a num ber between O and 255 HTML Red six hexadecimal num definecolor orange HTML FF7FOO Green Blue bers given in the form RRGGBB similar to what is used in HTML cmyk Cyan Ma four numbers definecolor orange cmyk 0 0 5 1 0 genta Yel given in the form low Black cyan magenta yellow black the quantity of each color is represented with a number between 0 and 1 27 7 Advanced color settings The xcolor package provides extended versions of the described color related commands Tints can be defined as follow color blue 20 color blue 20 black color blue 20 black 30 green The first specifies 20 percent blue the second is a mixture of 20 percent blue and 80 percent black and the last one is a mixture of 20 0 3 percent blue 80 0 3 percent black and 70 percent green Other features include support of hsb color model html style notation special row coloring support in tables and more 245 Colors 27 8 Sources The
25. item wbalsup Wikimedia item wbalsup lots of users item NwbalTwo John Doe end itemize ported by John Doe Note use wbalTwo not wbal2 error on compiling LaTeX will not allow you to create a new command that would overwrite an existing one But there is a special command in case you explicitly want this renewcommand It uses the same syntax as the newcommand command In certain cases you might also want to use the providecommand command It works like newcommand but if the command is already defined LaTeX will silently ignore the new command With LaTex2e it is also possible to add a default parameter to a command with the following syntax newcommand name num default definition If the default parameter of newcommand is present then the first of the number of arguments specified by num is optional with a default value of default if absent then all of the arguments are required m This is the Wikibook about LaTeX sup newcommand wbalTwo 2 Wikimedia Ba This is the Wikibook about LaTeX ported by Wikimedia and John Doe supported by 1 and 2 This is the Wikibook about LaTeX sup in the document body Best EE ported by lots of users and John Doe item wbalTwo John Doe item wbalTwo lots of users John Doe end itemize NOTE when the command is used with an explicit first parameter it is given enclosed with brackets lots of users 34 2 New Environments Ju
26. If lt condition gt lt text gt Else lt text gt EndIf If lt condition gt lt text gt ElsIf lt condition gt lt text gt Else lt text gt EndIf The third form accepts as many ElsIf clauses as required Note that it is ELsIf and not Elself 19 2 2 For loops There are two forms For lt condition gt lt text gt EndFor ForAll lt condition gt lt text gt EndFor 166 Typesetting using the algorithmicx package A traditional for loop The method of iteration is usually described in the first argument e g For i 1 Nto 10 State i gets i 1 NEndFor 19 2 3 While loops While lt condition gt text EndWhile While i leq 10 State i i 1 EndWhile 19 2 4 Repeat until condition Repeat lt text gt Until lt condition gt 19 2 5 Infinite loops Loop lt text gt EndLoop 19 2 6 Precondition Require lt text gt 19 2 7 Postcondition Ensure lt text gt 19 2 8 Functions Function lt name gt lt params gt lt body gt EndFunction 19 2 9 Returning variables Return lt text gt This command will usually be used in conjunction with a St ate command as follows Function Increment a State a gets a 1 State Return a EndFunction 167 Typesetting Algorithms 19 2 10 Comments NComment lt text gt Note to users who switched from the old algorithmic package comments may be placed everywhere in the
27. Open your favorite text editor vim emacs Notepad and other text editors will have syntax highlighting that will help to write your files Reproduce the following text in your editor This is the LaTeX source hello tex Our first LaTeX example documentclass article begin document Hello World end document e Save your file as he llo tex When picking a name for your file make sure it bears a tex extension 5 3 1 What does it all mean The first line is a comment This is because 1t begins with the percent symbol when LaTeX sees this it simply ignores the rest of the line Comments are useful for people to annotate parts of the source file For example you could put information about the author and the date or whatever you wish This line is a command and tells LaTeX to EE use the article document class A docu ment class file defines the formatting which in this case is a generic article format The handy thing is that 1f you want to change the appearance of your document substitute arti cle for another class file that exists hello tex Our first LaTeX example 7 Chapter 28 on page 247 8 http en wikibooks org wiki Learning 20the 20vi 20Editor 2FVim 9 http en wikibooks org wiki emacs 25 Basics This line is the beginning of the environment ER TODO called document it alerts LaTeX that con tent of the document is about to commence Anythin
28. do nothing end Write Case insensitive Write Pascal keywords end lstlisting end document begin do nothing end Write Case insensitive Write Pascal keywords Figure 46 173 20 References e THE OFFICIAL MANUAL FOR THE ALGORITHMS PACKAGE ROG RIO BRITO 2009 HTTP MIRRORS CTAN ORG MACROS LATEX CONTRIB ALGORITHMS ALGORITHMS PDF 1 http mirrors ctan org macros latex contrib algorithms algorithms pdf 175 21 Letters Sometimes the mundane things are the most painful However it doesn t have to be that way because of evolved user friendly templates Thankfully LaTeX allows for very quick letter writing with little hassle 21 1 The letter class To write letters use the standard document class letter You can write multiple letters in one LaTeX file start each one with begin letter recipient and end with lend letter You can leave recipient blank Each letter consists of four parts 1 opening like opening Dear Sir or Madam or Vopening Dear Kate 2 main body written as usual in LaTeX 3 closing like closing Yours sincerely LaTeX will leave some space after closing for your hand written signature then 1t will put your name and surname if you have declared them 4 additional elements post scripta carbon copy and list of enclosures If you want your name address and telephone number to appear in the letter you have to declare them first
29. latex mypaper bibtex mypaper if you use bibtex latex2rtf mypaper Both latex and if needed bibtex commands need to be run before 1atex2rtf because the aux and bbl files are needed to produce the proper output The result of this conversion will create myfile rtf which you may open in many modern word processors such as Microsoft word or Open Office 38 4 Convert to HTML There are many converters to HTML Chapter 26 3 on page 231 http en wikipedia org wiki OpenOffice org 20Writer http en wikipedia org wiki Microsoft 20Word http latex2rtf sourceforge net oo 311 Export To Other Formats hevea One option is the HEVEA program hevea mylatexfile latex2html latex2html html version 4 0 latinl unicode split 1 nonavigation noinfo title MyDocument MyDocument tex TeX4ht TeX4ht is a very powerful conversion program but its configuration is not straightforward Basically a configuration file has to be prepared and then the program is called bibtex2html for BibTeX bibtex2html mybibtexfile 38 5 Convert to image formats In some cases it may be sufficient to simply copy a region of a PDF or PS file using the tools available in a PDF viewer for example using LaTeX to typeset a formula for pasting into a presentation This however will not generally have sufficient resolution for whole pages or large areas On nix the LaTeX package preview a
30. log Gives a detailed account of what happened during the last compiler run 28 And what now Common file extensions in LaTeX toc Stores all your section headers It gets read in for the next compiler run and is used to produce the table of contents lof This is like toc but for the list of figures lot And again the same for the list of tables idx If your document contains an index LaTeX stores all the words that go into the index in this file Process this file with makeindex ind The processed idx file ready for inclusion into your document on the next compile cycle 1Lg Logfile telling what makeindex did Sty LaTeX Macro package This is a file you can load into your LaTeX document using the usepackage command tex LaTeX or TeX input file It can be compiled with latex out hyperref package file just one for the master file 5 4 And what now 5 4 1 Formatting text See Document Structure and the Formatting part 5 4 2 Big Projects See General Guidelines for further explanations When working on big documents you might want to split the input file into several parts LaTeX has three commands to insert a file into another when building the document The simplest is the input command input filename input inserts the contents of another file named filename tex note that the tex extension is omitted For all practica
31. pdflatex koma_env July 5 2009 PS You can find the full text of GFDL license at http wwe gnu org copyleft Z i Arel enck Copyright permission form Figure 49 A sample letter with folding marks ready for standardized windowed envelopes Folding the print of the resulting file koma_env pdf according the folding marks it can be placed into standardized windowed envelopes DIN C6 5 DL C4 C5 or C6 In addition to the default the KOMA package includes predefined format definitions for different standardized Swiss and Japanese letter formats 21 4 Reference letter cls commands command description name 181 Letters command description signature address location telephone makelabels stopbreaks startbreaks Vopening closing Vct Start a parbox introduced with ccname Vencl Start a parbox introduced with enclname ps Begins a new paragraph normally at the close of the letter stopletter empty returnaddress empty startlabels Wnlabel Mescriptionlabel ccname cc enclname encl pagename Page headtoname To today Long form date environment Description letter See main article description verse quotation quote 21 5 Sources KOMA Script The Guide pl LaTeX Pisanie list w fr LaT
32. so the contents of the border is the picture as generated by the above code Another solution is to use textext a plug in for Inkscape which allows one to insert small LaTeX objects into SVG images These images can then be saved as EPS or PDF files which may then be imported into the LaTeX document proper Yet another solution is provided by Ipic which allows TeX annotations to imported graphics 23 2 1 Using xfig to create pictures An option that allows significantly more flexibility while creating graphics that are consistent with LaTeX is to use xfig xfig is a drawing program which allows exports into various formats from which it s possible to import into LaTeX While the software is designed for Linux it can be run using Macports for Macs and under any X Window System for Windows There are many ways to use xfig to create graphics for LaTeX documents One method is to export the drawing as a LaTeX document This method however suffers from various drawbacks lines can be drawn only at angles that are multiples of 30 and 45 degrees lines with arrows can only be drawn at angles that are multiples of 45 degrees several curves are not supported etc Exporting a file as PDF LaTeX or PS LaTeX on the other hand offers a good deal more flexibility in drawing Here s how it s done 1 Create the drawing in xfig Wherever you need LaTeX text such as a mathematical formula enter a LaTeX string in a textbox Use the
33. to change header and footer of any page of the document It is described in the Page Layout section fontenc to choose the font encoding of the output text You might need it if you are writing documents in a language other than English Check in the Internationalization section geometry for easy management of document margins and the document page size glossaries for creation of glossaries and list of acronyms For more information see relevant chapter graphicx to manage external pictures hyperref it gives LaTeX the possibility to manage links within the document or to any URL when you compile in PDF For more information see the relevant section Pre NO 00 1 Ro 250 http en wikibooks org wiki LaTeX 2FPackages 2FColor Chapter 12 on page 95 Chapter 39 on page 315 Chapter 17 on page 161 http en wikibooks org wiki LaTeX 2FPackages 2FHyperref Packages list indentfirst once loaded the beginning of any chapter section is indented by the usual paragraph indentation inputenc to choose the encoding of the input text You might need it if you are writing documents in a language other than English Check in the Internationalization section latexsym other mathematical symbols listings to insert programming code within the docu ment Many languages are supported and the output can be customized For more informa tion see the r
34. 15 5 The hyperref package and nameref o o o 15 6 The hyperref package and phantomsection 15 7 References ii de ta mw Me e de Indexing 16 1 Using riak rdx sx Le e RR e A pee e E EO Eee E pr Glossary 17 1 Using ees Sar LES enn dues ow es aie a oe eae RI a 17 2 Defining glossary entries 17 3 Defmingt rms EEN ae an ran Ben ee ee e Algorithms and Pseudocode Typesetting Algorithms 19 1 Typesetting using the algorithmic package 19 2 Typesetting using the algorithmicx package 19 3 The algorithmenvironment 0 00 002 eee eee 19 4 Typesetting using the program package e 19 5 Source Code Formatting using the Listings package References Letters 21 1 THE Vetter CLASS o 4 0 4 0 4 eh Rer eh A Rh Be Sy eke nS AE he de Seay tone Be 21 2 Envelopes bas ody saline dah AE eee ee doge d mur e DP ae Bh chee a de ie 21 3 Windowed envelopes 21 4 Reference letter cls commands 2 2 EEE En nen 21 3 OUNCES A BR eo ECC CN 159 159 161 161 161 162 163 165 165 165 169 170 172 175 Contents 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 VI Importing Graphics 22 1 The graphixex package nit vacio eade rete e o IRE qu ds 22 2 Creating Vector Graphics o en 22 3 References oc ove E A en Be a de A a Creating Graphics DN OVERVIEW A A A e a o dote oo e cera d AEN d 23 2 Alternatives E
35. 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 21 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 90 http www ctan org tex archive macros latex contrib ctable Chapter 24 2 9 on page 214 http www ctan org tex archive macros latex contrib caption http tug ctan org pkg hhline http tug ctan org pkg array http tug ctan org pkg colortbl http tug ctan org pkg supertabular http tug ctan org pkg longtable http ctan org tex archive macros latex contrib threeparttable http tug ctan org pkg xtab http tug ctan org pkg tabulary http tug ctan org pkg arydshln http tug ctan org pkg ctable http tug ctan org pkg slashbox http tug ctan org pkg dcolumn http tug ctan org pkg rccol http tug ctan org pkg numprint http www ctan org pkg spreadtab http ctan org tex archive macros latex contrib siunitx http fr wikibooks org wiki LaTeX 2FFaire des tableaux http nl wikibooks org wiki LaTeX 2FTabellen http pl wikibooks org wiki LaTeX 2FTabele Resize tables resizebox width height object can be used with tabular to specify the height and width of a table The following example shows how to resize a table to 8cm width while maintaining the original width height ratio resizebox 8cm begin tabular end tabular Alternatively you can use scalebox ratio object inthe same way but with ratios rather than fixed sizes scalebox 0 7 begin tabular end tabular Both resizebo
36. 1999 ISBN S 1 260 SEMINAR ODER EXAMENSARBEIT Autor Autor Titel Untertitel Auflage Ort Verlag Datum ISBN S Standard 1 Standard 2 MLA BibTex EndNote Figure 6 Literatur Generator 24 http scholar google com 25 http scholar google de scholar preferences hl en amp lr amp output search 68 BibTeX R Eile Edit K sse Search All Fields Clear Incremental Float O Filter Settings 9 LETS lt LL ej ej 9j All Entries B Cod Y Ingestion Y Energetics Y Modelling B Salmon Y Modelling E Rotifer Y Modelling Y Enrichment Y Water quality Y Resting eggs Kyo DHA Artemia Modelling Y DEB Y Assimilation Ciliates Serios V A Status BibTeX key is unique View BibTeX Tools Web search Options Author 4 Help JabRef Dg bonas ADEN 27 dan 6 hovedbase bib references bib Title Anderson et al Ando and Kobayashi N C Ando et al Ang and Petrell Anon C Anras and Lagard re Aparici et al 9 de Araujo et al de Araujo et al Attramadal Baird et al Balchen Balchen Balompapueng et al Balon de Araujo and Hagiwara Metabolic stoichiometry and the fate of excess carbon and nutrients i 2005 Positional distribution of docosahexaenoic acid in triacyl sn glycero 2004 Positional distribution of n 3 highly unsaturated fatty acids in triacyl
37. 387 http en wikibooks org w index php 388 http en wikibooks org w index php 389 http en wikibooks org w index php 390 http en wikibooks org w index php 391 http en wikibooks org w index php 392 http en wikibooks org w index php 393 http en wikibooks org w index php 394 http en wikibooks org w index php 395 http en wikibooks org w index php 396 http en wikibooks org w index php 382 ti ti titl titl titl titl titl titl titl titl titl titl titl titl titl titl titl CEL titl titl titl titl titl CF ct ct ct ct ct ct ct ct ct ct ct ct ct ct ct ct ct cr ct ct ct ct ct ct titl title e User Spook e User Stephan Schneider e User SteveM82 e User StevenJohnston User Stoettner e User Stuples e User Svick e User Swift e User TFTD e User TWiStErRob e User Tauriel 1 e User Tdomhan e User Teles e User Tgwizard e User Thefrankinator e User Thenub314 User Thietkeweb e User TinyTimZamboni e User Tom Morris e User Tom marcik e User Tomato86 e User Tomxlawson e User TomyDuby e User Topodelapradera e User TorfusPolymorphus Wiki users 14 Tosha 2 Towsonu20033 1 Tpr Tualha Tuetschek Tuka 5 Tully Tweenk Uluboz Unbitwise 6 1 Unco 3 Urhixidur 08 6 Vadik wiki 3 Vaffelkake 1 Vaucouleur 3 Velociostrich 10 Vesal 3 56 Waldir 4 Wdcf P 1 Webinn 2 Wenzes
38. Celtic 6863606386 8 amp 9 amp 9 NN Benfica amp 6 amp 2 amp 6 1 amp 3 amp 7886 7 NN FC Copenhagen amp 6 2 amp 1 amp 2 amp 5 amp 8 amp 7 NN end tabular Team Pis Manchester United Benfica P 6 Celtic 6 6 FC Copenhagen 6 oog L C Co r2 E7 m ano oo COO OU d Figure 11 12 Chapter 12 on page 95 13 Chapter 10 13 on page 91 84 12 The tabular environment 10 2 7 expressions The column separator can be specified with the construct It typically takes some text as its argument and when appended to a column it will automatically insert that text into each cell in that column before the actual data for that cell This command kills the inter column space and replaces it with whatever is between the curly braces To add space use hspace width Admittedly this is not that clear and so will require a few examples to clarify Sometimes it is desirable in scientific tables to have the numbers aligned on the decimal point This can be achieved by doing the following 3 14159 16 2 begin tabular r 1 123 456 3 amp 14159 NN 16 amp 2 123 amp 456 end tabular Note that the headers should be enclosed in multicolumn 2 1 HEADER Alternatively to center the column on the decimal separator the dcolumn package may be used which provides a new column specifier for floating point data The space suppressing qualities of the e
39. Chomsky 1956 1957 If you want an extra space then you need 7 Some of the options controlled by bibpunct are also accessible by passing options to the natbib package when it is loaded These options also allow some other aspect of the bibliography to be controlled and can be seen in the table right So as you can see this package is quite flexible especially as you can easily switch between different citation styles by changing a single parameter Do have a look at the Natbib manual it s a short document and you can learn even more about how to use it 9 3 BibTeX I have previously introduced the idea of embedding references at the end of the document and then using the cite command to cite them within the text In this tutorial I want to do a little better 7 http www ctex org documents packages bibref natbib pdf 55 Bibliography Management than this method as it s not as flexible as it could be Which is why I wish to concentrate on using BibTeX A BibTeX database is stored as a bib file It is a plain text file and so can be viewed and edited easily The structure of the file is also quite simple An example of a BibTeX entry article greenwade93 author George D Greenwade title The C omprehensive T ex A rchive N etwork CTAN year 19938 journal TUGBoat volume 14 number 3 pages 342 351 Each entry begins with the declaration of the referen
40. Document is released under this License If a section does not fit the above definition of Secondary then it is not allowed to be designated as Invariant The Document may contain zero Invariant Sections If the Document does not identify any Invariant Sections then there are none The Cover Texts are certain short passages of text that are listed as Front Cover Texts or Back Cover Texts in the notice that says that the Document is released under this License A Front Cover Text may be at most 5 words and a Back Cover Text may be at most 25 words A Transparent copy of the Document means a machine readable copy rep resented in a format whose specification is available to the general public that is suitable for revising the document straightforwardly with generic text editors or for images composed of pixels generic paint programs or for drawings some widely available drawing editor and that is suitable for input to text formatters or for automatic translation to a variety of formats suitable for input to text formatters A copy made in an otherwise Transparent file format whose markup or absence of markup has been arranged to thwart or discourage subsequent modification by readers is not Transparent An image format is not Transparent if used for any substantial amount of text A copy that is not Transparent is called Opaque Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain ASCII without markup Texinfo input
41. Either switch to mathematic mode via begin math end math or use the quick math mode ensuremath math stuff This can also happen if you use the wrong character encoding for example using utf8 without usepackagelutf8 inputenc or using iso8859 1 without usepackage latin1 inputenc there are several character encoding formats make sure to pick the right one 7 3 4 Runaway argument Runaway argument December 2004 maketitle Paragraph ended before date was complete to be read again Xpar 1 8 In this error the closing curly brace has been omitted from the date It s the opposite of the error of too many s and it results in maket itle trying to format the title page while LaTeX is still expecting more text for the date As maketitle creates new paragraphs on the title page this is detected and LaTeX complains that the previous paragraph has ended but Mate is not yet finished 7 3 5 Underfull hbox Underfull hbox badness 1394 in paragraph at lines 28 30 LY1 brm b n 10 Bull RJ LY1 brm m n 10 41 Errors and Warnings Ac count ing in Busi 94 This is a warning that LaTeX cannot stretch the line wide enough to fit without making the spacing bigger than its currently permitted maximum The badness 0 10 000 indicates how severe this is here you can probably ignore a badness of 1394 It says what lines of your file 1t was typesetting when it found this and the number in square
42. If the project yields two or more different text documents t runk contains a subdirectory for each text document A slightly different version a branch of a text document e g for presentation at a conference can be prepared either in an additional subdirectory of trunk or in a new subdirectory of branches When a text document is submitted to a journal or a conference we create a tag in the directory tags so that it is easy to identify the submitted version of the document at a later date This feature has been proven very useful When creating branches and tags it is important always to use the Subversion client and not the tools of the local file system for these actions because this saves disk space on the server and it preserves information about the same history of these documents Often the question arises which files should be put under version control Generally all files that are directly modified by the user and that are necessary for compiling the document should be included in the version control system Typically these are the LaTeX source code tex files the main document and possibly some subdocuments and all pictures that are inserted in the document eps jpg png and x pdf files All LaTeX classes x c1s LaTeX styles x st y BibTeX data bases x bib and BibTeX styles x bst generally should be hosted in the repository of the common texmf tree but they could be included in the respecti
43. Phi amp A B B y T z IL 0 9 Scroll down to List of Mathematical Symbols for a complete list of Greek symbols 13 4 Operators An operator is a function that is written as a word e g trigonometric functions sin cos tan logarithms and exponentials log exp LaTeX has many of these defined as commands 5 Chapter 13 20 on page 145 6 Chapter 13 20 on page 145 7 Chapter 13 16 on page 137 113 Mathematics MT cos 2Ntheta cos 2 cos 20 cos 0 sin 0 theta sin 2 theta For certain operators such as limits the subscript is placed underneath the operator lim_ x to infty exp x 0 lim exp x 0 For the modular operator there are two commands bmod and pmod NE a bmod b N a mod b NE x equiv a pmod b x a mod b To use operators which are not pre defined such as argmax 10 see custom operators 13 5 Powers and indices Powers and indices are equivalent to superscripts and subscripts in normal text mode The caret character is used to raise something and the underscore _ is for lowering If more than one expression is raised or lowered they should be grouped using curly braces and 8 http en wikipedia 9 http en wikipedia 10 http en wikipedia 1 http en wikibooks 20operators 114 org wiki Limit 20 28mathematics 29 org wiki Modular 20arithmetic org wiki argmax org wiki 2FAdvan
44. Preamble The GNU General Public License is a free copyleft license for software and other kinds of works The licenses for most software and other practical works are designed to take away your freedom to share and change the works By contrast the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change all versions of a program to make sure it remains free software for all its users We the Free Software Foundation use the GNU General Public License for most of our software it applies also to any other work released this way by its authors You can apply it to your programs too When we speak of free software we are referring to freedom not price Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the free dom to distribute copies of free software and charge for them if you wish that you receive source code or can get it if you want it that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs and that you know you can do these things To protect your rights we need to prevent others from denying you these rights or asking you to surrender the rights Therefore you have certain re sponsibilities if you distribute copies of the software or if you modify it responsibilities to respect the freedom of others For example if you distribute copies of such a program whether gratis or for a fee you must pass on to the recipients the same freedoms that you received Yo
45. Rerun to get cross references right Don t be alarmed it s almost complete As you can guess all you have to do is follow its instructions and run LaTeX for the third time and the document will be output as expected without further problems If you want a pdf output instead of a dvi output you can use pdflatex instead of latex as follows l pdflatex latex source code tex 2 bibtex latex source code aux 3 pdflatex latex source code tex 4 pdflatex latex source code tex Extensions are optional if you put them note that the bibtex command takes the AUX file as input Note that if you are editing your source in vim and attempt to use command mode and the current file shortcut 96 to process the document like this 1 pdflatex 2 bibtex You will get an error similar to this 1 I couldn t open file name current file tex aux It appears that the file extension is included by default when the current file command 46 is executed To process your document from within vim you must explicitly name the file without the file extension for bibtex to work as is shown below 1 pdflatex 2 bibtex latex source code without file extension it looks for the AUX file as mentioned above 3 pdflatex 4 pdflatex 63 Bibliography Management However it is much easier to install the Vim LaTeX plugin from here This allows you to simply type MI when not in insert mode and al
46. When a sequence of multiple citations are needed you should use a single cite command The citations are then separated by commas Note that you must not use spaces between the citations Here s an example 52 Citations cite citation0l citation02 citation03 The result will then be shown as citations inside the same brackets 9 2 3 No Cite If you only want a reference to appear in the bibliography but not where it is referenced in the main text then the nocite command can be used for example Lamport showed in 1995 something nocite lamport95 A special version of the command nocite x includes all entries from the database whether they are referenced in the document or not 9 2 4 Natbib Natbib commands Citation command Output citet goossens93 Goossens et al 1993 citep goossens93 Goossens et al 1993 citet goossens93 Goossens Mittlebach and Samarin 1993 citep goossens93 Goossens Mittlebach and Samarin 1993 citeauthor goossens93 Goossens et al Xciteauthorx goossens93 Goossens Mittlebach and Samarin citeyear goossens93 1993 citeyearpar goossens93 1993 citealt goossens93 Goossens et al 1993 citealp goossens93 Goossens et al 1993 Using the standard LaTeX bibliography support you will see that each reference is numbered and each citation corresponds to the numbers The numeric style of
47. You can also define both a name and a symbol Note that not all glossary styles show defined symbols To define a new acronym you use the macro 162 18 Algorithms and Pseudocode LaTeX has a variety of packages that can help to format algorithms code and pseudocode These packages provide stylistic enhancements over a uniform style 1 e typewriter fonts so that constructs such as loops or conditionals are visually separated from other text 1 http en wikipedia org wiki pseudocode 163 19 Typesetting Algorithms 19 1 Typesetting using the algorithmic package The algorithmic package uses a different set of commands than the algorithmicx package Basic commands are NState text If lt condition gt text EndIf For lt condition gt text EndFor ForAll lt condition gt lt text gt EndFor While lt condition gt text EndWhile Repeat lt text gt Until lt condition gt Require lt text gt Return lt text gt Comment lt text gt Complete documentation is listed at http www tug org texlive Contents live texmf dist doc latex algorithms algorithms pdf Most commands are similar to the algorithmicx equivalents but with different capitalization 19 2 Typesetting using the algorithmicx package The algorithmicx package provides a number of popular constructs for algorithm designs Put usepackage algpseudocode in the preamble to use the algorithmic environment to wri
48. a bar a a grave a a acute a a dot a ddot a not a mathring a XoversishtsptwIABAD Voverleft ssowIABLAB ar m arr a overline aaa aaa check a breve a d vec a a dddot fa ddddot a widehat AAA AAA widetilde AAA tilde a a 13 13 Plus and minus signs Latex deals with the and signs in two possible ways The most common is as a binary operator When two maths elements appear either side of the sign it is assumed to be a binary operator and as such allocates some space either side of the sign The alternative way is a sign designation This is when you state whether a mathematical quantity is either positive or negative This is common for the latter as in maths such elements are assumed to be positive unless a is prefixed to it In this instance you want the sign to appear close to the appropriate element to show their association If you put a or a with nothing before it but you want it to be handled like a binary operator you can add an invisible character before the operator using This can be useful if you are writing multiple line formulas and a new line could start with a or a for example then you can fix some strange alignments adding the invisible character where necessary A plus minus sign used for uncertainty is written as NI pm N 59 requires the amsmath package 60 requires the amsmath package 131 Mathematics 13 14 Controllin
49. but not required that you contact the authors of the Document well before redistributing any large number of copies to give them a chance to provide you with an updated version of the Document 4 MODIFICA TIONS You may copy and distribute a Modified Version of the Document under the conditions of sections 2 and 3 above provided that you release the Modi fied Version under precisely this License with the Modified Version filling the role of the Document thus licensing distribution and modification of the Modified Version to whoever possesses a copy of it In addition you must do these things in the Modified Version A Use in the Title Page and on the covers if any a title distinct from that of the Document and from those of previous versions which should if there were any be listed in the History section of the Document You may use the same title as a previous version if the original publisher of that version gives permission B List on the Title Page as authors one or more persons or entities responsible for authorship of the modifications in the Modified Version together with at least five of the principal authors of the Document all of its principal authors if it has fewer than five unless they release you from this requirement C State on the Title page the name of the publisher of the Modified Version as the publisher D Preserve all the copyright notices of the Document E Add an appropriate copy rig
50. int y Jydx mathrm d x mathrm d x mathrm d x The negative space may seem like an odd thing to use however it wouldn t be there if it didn t have some use Take the following example 133 Mathematics NE left begin array c n NN r end array right frac n r n r n _ n y mec The matrix like expression for representing binomial coefficients is too padded There is too much space between the brackets and the actual contents within This can easily be corrected by adding a few negative spaces after the left bracket and before the right bracket NE left begin array c n NN r end array Ni Nright frac n r n r In any case adding some spaces manually should be avoided whenever possible it makes the source code more complex and it s against the basic principles of a What You See is What You Mean approach The best thing to do is to define some commands using all the spaces you want and then when you use your command you don t have to add any other space Later if you change your mind about the length of the horizontal space you can easily change it modifying only the command you defined before Let us use an example you want the d of a dx in an integral to be in roman font and a small space away from the rest If you want to type an integral like int x A mathrm d x you can define a command like this newcommand dd mathrm d in the preamble
51. is a cross platform open source LaTeX editor with interface similar to Texmaker TeXnicCenter TeXnicCenter is a popular free and open source LaTeX editor for Windows It also has a similar user interface to TeXmaker and Kile WinEdt WinEdt is a powerful and versatile text editor with strong predisposition towards creation of LaTeX TeX documents for Windows It has been designed and configured to integrate with TeX Systems such as MiTeX or TeX Live Its in built macro helps in compiling the LaTeX source to the WYSIWYG like DVI or PDF or PS and also in exporting the document to other mark up languages as html or XML 28 http www lyx org 29 http kile sourceforge net 30 http en wikipedia org wiki KDE Software Compilation 4 3 http www xmlmath net texmaker 32 http texstudio sourceforge net 33 http www texniccenter org 34 http www winedt com 10 Prerequisites BaKoMa TeX BaKoMa TeX is an editor for Windows and Mac OS with WYSIWYG like features It takes care of compiling the LaTeX source and updating it constantly to view changes to document almost in real time TeXShop TeXShop is a TeXworks like editor for Mac OS gedit latex plugin Gedit with gedit latex plugin is also worth trying out for users of GNOME GEdit is a cross platform application for Windows Mac and Linux Gummi Gummi is a LaTeX editor for Linux which compiles the output of pdflatex in realtime and shows it
52. lished by the Free Software Foundation If the Program does not specify a version number of the GNU General Public License you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation Tf the Program specifies that a proxy can decide which future versions of the GNU General Public License can be used that proxy s public statement of acceptance of a version permanently authorizes you to choose that version for the Program Later license versions may give you additional or different permissions However no additional obligations are imposed on any author or copyright holder as a result of your choosing to follow a later version 15 Disclaimer of Warranty THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MER CHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFEC TIVE YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING REPAIR OR CORRECTION 16 Limitation of Liability IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MODIFIES AND OR CONVEYS THE PRO GRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR
53. or acronyms To tell BibTeX to keep them use the good old curly braces around the letter in question or letters if it s an acronym and all will be well 13 http www see out com sandramau bibpat html 60 BibTeX title The LaTeX Companion However avoid putting the whole title in curly braces as it will look odd if different capitalization format is used title The LaTeX Companion For convenience though many people simply put double curly braces which may help when writing scientific articles for different magazines conferences with different BibTex styles that do sometimes keep and sometimes not keep the capital letters title The LaTeX Companion As an alternative try other BibTex styles or modify the existing 9 3 5 A few additional examples Below you will find a few additional examples of bibliography entries The first one covers the case of multiple authors in the Surname Firstname format and the second one deals with the incollection case article AbedonHymanThomas2003 author Abedon S T and Hyman P and Thomas C year 2003 title Experimental examination of bacteriophage latent period evolution as a response to bacterial availability journal Applied and Environmental Microbiology volume 69 pages 7499 7506 incollection Abedon1994 author Abedon S T title Lysis and the interaction between free phages and infected
54. ppl normalfont upshape Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet consectitur adipiscing elit Iwona font renewcommand s rmdefault iwona normalfont upshape Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet consectitur adipiscing elit Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet consectitur adipiscing elit Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet consectitur adipiscing elit Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet consectitur adipiscing elit Figure 68 1 http en wikipedia org wiki TrueType 269 Fonts 33 1 XeTeX If you use the XeTeX or LuaTeX engine and the fontspec package you ll be able to use any font installed in the system effortlessly XeTeX also allows using OpenType technology of modern fonts like specifying alternate glyphs and optical size variants XeTeX also uses Unicode by default which might be helpful for font issues To use the fonts simply load the fontspec package and set the font documentclass article usepackage fontspec setmainfont Arial begin document Lorem ipsum end document Then compile the document with XeLateX or LuaLaTeX Note that you can only generate pdf files and that you need a sufficiently new TeX distribution TeX Live 2009 should work for XeTeX and Tex Live 2010 for LuaTeX Also you should NOT load the inputenc or fontenc package To make support both pdflatex and XeTeX you can use the i xetex macro from the ifxetex package documentclass article usepackage ifxetex ifxetex usepackage fontspec
55. source to plain text and open resulting file in a word processor like OpenOffice org or KOffice If you want to count words you can again use LyX or convert your LaTeX source to plain text and use for example UNIX wc command detex yourfile wc An alternative to the det ex command is the pdftotext command which extracts an ASCII text file from PDF 1 pdflatex yourfile tex 2 pdftotext yourfile pdf 3 wc yourfile txt 36 7 New even page In the twoside mode you have the ability to get a new odd side page by Ncleardoublepage However LaTeX doesn t give you the ability to get a new even side page The following method opens up this The following must be put in your document preamble usepackage ifthen newcommand newevenside ifthenelse isodd thepage newpage newpage phantom placeholder doesn t appear on page thispagestyle empty if want no header footer newpage 11 http en wikipedia org wiki LyX 12 http en wikipedia org wiki Kile 13 http en wikipedia org wiki Emacs 14 Chapter 38 6 on page 313 298 Sidebar with information To active the new even side page type the following where you want the new even side newevenside If the given page is an odd side page the next new page is subsequently an even side page and LaTeX will do nothing more than a regular newpage However if the given page is an even page LaTeX will make a new odd pa
56. tex file LaTeX makes this very easy thanks to two commands input filename 301 General Guidelines and include filename The differences between these files will be explained below but what they have in common is that they process the contents of filename tex before continuing with the rest of the base file When the compiler processes your base file and reaches the command input or include it reads filename tex and processes its content in accordance with the formatting commands specified in the base file This way you can put all the formatting options in your base file and then input or include the files which contain the actual content of your work This means that the important part of your working process i e writing is kept largely separate from formatting choices which is one of the main reasons why LaTeX is so good for serious writing You will thus be dealing solely with text and very basic commands such as Nsect ion emph etc Your document will be uncluttered and much easier to work with The second method of including a file include filename differs from the first in some important ways You cannot nest include statements within a file added via include Ninput on the other hand allows you to call files which themselves call other files ad infinitum well nearly You can however include a file which contains one or more input commands Please resist the temptation to nest files in this way simp
57. www math bme hu latex 322 Hyphenating languages Icelandic Special Characters Nae NDH dh a g 39 4 11 Italian Italian is well supported by LaTeX Just add usepackagelitalian babel at the beginning of your document and the output of all the commands will be translated properly You can add letters with accents without any particular setting just write a Ne e Ci Vo Nu and you will get NB the symbol changes if the inclination of the accent changes Anyway if you do so it could be quite annoying since it s time wasting Moreover if you are using any spell checking program citt is correct but citt a will be seen as a mistake If you add Vusepackage latinl inputenc at the beginning of your document LaTeX will include correctly all your accented letters To sum up just add usepackage italian babel usepackage latin1l inputenc at the beginning of your document and you can write in Italian without being worried of translations and fonts If you are writing your document without getting any error then don t worry about anything else If you start getting some unknown errors whenever you use an Italian letter then you have to worry about the encoding of your files As known any LaTeX source is just plain text so you ll have to insert accented letters properly within the text file If you write your document using always the same program on the same compu
58. 10 11 12 http http http http www ctan org get macros latex contrib powerdot doc powerdot pdf www math linux com spip php article77 happymutant com latex misce beamer php f r wikibooks org wiki LaTeX 2FFaire 220des 20pr l E9sentations 221 26 Hyperlinks LaTeX enables typesetting of hyperlinks useful when the resulting format is PDF and the hyperlinks can be followed It does so using the package hyperref 26 1 Hyperref The package hyperref provides LaTeX the ability to create hyperlinks within the document It works with pdflatex and also with standard latex used with dvips and ghostscript or dvipdfm to build a PDF file If you load it you will have the possibility to include interactive external links and all your internal references will be turned to hyperlinks The compiler pdflatex makes it possible to create PDF files directly from the LaTeX source and PDF supports more features than DVI In particular PDF supports hyperlinks and the only way to introduce them in LaTeX is using hyperref Moreover PDF can contain other information about a document such as the title the author etc and you can edit those using this same package 26 2 Usage The basic usage with the standard settings is straightforward Just load the package in the preamble at the end of all the other packages but prior to other settings Nusepackage hyperref This will automatically turn all your internal references into
59. 12 on page 95 36 Chapter 12 5 on page 107 37 Chapter 6 1 7 on page 36 38 Chapter 6 1 7 on page 36 352 N Defines a box that has a specified width independent from its content See LaTeX Advanced Topics Boxes Wmaketitle Causes the title page to be typeset using information provided by commands such as title and Vauthor markboth markright mathcal mathop mbox Write a text in roman font inside a math part medskip multicolumn multiput 45 14 N newcommand Defines a new command See New Commands newcounter newenvironment Defines a new environment See New Environments newfont newlength newline Ends current line and starts a new one See Page Layout newpage Ends current page and starts a new one See Page Layou newsavebox newtheorem 39 Chapter 32 2 on page 266 40 Chapter 34 1 on page 273 41 Chapter 34 2 on page 274 42 Chapter 12 5 on page 107 43 Chapter 12 5 on page 107 i 353 Command Glossary nocite Adds a reference to the bibliography without an inline citation nocite causes all entries in a bibtex database to be added to the bibliography noindent nolinebreak nonfrenchspacing Setting the command untoggles the command frenchspacing and activates LaTeX standards to insert more space after a period than after an ordinary character normalsize Sets default font size See Formatting nopagebreak Suggests LaTeX not to br
60. 15 http www gnuplot info 16 http www r project org 17 http gmt soest hawaii edu 18 http projects gnome org gnumeric 19 http matplotlib sourceforge net 20 http en wikipedia org wiki lossless 21 http en wikipedia org wiki Vector 20graphics 22 http en wikipedia org wiki Raster 20graphics 23 http mirrors ctan org info svg inkscape InkscapePDFLaTeX pdf 185 Importing Graphics e EPS can be used with the help of the epstopdf package Please see these instructions JPG and PNG are supported by any image processing program so you just have to use the one you prefer If you want to create high quality vector PDF to embed within your PDF document you can use Inkscape it supports many vector formats and so you can use it to convert from one to an other You could also create your graphics directly with Inkscape If you want to make mathematical plots then Gnuplot can save in any format Note that EPS files cannot be used with pdflatex however they can be converted to PDF using the epstopdf utility included in most LaTeX distributions This can be called automatically by LaTeX using the epstopdf package In Windows multiple files can be converted by placing the following line in a batch file a text file with a BAT extension in the same directory as the images for f in eps do epstopdf f which can then be run from the command line In Bash this can be done by for i in eps do e
61. 2 Chapter 16 on page 159 256 External resources Where to put files from packages Type Directory under texmf Description or texmf local fd tex latex psnfss Font Definition files for PostScript Type 1 fonts map fonts map Font mapping files mf fonts source public typeface METAFONT outline pdf doc package documentation pfb fonts typel foundryltypeface PostScript Type 1 outline sty tex latex packagename Style file the normal package content tex doc TeX source for package docu mentation tex tex plain packagename Plain TeX macro files Um fonts tfm foundry typeface TeX Font Metrics for META FONT and Type 1 fonts ttf fonts true TrueType font type foundryltypeface vf fonts vf foundryltypeface TeX virtual fonts others tex latex packagename other types of file unless in structed otherwise For most fonts on CTAN the foundry is public 4 Update your index Finally run your TeX indexer program to update the package database This program comes with every modern version of TeX and has various names depending on the LaTeX distribution you use Read the documentation that came with your installation to find out which it is or consult http www tug org fonts fontinstall html fndb teTeX TeX Live fpTeX texhash web2c mktexlsr MacTeX MacTeX appears to do this for you MikTeX initexmf update fndb or use the GUI MiKTeX 2 7 or later versions
62. 2004 Pellet wastage and subsurface and surface feeding behaviours associ 1998 Tall og fakta 2005 S tatistikkbilag til FHL s rsrapport 2005 Measuring cultured fish swimming behaviour first results on rainbow 2004 Sex allocation in haplodiploid cyclical parthenogens with density de 1998 Application of enzyme activity test for the diagnosis of rotifer mass c 2001 Effect of unionized ammonia viscosity and protozoan contamination 2001 Effect of unionized ammonia viscosity and protozoan contamination 2000 Water quality and microbial environment in a flow through and a recht 2004 Modelling the interacting effects of nutrient uptake light capture and 2001 Thirty years of research on the application of cybernetic methods in f 1999 Modeling prediction and control of fish behavior 1979 Resting egg formation of the rotifer textit Brachionus plicatilis usin 1997 The theory of saltatory ontogeny and life history models revisited 1985 The American 2005 09 Aquaculture Re Aquaculture Aquacultural E 2006 09 Aquaculture American Natu 2006 04 Bulletin of the 2005 11 Hydrobiologia 2005 11 Aquaculture Re 2005 11 2006 08 2005 09 2006 06 2006 06 Fisheries Science 2005 12 Journal of Plan Modeling Iden H Required fields 8 Optional fields a General 8 Abstract m Review BibTeX source i
63. 43 Chapter 2 on page 5 Chapter 2 on page 5 Chapter 2 on page 5 Chapter 2 on page 5 Chapter 2 on page 5 Chapter 2 on page 5 Chapter 2 on page 5 Chapter 2 on page 5 Chapter 2 on page 5 Chapter 2 on page 5 Chapter 2 on page 5 Chapter 2 on page 5 Chapter 2 on page 5 Chapter 2 on page 5 Chapter 2 on page 5 Chapter 2 on page 5 Chapter 2 on page 5 Chapter 2 on page 5 Chapter 2 on page 5 Chapter 2 on page 5 Chapter 2 on page 5 Chapter 2 on page 5 Chapter 2 on page 5 2 Introduction 2 1 What is TeX TeX is a low level markup and programming language created by Donald Knuth to typeset documents attractively and consistently The X representing the Greek letter chi is pronounced as in the ending of the Scottish loch or the name Bach Its name originates from the Greek word texvohoyia technologia which translates as technology in English its first syllable is tex similar to TeX in the Latin alphabet According to a different approach the name originates from the Greek word texvn techni which translates as art in English In the second case the first syllable is tey again Within the typesetting system its name is formatted as UNKNOWN TEMPLATE TeX Knuth started writing the TeX typesetting engine in 1977 to explore the potential of the digital printing equipment that was beginning to infiltrate the publishing industry at that time especially in the hope that he could reverse the trend of deteriorating typographical q
64. A better alternative is to retain the include calls and use the includeonly command in the preamble includeonly filename2 filename3 This way only include commands for the specified files will be executed and inclusion will be handled in only one place Note that there must be no spaces between the filenames and the commas Remember that the input file should omit all the commands referring to the main document structure which should be kept in the original document file This includes lines containing usepackages document class and everything but the code strictly referring to the section that is to be included In this way you ll avoid finding characters of your code in the output document or worse not finding anything after the included file in case you forget to erase the end document line of your included file 5 4 3 Working in a team See chapter Collaborative Writing of LaTeX Documents P 13 Chapter 35 on page 279 30 6 Document Structure The main point of writing a text is to convey ideas information or knowledge to the reader The reader will understand the text better 1f these ideas are well structured and will see and feel this structure much better if the typographical form reflects the logical and semantic structure of the content LaTeX is different from other typesetting systems in that you just have to tell it the logical and semantical structure of a text It then derives the typographical
65. DAM AGES INCLUDING ANY GENERAL SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR IN ABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES 17 Interpretation of Sections 15 and 16 If the disclaimer of warranty and limitation of liability provided above can not be given local legal effect according to their terms reviewing courts shall apply local law that most closely approximates an absolute waiver of all civil liability in connection with the Program unless a warranty or assumption of liability accompanies a copy of the Program in return for a fee END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs If you develop a new program and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms To do so attach the following notices to the program It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively state the exclusion of warranty and each file should have at least the copyright line and a pointer to where the full notice is found 49 2 GNU Free Documentation License Version 1 3 3 November 200
66. Edit tool to open the properties of each of those textboxes and change the option on the Special Flag field to Special This tells LaTeX to interpret these textboxes when it opens the figure 2 Goto File gt Export and export the file as PDF LaTeX both parts or PS LaTeX both parts depending on whether you are using pdflatex or pslatex to compile your file In your LaTeX document where the picture should be use the following where test is replaced by the name of the image begin figure htbp centering input test pdf_t caption Your figure label figure example end figure Observe that this is just like including a picture except that rather than using includegraphics we use input If the export was into PS LaTeX the file extension to include would be pstex t instead of pdf t 3 Make sure to include packages graphicx and color in the file with the usepackage command right below the document class command like this 9 Chapter 22 1 5 on page 191 10 http pav iki fi software textext 11 http www inkscape org 12 http www math uni leipzig de matveyev lpic 13 http www xfig org 14 http www macports org 201 Creating Graphics Nusepackage graphicx Nusepackage color And you re done For more details on using xfig with LaTeX this chapter of the xfig User Manual may prove helpful 15 http www epb lbl gov xfig latex and xfig html 16 http www epb lbl gov xfig contents
67. Excel etc and include it in the document as a cropped screenshot However this produces poor quality rasterized images Calc also allows you to copy paste the charts into OpenOffice Draw and save them as PDF files Using Microsoft Excel 2010 charts can be copied directly to Microsoft Expression Design 4 where they can be saved as PDF files These PDF files can be included in LaTeX This method produces high quality vectorized images An excellent method to render graphs is through gnuplot a free and versatile plotting software that has a special output filter directly for exporting files to LaTeX We assume that the data is in a CSV file comma separated text in the first and third column A simple gnuplot script to plot the data can look like this 9 http en wikipedia org wiki gnuplot 294 Graphics and Graph editors 1 5 Figure 75 gnuplot can plot various numerical data functions error distribution as well as 3D graphs and surfaces se se se se se se se se se tct ct ct ct E cb ct cet format g title Graph 3 Dependence of V_p on Sp D n xlabel Resistance Sp 0 Omega ylabel Voltage V p V border 3 xtics nomirror ytics nomirror terminal epslatex output graphl eps plot graphl csv using 1 3 Plot the data 295 Tips and Tricks Now gnuplot produces two files the graph drawing in graph eps and the text in graph tex The second includes the EPS imag
68. Handout mode In beamer class the default mode is presentation which makes the slides However you can work in a different mode that is called handout by setting this option when calling the class documentclass 12pt handout beamer This mode is useful to see each slide only one time with all its stuff on it making the itemize lt gt to be there all at once for instance printable version Nevertheless this makes an issue when working with the only command because its purpose is to have only some text or figures at atime and not all of them together 223 Presentations If you want to solve this you can add a statement to precise the behavior it must have when dealing with only commands in handout mode Suppose you have a code like this only lt 1 gt includegraphics picl eps only lt 2 gt includegraphics pic2 eps These pictures being completely different you want them both in the handout but they cannot be both on the same slide since they are large The solution is to add the handout statement to have the following only lt 1 handout 1 gt includegraphics picl eps only lt 2 handout 2 gt includegraphics pic2 eps This will ensure the handout will make a slide for each picture Now imagine you still have your two pictures with the only statements but the second one show the first one plus some other graphs and you don t need the first one to appear in the handout You can thus precise the handout
69. It does not matter whether you enter one or several spaces after a word An empty line starts a new paragraph It does not matter whether you enter one or several spaces after a word An empty line starts a new paragraph 5 1 2 Special Characters The following symbols are reserved characters that either have a special meaning under LaTeX or are unavailable in all the fonts If you enter them directly in your text they will normally not print but rather make LaTeX do things you did not intend 5 BOS 24 TN As you will see these characters can be used in your documents all the same by adding a prefix backslash MENS textasciicircum N amp _ W textbackslash The other symbols and many more can be printed with special commands in mathematical formulae or as accents The backslash character can not be entered by adding another backslash in front of it AM this sequence is used for line breaking For introducing a backslash in math mode you can use backslash instead The command produces a tilde which is placed over the next letter For example V n gives fi To produce just the character use V which places a over an empty box Similarly the command produces a hat over the next character for example 0 produces If you need in text to display the symbol you have to use textasciicircum If you want to insert text that might contain several particular symbols such as
70. License includ ing any patent licenses granted under the third paragraph of section 11 However if you cease all violation of this License then your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated a provisionally unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and finally terminates your license and b permanently if the copyright holder fails to notify you of the violation by some reasonable means prior to 60 days after the cessation Moreover your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated per manently if the copyright holder notifies you of the violation by some reason able means this is the first time you have received notice of violation of this License for any work from that copyright holder and you cure the violation prior to 30 days after your receipt of the notice Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate the licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License If your rights have been terminated and not permanently reinstated you do not qualify to receive new licenses for the same material under section 10 9 Acceptance Not Required for Having Copies You are not required to accept this License in order to receive or run a copy of the Program Ancillary propagation of a covered work occurring solely as a consequence of using peer to peer transmission to receive a copy likewise does not require acceptance However nothing other than th
71. Linux MiKTeX 2 51 Unicode Truetype font installer for LaTeX under Windows MikTeX Using TrueType fonts with TeX LaTeX and pdfTeX pdfLaTeX for MikTeX 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 vd d vd dd vd vd vd ttp ttp Lip Cp Ep ttp ttp ttp ttp www tug org TUGboat Articles tb27 1 tb86kroonenberg fonts pdf c caignaert free fr Install ttf Font pdf www tex ac uk ctan support installfont installfont pdf latex josef kleber de download installfont tl latex josef kleber de download installfont tl xpt sourceforge net techdocs language latex latex33 LaTeXAndTrueTypeFont achschaft physik uni greifswald de stitch ttf html william famille blum org software latexttf index html www radamir com tex ttf tex htm 271 34 Customizing LaTeX Documents produced with the commands you have learned up to this point will look acceptable to a large audience While they are not fancy looking they obey all the established rules of good typesetting which will make them easy to read and pleasant to look at However there are situations where LaTeX does not provide a command or environment that matches your needs or the output produced by some existing command may not meet your requirements In this chapter I will try to give some hints on how to teach LaTeX new tricks and how to make it produce output that looks different from what is provided by default 34 1 New commands To add your ow
72. Packagedocumentation 28 3 Packages list 6 d u u dese mg den tub ap ea eee ee A 183 183 195 197 199 199 200 203 203 205 214 215 217 217 226 226 226 229 229 229 231 235 235 237 238 238 239 239 239 239 241 241 241 242 242 243 243 245 246 Contents 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 28 4 Creating packages 5 22 2 2 a a ol eR an RN ex ders 28 9 External FESOUECES ENEE RUM deo e ee Bra che ore Ro IC dC Packages Installing Extra Packages Listings package Rotating package 314 Options a RARA A A SE eh NR aps 31 2 Display gotch s i 2 2 or dd LE ius Advanced Topics 32 1 Adding your own counters 3232 BOXES coo eA Saws qr Sedo ese Merov von eu Bar Sepe eng er eme oe AER 32 3 Rules and Struts ix uas eR Rove Wege a e Fonts SE We O osa doo e PR EEN 33 2 Useful websites D 88 m esee cae uestem we Customizing LaTeX 34 1 New commiands za sr a 2 war e RUP edo d ders 34 2 NeW Environments u 2 2 2 e dv UCM A ae ue e ali Nd e 34 3 Command line LaTeX 2 20 0 0 000 0000 00200002 art 34 4 Creating your own package Common 34 5 Creating yourownstyle es Collaborative Writing of LaTeX Documents 35L Abstract ia eroe ados ar ene SE bos ed diss 35 2 Introduction ae eae te Ro dete oM A eec Eu ce e a od Ae 35 3 Interchanging Documents 35 4 The Version Control System Subversion lee 35 5 Hosting LaTeX files in Subversion 35 6
73. Program re mains governed by this License without regard to the additional permissions When you convey a copy of a covered work you may at your option remove any additional permissions from that copy or from any part of it Addi tional permissions may be written to require their own removal in certain cases when you modify the work You may place additional permissions on material added by you to a covered work for which you have or can give appropriate copyright permission Notwithstanding any other provision of this License for material you add to a covered work you may if authorized by the copyright holders of that material supplement the terms of this License with terms a Disclaiming warranty or limiting liability differently from the terms of sections 15 and 16 of this License or b Requiring preservation of specified reasonable legal notices or author attributions in that material or in the Ap propriate Legal Notices displayed by works containing it or c Prohibiting misrepresentation of the origin of that material or requiring that modified versions of such material be marked in reasonable ways as different from the original version or d Limiting the use for publicity purposes of names of licensors or authors of the material or e Declining to grant rights under trademark law for use of some trade names trademarks or service marks or f Requiring indemnification of licensors and authors of that ma
74. Subversion really makes the difference 35 7 Managing collaborative bibliographies 33 8 Conclusion es au ts oe It A E ss 35 9 Acknowledgements EE zes a aa RES RR ROSA ORE RON RO 3 10References ice cod Pah dy anda ae su re e dl de due p UR a Tips and Tricks 36 1 Always writing LaTeX in roman en 36 2 id est and exempli gratia i e and e g o o e e 36 3 Grouping Figure Equation Numbering by Section 36 4 Generic header w s s ted got soy onu E ue o en eb Ae ELE eda ee e 36 5 Graphics and Graph editors 36 6 Spell checking and Word Counting 2 2 2 leen 36 7 New even page nn un 0a nun ee E ee 36 8 Sidebar with information 2 e 36 9 Hide auxiliary files a 255 259 263 264 264 265 265 266 268 269 270 270 273 273 274 276 276 277 VII Contents 37 General Guidelines 37 1 per TE E a nn ae dg 37 2 Getting LaTeX to process multiple files o 37 3 he EE 37 4 The main document document tex ss 37 5 Writing your document 37 6 External Links 0 4 3 oOx Wa war a Ed a 38 Export To Other Formats 38 1 Convert to PDE 2 2 22 2 23 Ad s 38 2 Convert to PostScript Lus uo v Ee OP AEA Ne ior a 38 3 Convert to RTE aa toe oe Re dorus repo er Pelo es BS 38 4 Convertto HTML A RR Beau are ROSE Ra Ba PES LER UE ee 38 5 Convert toimage format 38 6 Gonyert to plam ext ue ET oe apr e du up d duo i
75. The notation variable_name can be used within normal text maths expressions or programs to indicate a variable name Use origbar to get a normal symbol in a program The commands MA NB NP NQ NR NS Tand Z typeset the corresponding bold letter with the next object as a subscript eg S1 typesets bf SS 1 etc Primes work normally eg S Below is an example of typesetting a basic algorithm using the program package remember to add the usepackage program statement to your document preamble begin program mbox A fast exponentiation procedure BEGIN FOR i 1 TO 10 STEP 1 DO lexpt 2 1 NN Inewline NOD Xrcomment This text will be set flush to the right margin NWHERE PROC lexpt x n BODY z 1 ADO IF n 0 THEN EXIT AFI DO IF odd n THEN EXIT FI COMMENT This is a comment statement n n 2 x x x NOD n20 NJ n n 1 z z x MOD Iprint z ENDPROC NEND end program 170 Typesetting using the program package A fast exponentiation procedure begin for i 1 to 10 step 1 do expt 2 i newline od This text will be set flush to the right margin where proc expt r n z 1 do if n 0 then exit fi do if odd n then exit fi comment This is a comment statement n n 2 r r r od n gt 0 n n l z z T od print z end Figure 45 The commands and are redefined to typeset an algorithm in a minipage so an algorit
76. Vector Graphics SVG files although it can export to many formats that can be included in LaTeX files such as EPS and PDF From version 0 48 there is a combined PDF EPS PS LaTeX output option like XFig has 22 2 5 Editing EPS graphics As described above graphics content can be imported into LaTeX from outside programs as EPS files But sometimes you want to edit or retouch these graphics files An EPS file can be edited with any text editor since it is formatted as ASCII In a text editor you can achieve simple operations like replacing strings or moving items slightly but anything further becomes cumbersome To properly edit an EPS file you can convert it to an editable format using pstoedit For instance to get an Xfig editable file do pstoedit f fig input eps output fig And to get an SVG file for Inkscape you can do pstoedit f plot svg input eps output svg Sometimes pstoedit fails to create the target format for example when the EPS file contains clipping information A more robust way to edit EPS files is achieved by converting it first to PDF and then importing the resulting PDF in Inkscape Inkscape uses the Cairo library that achieves a high quality transformation of the original EPS figure 42 http en wikipedia org wiki Ipe 20 28program 29 43 http en wikibooks org wiki LaTeX 44 http www inkscape org 45 http www w3 org Graphics SVG 46 http en wikibooks org wiki LaTeX 47 http en wikibooks
77. a comprehensive manual available I d recommend experimenting with it and seeing what the results are when applied to a LaTeX document If you are using a custom built bst file it is important that LaTeX can find it So make sure it s in the same directory as the LaTeX source file unless you are using one of the standard style files such as plain or plainnat that come bundled with LaTeX these will be automatically found in the directories that they are installed Also make sure the name of the bst file you want to use is reflected in the bibliographystyle style command but don t include the bst extension 9 3 11 Localizing bibliography appearance When writing documents in languages other than English you may find it desirable to adapt the appearance of your bibliography to the document language This concerns words such as editors and or in as well as a proper typographic layout The babelbib package can be used here For example to layout the bibliography in German add the following to the header usepackage fixlanguage babelbib selectbiblanguage german Alternatively you can layout each bibliography entry according to the language of the cited document Nusepackage babelbib The language of an entry is specified as an additional field in the BibTeX entry article mueller08 ae language german For babelbib to take effect a bibliography style supported by it one of babplain babplai3 babalph
78. a description of the error followed by another line starting with the number which refers to the line number in your document file which LaTeX was processing when the error was spotted Here s an example showing that the user mistyped the tableofcontents command Undefined control sequence 1 6 Ntableofcotnetns When LaTeX finds an error like this it displays the error message and pauses You must type one of the following letters to continue Key Meaning X Stop immediately and exit the program q Carry on quietly as best you can and don t bother me with any more error messages e Stop the program but re position the text in my editor at the point where you found the er ror This only works if you re using an editor which LaTeX can communicate with h Try to give me more help 1 followed by a correction means input the correction in place of the error and carry on This is only a temporary fix to get the file pro cessed You still have to make that correction in the editor 39 Errors and Warnings Key Meaning r run in non stop mode Plow through any er rors unless too many pile up and it fails 100 errors Some systems Emacs is one example run LaTeX with a nonstop switch turned on so it will always process through to the end of the file regardless of errors or until a limit is reached 7 2 Warnings Warnings don t begin with an exclamation mark the
79. allowing you to experiment with LaTeX syntax without having to bother with installing and configuring a distribution and an editor When you later feel that you would benefit from having a standalone LaTeX installation you can return to this chapter and follow the instructions below 2 4 1 Installing a distribution If you want to use LaTeX locally on your computer you generally need to install a TeX distribution TeX distributions are packaged collections of packages and programs that enable you to typeset without having to manually fetch files and configure things The recommended distributions for each of the major operating systems are TeX Live is a major TeX distribution for Unix Linux Mac OS and Windows e MiKTeX is a Windows specific distribution MacTeX is a Mac OS specific distribution based on TeX Live Windows TeX live and MikTeX have easy installers that take care of setting up the environment and download ing packages e TeX Live can be downloaded here MiKTeX can be downloaded here 16 nhttp scribtex com 17 http www tug org texlive 18 http www miktex org 19 http www tug org mactex 20 http www tug org texlive acquire html 2 http miktex org Prerequisites Linux Ubuntu has a 2009 version of TeX Live in the repositories so you can use sudo apt get install texlive Here is a script to automate the installation of TeX Live 2010 on Ubuntu e Fedora has only 2007 ver
80. amp odd amp odd even amp even amp even odd amp odd amp odd 11 Formatting 1 REDIRECT LaTeX Paragraph Formatting Wbordermatrix amp 1 amp 2 amp Wrule amp 3 amp 4N LEM 1 1 amp M 1 2 amp wrule amp M 1 3 amp M L4 W2 amp M 2 1 amp M 22 amp wrule amp M 2 3 amp M 244 1 http en wikibooks org wiki LaTeX 2FParagraph 20Formatting 93 12 Page Layout Latex and the document class will normally take care of page layout issues for you For submission to an academic publication this entire topic will be out of your hands as the publishers want to control the presentation However for your own documents there are some obvious settings that you may wish to change margins page orientation and columns to name but three The purpose of this tutorial is to show you how to configure your pages 12 1 Page dimensions A page in Latex is defined by myriad internal parameters Each parameter corresponds to the length of an element of the page for example paperheight is the physical height of the page Here you can see a diagram showing all the variables defining the page All sizes are given in Postscript Points pt there are 72pt in an inch or 1pt 0 3527mm 95 Page Layout Figure 30 one inch Nhoffse one inch voffset Noddsidemargin 3lpt topmargin 20pt headheight 12pt headsep 25pt textheight 592pt textwidth 390pt t ct 9 o tU RUM
81. an absolute file path is generally used when one has to refer to a file which is quite some way away in the file system or perhaps even on a different server One word of warning do not leave empty spaces in the filenames they can cause ambiguous behaviour Either leave no spaces or use underscores _ instead You may however need to make your source portable to another computer or to a different location of your harddisk in which case relative paths should be used if you wish to avoid unnecessary re writing of path names Or a relative path may simply be a more efficient and elegant way of referring to a file A relative path is one which is defined in relation to the current directory in our case the one which contains the base file LaTeX uses the standard UNIX notation with a simple dot you refer to the current directory and by two dots you refer to the previous directory that is the one above the current directory in the file system tree The slash is used to separate the different components of a pathname directories and filenames So by you refer to the current directory by you refer to the previous directory by you refer to a directory which is two steps upwards in the filesystem tree Writing input filename tex will have exactly the same effect as writing input filename tex but if you found it more convenient to put all your files in a sub directory of your current directory called my iles
82. and o NAlpha and N and v Nu and Inu alpha B and B Beta and beta and amp Xi and xi T and y NGamma and ando Omicron and Ngamma Nomicron A and Delta and II z and Pi Vpi and Ndelta Nvarpi E ande Epsilon P p andp Rho rho and epsilon and varrho varepsilon Z and Zeta and zeta Y oO andg Sigma sigma and varsigma H and n Eta and eta T and T Tau and tau 0 0 and a Theta theta Yandv Upsilonand and vartheta upsilon I and Iota and iota d d and o Phi phi and varphi K and k Kappa and X and x Chi and chi kappa A and A Lambda and V and y Psi and psi lambda M and u Mu and mu Q and o Omega and omega 142 List of Mathematical Symbols ESCH q3eqy KA33UTN ydete xog dMN TI9N Idg joqwAs eiqeuy UIN Idg JoquI S SN Sn ia uyeul qaeury Idg joqwAs Idg joqwAs aequy Y HEEN e erj ed e Idg Toqui amp g s oqui s 19430 143 Mathematics yqoo 4109 JODIIBN JODMN 109 HURJA yur ue jore uep USA ue oso 989 ysoo ysoo sooore SOIR SOON soo 2 S 998 yuts quis uTsoze USA UISN uis jduog joquAs due Toqui amp g jduog Toqui amp g yd as ID WC suorjoun g ILIIWOUOBLIL 144 Summary 13 17 Summary As you begin to see typesett
83. arabic mysubsection bla bla stepcounter mysubsection arabic mysection arabic mysubsection bla bla addtocounter mysubsection 25 arabic mysection arabic mysubsection bla bla and more bla bla 32 2 Boxes LaTeX builds up its pages by pushing around boxes At first each letter is a little box which is then glued to other letters to form words These are again glued to other words but with special glue which is elastic so that a series of words can be squeezed or stretched as to exactly fill a line on the page Admittedly this is a very simplistic description of what really happens but the point is that TeX operates with glue and boxes Letters are not the only things that can be boxes One can put virtually everything into a box including other boxes Each box will then be handled by LaTeX as if it were a single letter The past chapters have already dealt with some boxes although they weren t described as such The tabular environment and the includegraphics for example both produce a box This means that one can easily arrange two tables or images side by side You just have to make sure that their combined width is not larger than the textwidth You can also pack a paragraph of your choice into a box with either the parbox pos width text command or the begin minipage pos width text end minipage environment The pos parameter can take one of the letters c t or b to control the vertical
84. as suitable as you would like it To improve the looks of the index makeindex comes with a set of style files usually located somewhere in the tex directory structure usually below the makeindex subdirectory To tell makeindex to use a specific style file run it with the command line option makeindex s 160 17 Glossary Many technical documents use terms or acronyms unknown to the general population It s common practice to add glossaries to make those works more understandable The glossaries package was created to assist users in creating glossaries It supports multiple glossaries acronyms and symbols It replaces the glossary package and can be used instead of the nomenc1 package 17 1 Using glossaries To enable the use of glossaries package you have to load the package usepackage glossaries if you will be using xindy highly recommended rather than makeindex you need to specify xindy option usepackage xindy glossaries For the glossary to show up in Table of Contents you need to additionally add toc option Nusepackage toc glossaries See also Custom_TOC Entry at the bottom of this page The glossary index won t be generated until you place the following command in document preamble makeglossaries Note that the links in generated glossary won t be clickable unless you load this package after the hyperref package Windows users will need to install Perl for makeglossaries t
85. be very useful while developing your document For more information see the Packages section 15 2 Examples Here are some practical examples but you will notice that they are all the same because they all use the same commands 15 2 1 Sections Nsection Greetings 1 Greetings label sec greetings Hello Hello section Referencing I greeted in section ref sec greetings 2 Referencing I greeted in section 1 Figure 41 1 Chapter 28 on page 247 152 Examples You could place the label anywhere in the section however in order to avoid confusion it is better to place it immediately after the beginning of the section Note how the marker starts with sec as suggested before The label is then referenced in a different section The tilde indicates a non breaking space 15 2 2 Pictures You can reference a picture by inserting it in the figure floating environment begin figure centering includegraphics width 0 5 textwidth gul caption Close up of a gull label gull end figure Figure ref gull shows a photograph of a gul Figure 1 Close up of a gull Figure 1 shows a photograph of a gull Figure 42 When a label is declared within a float environment the ref will return the respective fig table number but it must occur after the caption When declared outside it will give the section number To be completely safe the label for any picture or table can go within the
86. by step guide about how to start a document properly keeping a good high level structure This way it will be very easy to make modifications even when the document is almost finished These are all just suggestions but you might take inspiration from that to create your own document 37 1 Project structure Create a clear structure of the whole project this way 1 create a directory only for the project We ll refer to that in the following parts as the root directory 2 create two other directories inside the root one for LaTeX documents the other one for images Since you ll have to write their name quite often choose short names A suggestion would be simply tex and img 3 create your document we ll call it document tex but you can use the name you prefer and your own package for example mystyle sty this second file will help you to keep the code cleaner If you followed all those steps these files should be in your root directory using for each directory document tex mystyle sty tex img nothing else 37 2 Getting LaTeX to process multiple files As your work grows your LaTeX file can become unwieldy and confusing especially if you are writing a long article with substantial discrete sections or a full length book In such cases it is good practice to split your work into several files For example if you are writing a book it makes a lot of sense to write each chapter in a separate
87. can do this with a command such as hyperref sec intro Appendix ref sec intro Note that you can disable the creation of hyperlinks in hyperref and just use these commands for automatic text Keep in mind that the label must be placed inside an environment with a counter such as a table or a figure Otherwise not only the number will refer to the current section as mentioned above but the name will refer to the previous environment with a counter For example if you put a label after closing a figure the label will still say figure n on which n is the current section number 15 5 The hyperref package and nameref The hyperref package also automatically includes the nameref package and a similarly named command It is similar to autoref but inserts text corresponding to the section name for example Input section MyFirstSection label sec marker section MySecondSection In section nameref sec marker we defined Output In section MyFirstSection we defined 15 6 The hyperref package and phantomsection When you define a label outside a figure a table or other floating objects the label points to the current section In some case this behavior is not what you d like and you d prefer the generated link to point to the line where the label is defined This can be achieved with the command phantomsection as in this example The link location will be placed on the line below phant
88. can export citations in BibTeX format and can scrape BibTeX data from many popular websites Bibtex Bibtex is a DokuWiki plugin that allows for the inclusion of bibtex formatted citations in DokuWiki pages and displays them in APA format Note This Plugins is vulnerable to an XSS attack gt http www dokuwiki org plugin bibtex BibSonomy A free social bookmark and publication management system based on BibTeX Synapsen Hypertextual Card Index Reference Manager with special support for BiBTeX biblatex written in Java 3 15 Summary Although it can take a little time to get to grips with BibTeX in the long term it s an efficient way to handle your references It s not uncommon to find bib files on websites that people compile as a list of their own publications or a survey of relevant works within a given topic etc Or in those huge online bibliography databases you often find BibTeX versions of publications so it s a quick cut and paste into your own bib file and then no more hassle 32 33 ttp bibliographer homelinux net ttp www molspaces com cb2bib ttp www unix ag uni kl de fischer kbibtex ttp users tpg com au thachly kbib ttp www mediawiki org wiki Extension Bibwiki ttp bibdesk sourceforge net ttp www citeulike org stat genopole cnrs fr cambroise doku php id softwares okuwikibibtexplugin ttp www bibsonomy org ttp www verzetteln de synapsen IO DCD
89. caption command as in caption Close up of a gull label gull See the Floats Figures and Captions section for more about the figure and related environments Fixing wrong labels The command label must appear after or inside Ncapt ion Otherwise it will pick up the current section or list number instead of what you intended begin figure centering includegraphics width 0 5 textwidth gull caption Close up of a gull label fig gull end figure 2 http en wikipedia org wiki non breaking 20space 3 Chapter 24 on page 203 153 Labels and Cross referencing Issues with links to tables and figures handled by hyperref In case you use the package hyperref to create a PDF the links to tables or figures will point to the caption of the table or figure which is always below the table or figure itself Therefore the table or figure will not be visible if it is above the pointer and one has to scroll up in order to see it If you want the link point to the top of the image you can give the option hypcap to the caption package usepackage hypcap caption 15 2 3 Formulas Here is an example showing how to reference formulas 3 2 Eu G 1 begin equation label eq solve 2 sa 6 0 1 Kehl end equation i 3 q den 25 4x6 _ 2 2 begin equation x x l1 frac 5 sqrt 25 4 times 6 2 e J 05 4x6 end equation to US Ze sk 2 3 T2 5 2 begin equation and so we have solved equati
90. cells pages 397 405 booktitle Molecular biology of bacteriophage T4 editor Karam Jim D Karam and Drake John W and Kreuzer Kenneth N and Mosig Gisela and Hall Dwight and Eiserling Frederick A and Black Lindsay W and Kutter Elizabeth and Carlson Karin and Miller Eric S and Spicer Eleanor publisher ASM Press Washington DC year 1994 If you have to cite a website you can use misc for example misc website fermentas lambda author Fermentas Inc title Phage Lambda description amp restriction map month November year 2008 url http www fermentas com techinfo nucleicacids maplambda htm The note field comes in handy if you need to add unstructured information for example that the corresponding issue of the journal has yet to appear article blackholes author Rabbert Klein 61 Bibliography Management title Black Holes and Their Relation to Hiding Eggs journal Theoretical Easter Physics publisher Eggs Ltd year 2010 note to appear 9 3 6 Getting current LaTeX document to use your bib file At the end of your LaTeX file that is after the content but before vend document you need to place the following commands bibliographystyle plain bibliography samplel sample2 samplen Note the lack of whitespace between the commas and the next bib file Bibliography styles are files recognized by BibTeX that
91. com pl typo html 327 Internationalization usepackage slovak babel usepackage IL2 fontenc Nusepackage ut 8 inputenc 39 4 16 Spanish To enable Spanish writing besides installing the appropriate hyphenation patterns you type Nusepackage spanish babel The trick is that Spanish has several options and commands to control the layout The options may be loaded either at the call to Babel or before by defining the command Nspanishoptions Therefore the following commands are roughly equivalent NdefNspanishoptions mexico usepackage spanish babel usepackage spanish mexico babel On average the former syntax should be preferred as the latter is a deviation from standard Babel behavior and thus may break other programs LyX latex2rtf2e interacting with LaTeX Two particularly useful options are es noquoting es nolists some packages and classes are known to collide with Spanish in the way they handle active characters and these options disable the internal workings of Spanish to allow you to overcome these common pitfalls Moreover these options may simplify the way LyX customizes some features of the Spanish layout from inside the GUI The options mexico mexico com provide support for local custom in Mexico the former using decimal dot as customary and the latter allowing decimal comma as required by the Mexican Official Norm NOM of the Department of Economy for labels in foods and good
92. cost free academic software for managing PDFs which can manage a bibliography in Open Office and read BibTeX Zotero Zotero is a free and open reference manager working as a Firefox plugin capable of importing and exporting bib files e JabRef is a Java program under the GPL license which lets you search many bibliographic databases such as Medline Citeseer IEEEXplore and arXiv and feed and manage your BibTeX local databases with your selected articles Based on BiBTeX JabRef can export in many other output formats such as html MS Word or EndNote It can be used online without being installed http jabref sourceforge net ws jabref jnlp e Referencer Referencer is a Gnome application to organise documents or references and ulti mately generate a BibTeX bibliography file Citavi Commercial software with size limited free demo version which even searches libraries for citations and keeps all your knowledge in a database Export of the database to all kinds of 26 http literatur generator de 27 http mendeley com 28 http www zotero org 29 http jabref sourceforge net 30 http icculus org referencer index html 3 http www citavi ch 70 BibTeX 9 formats is possible Works together with MS Word and Open Office Writer Moreover plug ins for browsers and Acrobat Reader exist to automatically include references to your project bibliographer broken link Bibliographer is a BibTeX bibliography
93. database editor which aims to be easy to use Its features include linking files to your records with indexing and searching support The interface is designed for the easy navigation of your bibliography and double clicking a record will open the linked file cb2Bib The cb2Bib is a tool for rapidly extracting unformatted or unstandardized bibliographic references from email alerts journal Web pages and PDF files KBibTeX KBibTeX is a BibTeX editor for KDE to edit bibliographies used with LaTeX Features include comfortable input masks starting web queries e g Google or PubMed and exporting to PDF PostScript RTF and XML HTML As KBibTeX is using KDE s KParts technology KBibTeX can be embedded into Kile or Konqueror KBib Another BibTeX editor for KDE It has similar capabilities and slightly different UI Features include BibTeX reference generation from PDF files plain text DOI arXiv amp PubMed IDs Web queries to Google Scholar PubMer arXiv and a number of other services are also supported Bibwiki Bibwiki is a Specialpage for MediaWiki to manage BibTeX bibliographies It offers a straightforward way to import and export bibliographic records BibDesk BibDesk is a bibliographic reference manager for Mac OS X It features a very usable user interface and provides a number of features like smart folders based on keywords and live tex display CiteULike CiteULike is a free online service to organise academic papers It
94. end block is a bit more tricky as special processing occurs at the end of an environment With the ignorespacesafterend LaTeX will issue an ignorespaces after the special end processing has occurred See the space newenvironment simple to the left noindent par noindent Same here begin simple See the space to the left end simple Same here No space newenvironment correct to the left noindent ignorespaces par noindent Same ignorespacesafterend here begin correct No space to the left end correct Same here 275 Customizing LaTeX Also if you re still having problems with extra space being appended at the end of your environment when using the input for external source make sure there is no space between the beginning sourcing and end of the environment such as begin correct input somefile tex end correct 34 3 Command line LaTeX If you work on a Unix like OS you might be using Makefiles or any kind of script to build your LaTeX projects In that connection it might be interesting to produce different versions of the same document by calling LaTeX with command line parameters If you add the following structure to your document usepackage ifthen ifthenelse equal blackandwhite true black and white mode do something color mode do something different ieu Now you can call LaTeX like this latex newcomman
95. etc since their notation is in the format V 0 and the quotation mark will close the one opening the field causing an error in the parsing of the reference Using Nusepackage ut 8 inputenc in the preamble to the tex source file can get round this as the accented characters can just be stored in the bib file without any need for special markup This allows a consistent format to be kept throughout the bib file avoiding the need to use braces when there are umlauts to consider Remember that each attribute must be followed by a comma to delimit one from another You do not need to add a comma to the last attribute since the closing brace will tell BibTeX that there are no more attributes for this entry although you won t get an error if you do It can take a while to learn what the reference types are and what fields each type has available and which ones are required or optional etc So look at this entry type reference and also this field reference for descriptions of all the fields It may be worth bookmarking or printing these pages so that they are easily at hand when you need them 8 http en wikipedia org wiki BibTeX 9 http en wikipedia org wiki BibTeX 23Bibliographic 20information 20file 10 http en wikibooks org wiki 2FAccents ll http newton ex ac uk tex pack bibtex btxdoc node html 12 http newton ex ac uk tex pack bibtex btxdoc node7 html 56 BibTeX 9 3 1 Authors BibTeX can be
96. include the epstopdf package that automates the process If we include a graphics now and leave out the file extension epstopaf will automatically transform the eps file to PDF and insert it in the text includegraphics graphl 296 Graphics and Graph editors This way if we choose to output to PS or DVI the EPS version is used and if we output to PDF directly the converted PDF graphics is used Please note that usage of epst opdf requires compiling with latex shell escape Note Emacs AucTex users might want to check out Gnuplot mode 36 5 3 Generate png screenshots This section describes how to generate a png screenshot of a LaTeX page using the nix tool dvipng and the LaTeX package preview This screenshots are useful for example if you want to include a LaTeX generated formula on a presentation using you favorite slideware like Powerpoint Keynote or OpenOffice Impress First start by making sure you have the two required tools dvipng and preview To check for the LaTeX package type locate preview sty on a console and if locate returns a directory then you are good Next type which dvipng to see if you have dvipng installed on your machine and ready to use Again if you get a directory you are ready to start doing screenshot of LaTeX pages Say you want to take a screenshot of E 2EEL Write this formula on a TeX file name foo tex in this way documentclass article Nusepackage active
97. index 117 http en wikibooks org w index 118 http en wikibooks org w index 119 http en wikibooks org w index 120 http en wikibooks org w index 121 http en wikibooks org w index 9 9 9 0 9 d U Ug OSS tO 9 Os FC uy YO 9 0 td OO Ug O g hp hp hp hp hp hp hp hp hp hp hp hp hp hp hp hp hp hp t hp t hp t hp t hp t hp t hp t hp t tit tit tit tit tit cytl tit tit tit ct i et t p EF ett ZE ER cheek eto eke cb tit1 tit tit tit le User Drewbi le User Dubbaluga le User E lewisl le User Echeban le User Ediahist le User Edudobay le User Ellipticl le User Elwikipedista le User Emreg00 le User Erp le User Erylaos le User Eudoxos le User Everlong le User Evin le User Eyliu le User Ffangs le User Filip_Dominec le User Fishpi le User Flal le User FlashSheridan le User Fmccown Le User Fongs le User Franzl_aus_tirol Le User Frap Le User Fredmaranhao 371 Contributors Fsart 22 Ftravers Gallen01 7 Garoth 25 123 GavinMcGimpsey Gelbukh Geminatea 8 Germanzs Gkc 99 Glad Glosser ca Gms 33 Go pbam 134 Goodgerster gt Graemeg Greenbreen 132 LA NR RR Fa EA Feat Fe Fei Feat ka CN LA Fa e yr a Grenouille Grj23 9 Gronau Guyrobbie Gwpl 142 Gyro Copter G tz HJMills Hagindaz 138 140 122 123 124 1
98. is possible to use nearly all characters without special commands like 6 A f and usepackage latinl inputenc Nusepackage ut f8 inputenc 329 40 Appendices 331 41 Installation Installing LaTeX is not a simple one click download and install Multiple programs often need to be downloaded and installed in order to have a suitable computer system that can be used to create publishable output such as PDFs The basic requirement is to have TeX and LaTeX Optional and recommended installations include an attractive editor to write LaTeX source documents this is probably where you will spend most of your time and a bibliographic management program to manage references 41 1 TeX and LaTeX TeX and LaTeX are available for most computer platforms since they were programed to be very portable They are most commonly installed using a distribution such as teTeX MiKTeX or MacTeX This however does not include any editor or advanced graphical user interface Other programs that are not part of the distribution are used to write and prepare TeX and LaTeX files 41 1 1 UNIX Linux UNIX and Linux users have a wide choice of distributions the most common are teTeX and TeX Live As of May 2006 teTeX is no longer actively maintained and its former maintainer Thomas Esser recommended TeX Live as the replacement Ubuntu and Debian users can install one not both of these systems using
99. language s you are using 2 You need to use language specific typographic rules In French for example there is a mandatory space before each colon character 3 You want to be able to insert all the language specific special characters directly from your keyboard instead of using cumbersome coding for example type instead of a If you simply need to add a few words from another language you may find LaTeX Accents an easier way 39 1 Hyphenating The babel package by Johannes Braams will take care of everything You can load it in your preamble providing as an argument the language you want to use Nusepackage language babel You should place it soon after the documentclass command so that all the other packages you load afterwards will know the language you are using A list of the languages built into your LaTeX system will be displayed every time the compiler is started Babel will automatically activate the appropriate hyphenation rules for the language you choose If your LaTeX format does not support hyphenation in the language of your choice babel will still work but will disable hyphenation which has quite a negative effect on the appearance of the typeset document Babel also specifies new commands for some languages which simplify the input of special characters See the sections about languages below for more information If you call babel with multiple languages Nusepackage languageA languageB bab
100. law fulfilling obligations under article 11 of the WIPO copyright treaty adopted on 20 December 1996 or similar laws prohibiting or restricting circumvention of such measures When you convey a covered work you waive any legal power to forbid cir cumvention of technological measures to the extent such circumvention is effected by exercising rights under this License with respect to the covered work and you disclaim any intention to limit operation or modification of the work as a means of enforcing against the work s users your or third parties legal rights to forbid circumvention of technological measures 4 Conveying Verbatim Copies You may convey verbatim copies of the Program s source code as you re ceive it in any medium provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice keep intact all notices stating that this License and any non permissive terms added in accord with section 7 apply to the code keep intact all notices of the absence of any war ranty and give all recipients a copy of this License along with the Program You may charge any price or no price for each copy that you convey and you may offer support or warranty protection for a fee 5 Conveying Modified Source Versions You may convey a work based on the Program or the modifications to pro duce it from the Program in the form of source code under the terms of section 4 provided that you also meet all of
101. left border of your editor window Furthermore we split long sentences into several lines so that each line has at most 80 characters because it is rather inconvenient to search for small differences in long lines Note For instance the LaTeX editor Kile http kile sourceforge net can assist the user in this task when it is configured to add a vertical line that marks the 80th column We find it very useful to introduce the additional line breaks at logical breaks of the sentence e g before a relative clause or a new part of the sentence starts An example LaTeX code that is formatted according to these guidelines is the source code of the article Tools for Collaborative Writing of Scientific LaTeX Documents by Arne Henningsen that is published including the source code in The PracTeX Journal 2007 Number 3 http www tug org pracjourn 2007 3 henningsen If the authors work on different operating systems their LaTeX editors will probably save the files with different newline end of line characters http en wikipedia org wiki Newline To avoid this type of ineffective modifications all users can agree on a specific newline character and configure their editor to use this newline character Another alternative is to add the subversion property svn eol style and set it to native In this case Subversion automatically converts all newline characters 29 http en wikibooks org wiki User 3AArnehe 284 Subversion rea
102. like a big box by the TeX engine Text size If you want to change the size of some text just place it within brackets flike this and you can use the following commands in order of size Huge huge LARGE NLarge large small footnotesize tiny So for example large this text is slightly bigger than normal this one is not normalsize is used to create text at the default size for the document New lines you can force the start of a new line by If you want to add more vertical space you don t need to use several new line commands just insert some vertical space For example this way 1cm you start a new line after having left 1 cm of empty space Date you can insert the date of the current day with the command today If you do not wish to insert any date keep it blank e g date Filling the page the command vfill keeps on adding empty spaces until the page is full If you put it in the page you are sure that all the following text will be placed at the bottom of the page 8 2 2 A practical example All these tips might have made you confused Then here is a practical example Get the test title tex described above and here is an example ofa title tex On the right you can see the output after you compile test title texin PDF 3 Chapter 24 on page 203 47 Title Creation begin titlepage begin center Upper part of the page includegraphics width 0 15 tex
103. line at the point of the command NN Breaks the line at the point of the command itis a shorter version of the previous com mand but it does exactly the same thing NN Breaks the line at the point of the command and additionally prohibits a page break after the forced line break 3 Chapter 24 2 7 on page 211 107 Page Layout Xlinebreak number Breaks the line at the point of the command The number you provide as an argument rep resents the priority of the command in a range from 0 it will be easily ignored to 4 do it anyway LaTeX will try to produce the best line breaks possible If it cannot it will de cide whether including the linebreak or not according to the priority you have provided newpage Ends the current page and starts a new one pagebreak number Breaks the current page at the point of the command The optional number argument sets the priority in a scale from 0 to 4 Xnopagebreak number Stops the page being broken at the point of the command The optional number argument sets the priority in a scale from 0 to 4 Nclearpage Ends the current page and causes any floats encountered in the input but yet to appear to be printed 12 6 Widows and orphans w Widows and orphans In professional books it s not desirable to have single lines at the beginning or end of a page In typesetting such situations are called widows and orphans Normally it is possible
104. marked up using commands similar to those for typesetting bold text or creating mathematical formulas as the following example of embedded graphics shows begin displaymath xymatrix bullet ar r ar gt r amp end displaymath o Figure 54 There are several packages supporting the creation of graphics directly in LaTeX including picture xy Pic and PGF TikZ described in the following sections 23 1 Overview The picture environment allows programming pictures directly in LaTeX On the one hand there are rather severe constraints as the slopes of line segments as well as the radii of circles are restricted to a narrow choice of values On the other hand the picture environment of LaTeX2e brings with it the qbezier command q meaning quadratic Many frequently used curves such as circles ellipses and catenaries can be satisfactorily approximated by quadratic B zier curves although this may require some mathematical toil If a programming language like Java is used to generate qbezier blocks of LaTeX input files the picture environment becomes quite powerful Although programming pictures directly in LaTeX is severely restricted and often rather tiresome there are still reasons for doing so The documents thus produced are small with respect to bytes and there are no additional graphics files to be dragged along Packages like epic eepic or pstricks enhance the original picture envi
105. metadata Generate keys for imported entries Key generator settings Advanced Warn before overwriting existing keys C Generate keys before saving for entries without a key Import preferences Replace regular expression Export preferences Figure 72 Figure 3 Specify default key pattern in JabRef JabRef is highly flexible and can be configured in many details We make the following changes to the default configuration of JabRef to simplify our work First we specify the default pattern for BibTeX keys so that JabRef can automatically generate keys in our desired format This can be done by selecting Options Preferences gt Key pattern and modifying the desired pattern in the field Default pattern For instance we use auth lower shortyear to get the last name of the first author in lower case and the last two digits of the year of the publication see figure 3 R Set general fields 2 General fields General crossref keywords doi url citeseerurl pdf comment owner location timestamp Abstract abstract Review review Delimit fields with semicolon ex url od note Figure 73 Figure 4 Set up general fields in JabRef Second we add the BibTeX field 1ocat ion for information about the location where the publica tion is available as hard copy e g a book or a copy of an article This field can contain the name of the user who has the hard copy and where he has it or the name
106. not used to limit the legal rights of the compilation s users beyond what the individual works permit When the Document is included in an aggregate this License does not apply to the other works in the aggregate which are not themselves derivative works of the Document If the Cover Text requirement of section 3 is applicable to these copies of the Document then if the Document is less than one half of the entire ag gregate the Document s Cover Texts may be placed on covers that bracket the Document within the aggregate or the electronic equivalent of covers if the Document is in electronic form Otherwise they must appear on printed covers that bracket the whole aggregate 8 TRANSLATION Translation is considered a kind of modification so you may distribute trans lations of the Document under the terms of section 4 Replacing Invariant Sections with translations requires special permission from their copyright holders but you may include translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the original versions of these Invariant Sections You may include a translation of this License and all the license notices in the Document and any Warranty Disclaimers provided that you also include the original En glish version of this License and the original versions of those notices and disclaimers In case of a disagreement between the translation and the origi nal version of this License or a notice or disclaimer the original version
107. of the changes should be kept Authors can also comment their modifications so that the co authors can easily understand the workflow of this file As version control systems generally communicate over the internet e g through TCP IP connections they can be used from different computers with internet connections A restrictive firewall policy might prevent the version control system from connecting to the internet In this case the network administrator has to be asked to open the appropriate port The internet is only used for synchronising the files Hence a permanent internet connection is not required The only drawback of a version control system could be that it has to be installed and configured Moreover a version control system is useful even if a single user is working on a project First the user can track and possibly revoke all previous modifications Second this is a convenient way to have a backup of the files on other computers e g on the version control server Third this allows the user to easily switch between different computers e g office laptop home 35 4 The Version Control System Subversion Subversion SVN comes as a successor to the popular version control system CVS SVN operates on a client server model in which a central server hosts a project repository that users copy and modify locally A repository functions similarly to a library in that it permits users to check out the current project make chang
108. of the diff algorithm to generate information required for a successful merge ttp tug org pracjourn 2007 3 henningsen ttp en wikibooks org wiki User 3AArnehe ttp www limsup com ttp www scribtex com ttps www sharelatex com ttp writelatex com ttp en wikipedia org wiki Etherpad ttp www publications li ttp www verbosus com VD GJ Ch un vd d vd dd vd vd vd 2779 Collaborative Writing of LaTeX Documents e The Monkey TeX is free and allows team sharing e Another option for collaboration is dropbox It has 2Gb free storage and versioning system Works like SVN but more automated and therefore especially useful for beginning latex users As the LaTeX system uses plain text you can use synchronous collaborative editors like Gobby In Gobby you can write your documents in collaboration with anyone in real time It is strongly recommended that you use utf8 encoding especially if there are users on multiple operating systems collaborating and a stable network typically wired networks e Google Documents or LaTeX Lab also allows real time simultaneous collaborative editing of text files for anyone with a Google account and its option to make the document available through a URL makes local download and compilation easily scriptable e TitanPad gt or other clones of EtherPad To compile use the command line wget O filename tex http titanpad com ep pad export xxxx latest format txt a
109. of your document We have chosen dd just because it reminds the d it replaces and it is fast to type Doing so the code for your integral becomes int x dd x Now whenever you write an integral you just have to use the dd instead of the d and all your integrals will have the same style If you change your mind you just have to change the definition in the preamble and all your integrals will be changed accordingly 134 Advanced Mathematics AMS Math package 13 15 Advanced Mathematics AMS Math package The AMS American Mathematical Society mathematics package is a powerful package that creates a higher layer of abstraction over mathematical LaTeX language if you use it it will make your life easier Some commands amsmath introduces will make other plain LaTeX commands obsolete in order to keep consistency in the final output you d better use amsmath commands whenever possible If you do so you will get an elegant output without worrying about alignment and other details keeping your source code readable If you want to use it you have to add this in the preamble usepackage amsmath 13 15 1 Introducing text and dots in formulas amsmath defines also the dots command that is a generalization of the existing ldots You can use dots in both text and math mode and LaTeX will replace it with three dots but it will decide according to the context whether to put it on the bottom like ldots or centered like cdot
110. on general purpose computers but in those that do we wish to avoid the spe cial danger that patents applied to a free program could make it effectively proprietary To prevent this the GPL assures that patents cannot be used to render the program non free The precise terms and conditions for copying distribution and modification follow TERMS AND CONDITIONS 0 Definitions This License refers to version 3 of the GNU General Public License Copyright also means copyright like laws that apply to other kinds of works such as semiconductor masks The Program refers to any copyrightable work licensed under this License Each licensee is addressed as you Licensees and recipients may be individuals or organizations To modify a work means to copy from or adapt all or part of the work in a fashion requiring copyright permission other than the making of an exact copy The resulting work is called a modified version of the earlier work or a work based on the earlier work A covered work means either the unmodified Program or a work based on the Program To propagate a work means to do anything with it that without permis sion would make you directly or secondarily liable for infringement under applicable copyright law except executing it on a computer or modifying a private copy Propagation includes copying distribution with or without modification making available to the public and in some
111. on the right half of the screen Emacs Emacs is a general purpose text processing system When used in combination with Auctex and Reftex extensions that may be installed into the Emacs program Emacs provides a complete LaTeX editing environment complete with table of contents view document preview and many other features Emacs is a very mature editing system with a unique set of keyboard commands Vim Vim is another general purpose text editor for a wide variety of platforms including UNIX Mac OS X and Windows A variety of extensions exist including LaTeX Box and Vim LaTeX LaTeXila LaTeXila is another text editor for Linux Gnome 35 http bakoma tex com menu about php 36 http en wikipedia org wiki TeXShop 37 http www michaels website de gedit latex plugin 38 http gummi midnightcoding org 39 http www gnu org software emacs 40 http en wikipedia org wiki Vim 4 http www vim org scripts script php script id 3109 42 http latexila sourceforge net 11 Introduction 2 4 3 Viewers Finally you will need a viewer for the files LaTeX outputs Normally LaTeX saves the final document as a dvi Device independent file format but you will rarely want it to DVI files do not contain embedded fonts and many document viewers are unable to open them Usually you will use a LaTeX compiler like pdf latex to produce a PDF file directly or a tool like dvi2pdf to convert the DVI file to PD
112. only when it is necessary to print the document Most of the programs should be already within your LaTeX distribution the others come with w Ghostscript which is a free and multi platform software as well Chapter Export To Other Formats discusses more about exporting LaTeX source to other file formats 43 http en wikipedia org wiki Ghostscript 44 Chapter 38 on page 309 13 Introduction 2 5 What next Now you should check that your editor and LaTeX distribution are functioning properly by trying to compile the first example source in the beginning of the next chapter Throughout this book you should also utilise other means for learning about LaTeX Good sources are e the 1atex IRC channel on Freenode the TeX Stack Exchange Q amp A e the TeX FAQ and the TeXample ne t Community 45 Chapter 4 on page 17 46 http webchat freenode net channels latex 47 http tex stackexchange com 48 http www tex ac uk cgi bin texfaq2html 49 http www texample net 14 3 Chapters 4 Absolute Beginners 1 REDIRECT LaTeX Basics 1 Chapter 5 on page 19 5 Basics This tutorial is aimed at getting familiar with the bare bones of LaTeX Before starting ensure you have LaTeX installed on your computer see Installation for instructions of what you will need We begin by creating the source LaTeX file and then take you through how to feed this file through the LaTeX system to
113. or on their own page If you try to specify their position using modifiers like b or h they will be ignored Add Nusepackage dblfloatfix to the preamble in order to alleviate this problem with regard to placing these floats at the bottom of a page using the optional specifier b Default is tbp However h still does not work To prevent the figures from being placed out of order with respect to their non starred counterparts the package fix1tx2e should be used e g usepackage fixltx2e 24 2 8 Custom Floats If tables and figures are not adequate for your needs then you always have the option to create your own Examples of such instances could be source code examples or maps For a program float example one might therefore wish to create a float named program The package float is your friend for this task All commands to set up the new float must be placed in the preamble and not within the document 1 Add usepackage float to the preamble of your document 2 Declare your new float using newfloat type placement ext outer counter where e type the new name you wish to call your float in this instance program placement t b p or h as previously described in Placement where letters enumerate permitted placements ext the file name extension of an auxiliary file for the list of figures or whatever Latex writes the captions to this file outer counter the presence of this parameter indicates that
114. org wiki LaTeX 48 http www pstoedit net 196 References epstopdf input eps inkscape input pdf When all of the above fails one can simplify the EPS file before attempting other conversions by using the eps2eps tool also see next section eps2eps input eps input e2 eps This will convert all the fonts to pre drawn images which is sometimes desirable when submitting manuscripts for publication However on the downside the fonts are NOT converted to lines but instead to bitmaps which reduces the quality of the fonts 22 2 6 Converting a color EPS to grayscale Sometimes color EPS figures need to be converted to black and white or grayscale to meet publi cation requirements This can be achieved with the eps2eps of the Ghostscript package and http www pa op dlr de PatrickJoeckel pscol index html programs eps2eps input eps input e2 eps pscol 0gray input e2 eps input gray eps 22 3 References 49 http linuxcommand org man pages eps2epsl html 50 nhttp linuxcommand org man pages eps2epsl html 5 http ghostscript com 52 http www pa op dlr de PatrickJoeckel pscol index html 197 23 Creating Graphics In the Importing Graphics chapter you learned that you can import or link graphics into LaTeX such as graphics that you have created in another program or obtained elsewhere In this chapter you will learn how to create or embed graphics directly in a LaTeX document The graphics is
115. phantomsection command to enable hyperlinking from the table of contents to bibliography Ncleardoublepage phantomsection Naddcontentsline toc chapter Bibliography This trick is particularly useful when you have to insert the bibliography in the Table of Contents but it can work for anything When LaTeX finds the code above it will record the info as described and the current page number inserting a new line in the Contents page As numbered item If you instead want bibliography to be numbered section or chapter you ll likely use this way 2 cleardoublepage This is needed if the book class is used to place the anchor in the correct page because the bibliography will start on its own page Use clearpage instead if the document class uses the oneside argument Nrenewcommand Nrefname This will define heading of bibliography to be empty so you can section Bibliography place a normal section heading before the bibliography entries 9 begin thebibliography 99 eege Another even easier solution is to use section inside of the Nrenewcommand block 9 renewcommand refname section Sources Using Sources as the title of the section begin thebibliography 99 43 Chapter 26 on page 229 73 Bibliography Management end thebibliography You may wish to use Nrenewcommand Nrefname vspacex lem followed by vspacex lem to counteract the extra space
116. possible to add extra lines to the ToC to force extra or unnumbered section headings to be included The commands listoffigures and listoftables work in exactly the same way as tableofcontents to automatically list all your tables and figures If you use them they nor mally go after the tableofcontents command The tableofcontents command nor mally shows only numbered section headings and only down to the level defined by the tocdepth counter but you can add extra entries with the Naddcontentsline command For example if you use an unnumbered section heading command to start a preliminary piece of text like a Foreword or Preface you can write Nsubsection Preface addcontentsline toc subsection Preface 3 Chapter 12 on page 95 36 The document environment This will format an unnumbered ToC entry for Preface in the subsection style You can use the same mechanism to add lines to the List of Figures or List of Tables by substituting lof or lot for toc If the hyperref package is used and the link does not point correct to the chapter the command Xphantomsect ion in combination with clearpage or cleardoublepage can be used see also Labels_and_Cross referencing Ncleardoublepage phantomsection addcontentsline ftoc chapter List of Figures listoffigures To change the title of the TOC you have to paste this command Nrenewcommand Ncontentsname New table of contents title in your docume
117. print the table of contents and highlight the current section subsection by typing begin frame frametitle Table of Contents tableofcontents currentsection end frame You can automatically print the table of contents at the beginning of each section by adding in the preamble the following line NAtBeginSection begin frame frametitle Table of Contents tableofcontents currentsection end frame You can do the same for subsections AtBeginSubsection begin frame frametitle Table of Contents tableofcontents currentsection currentsubsection end frame References Beamer begin frame allowframebreaks frametitle lt presentation gt Weiterf hrende Literatur begin thebibliography 10 beamertemplatebookbibitems bibitem Autor1990 A Autor newblock Nem Einf hrung in das Pr Smsentationswesen newblock Klein Verlag 1990 219 Presentations beamertemplatearticlebibitems bibitem Jemand2000 S Jemand newblock On this and that newblock em Journal of This and That 2 1 50 100 2000 end thebibliography end frame 25 1 3 Style Themes The first solution is to use a built in theme such as Warsaw Berlin etc The second solution is to specify colors inner themes and outer themes The Built in solution To the preamble you can add the following line usetheme Warsaw to use the Warsaw theme Beamer has several themes many of which are na
118. rne ee a eo Va a cde PM ele AEN Floats Figures and Captions DA le PIO AIS et o er a ER eu 24 2 CApUOns at ee E A E A a peer PER Sa A A eS 24 3 Labels in the figures e 24 4 References oon A UC a ad ON DRE A ds Presentations 25 1 The Beamer package ees 25 2 The powerdot package 2 2 rd ae er 25 3 References a E a re u wer O Hyperlinks 26 1 Hyp ttef ler an deua ee ee o eat da a ala amp 26 2 Usage a a es gode Gow ha A ha as iue ai 26 3 Customization ide ak pe Sh Ae he ohh eR Robson tte hes 26 4 Problems with Links and Equations e 26 5 Problems with Links and Dages 26 6 Problems with Bookmarks 2 2 22 Cm nommen 26 7 Problems with tables and figures 26 8 Problems with long caption and listoffigures or long title 2 2 2220 26 9 Problems with already existing toc lof and similar files 26 10Problems with footnotes and special characters oo 26 11Problems with Beamer 26 12 Referencess aa er Ar must Colors 27 1 Adding the color package oaa 27 2 Entering colored rest 27 3 Entering colored background for the text o o 2 T 4 Predefined colotS 2 4 545223 ei 2 2 ar da a MURS m a 27 5 The 68 standard colors known to dvips 2 7 6 Defining new colors i icira s sooo ooo oso pode a RR eo 3o 27 7 Advanced color settings 2 PE Edu I ne a in Re ee re er ied ee a Packages 28 1 Using an existing package e 28 2
119. signature address and telephone The output letter will look like this April 24 2007 Yours Faithfully www gmu org copyleft fdl html d C Figure 47 A sample letter 177 Letters Here is the example s code documentclass letter Nusepackage hyperref signature Joe Bloggs address 21 Bridge Street NN Smallville NN Dunwich DU3 4WE begin document begin letter Director Doe amp Co 35 Anthony Road Newport Ipswich IP3 5RT opening Dear Sir or Madam I am writing to you on behalf of the Wikipedia project http www wikipedia org an endeavour to build a fully fledged multilingual encyclopaedia in an entirely open manner to ask for permission to use your copyrighted material The ldots command produces dots in a way that will not upset the typesetting of the document ldots That said allow me to reiterate that your material will be used to the noble end of providing a free collection of knowledge for everyone naturally enough only if you agree If that is the case could you kindly fill in the attached form and post ZE back to me We shall greatly appreciate it Thank you for your time and consideration I look forward to your reply closing Yours Faithfully ps P S You can find the full text of GFDL license at url http www gnu org copyleft fdl html encl Copyright permission form end letter end document To move the closin
120. tell it how to format the information stored in the bib file when processed for output And so the first command listed above is declaring which style file to use The style file in this instance is plain bst which comes as standard with BibTeX You do not need to add the bst extension when using this command as it is assumed Despite its name the plain style does a pretty good job look at the output of this tutorial to see what I mean The second command is the one that actually specifies the bib file you wish to use The ones I created for this tutorial were called samplel bib sample2 bib samplen bib but once again you don t include the file extension At the moment the bib file is in the same directory as the LaTeX document too However if your bib file was elsewhere which makes sense if you intend to maintain a centralized database of references for all your research you need to specify the path as well e g bibliography some where sample Now that LaTeX and BibTeX know where to look for the appropriate files actually citing the references is fairly trivial The NCite ref key is the command you need making sure that the ref key corresponds exactly to one of the entries in the bib file If you wish to cite more that one reference at the same time do the following NCite ref keyl ref key2 ref keyN 9 3 7 Why won t LaTeX generate any output The addition of BibTeX adds extra complexity for the processing of
121. the alignment within each column or want to insert lines between columns or rows This can be achieved using the array environment which is essentially a math mode version of the tabular environment which requires that the columns be pre specified NE begin array cc 1 amp 2 hline 384 end array 1 2 3 4 You may see that the AMS matrix class of environments doesn t leave enough space when used together with fractions resulting in output similar to this 37 requires the mathtools package 38 http en wikipedia org wiki ellipsis 39 Chapter 10 13 on page 91 126 Matrices and arrays M O ua Na Oar DNA O To counteract this problem add additional leading space with the optional parameter to the command NE M begin bmatrix frac 5 6 amp frac 1 6 amp O 0 3em frac 5 6 0 amp frac 1 6 0 3em 0 amp frac 5 6 amp frac 1 6 end bmatrix 5 1 6 6 H ES 1 M 6 0 6 5 1 0 33 If you need border or indexes on your matrix plain TeX provides the macro bordermatrix NE M bordermatrix amp x y cr A amp 1 amp 0 cr B amp 0 amp 1 Ncr BNO 1 Figure 34 13 10 1 Matrices in running text To insert a small matrix and not increase leading in the line containing it use smallmatrix environment A matrix in text must be set smaller bigl begin smallmatrix a amp bNN c amp d end smallmatrix bigr to not increase leading
122. the article class two sided use documentclass twoside article 12 3 3 Another approach with fancyhdr If you want to get different style for even and odd pages there is another possible way still using fancyhdr Start again with fancyhf it will just delete the current heading footer configuration so you can make your own Now you can create what you want using the command fancyhead for header and fancyfoot for footer They work in the same way so we ll explain only the first one The syntax is fancyhead selectors output you want The selectors are the following E even page O odd page L left side C centered R right side so CE will refer to the center of the even pages and RO to the right side of the odd pages Whether it is header or footer depends if you are using fancyhead or fancyfoot You can use multiple selectors separated by a comma Here is an example fancyhead CE Author s Name fancyhead CO today fancyfoot LE RO thepage it will print author s name on the center of the header of the even pages the date of the current day on the center of the odd pages and the current page number on the left side of even pages and on the right size of the odd pages Finally in order to have the pages at the beginning of any chapter really plain you could redefine the plain style for example to have a really plain page when you want The command to use is fancypagestyle plain and the argument c
123. the blank refname inserts Note Use Moibname instead of Nrefname if you use the book or report class 9 5 Multiple Bibliographies 9 5 1 Using multibib This package is for multiple Bibliographies for different sections in your work For example you can generate a bibliography for each chapter You can find information about the package on CTAN 9 5 2 Using bibtopic The bibtopic Package is created to differ the citations on more files so that you can divide the bibliography into more parts documentclass article usepackage bibtopic begin document bibliographystyle alpha section Testing Let s cite all the books cite ColBenh 93 and cite Munt 93 and an article cite RouxSmart 95 File books bib is use for this listing begin btSect books section References from books btPrintCited end btSect Here the articles bib is used and the listing is in plain format instead pf the standard alpha begin btSect plain articles section References from articles btPrintCited section Articles not cited btPrintNotCited 44 http ctan org pkg multibib 45 http ctan org pkg bibtopic 74 References end btSect Just print alll entries here with btPrintAll begin btSect plain internet section References from the internet btPrintAll end btSect end document 9 6 References fr LaTeX Gestion de la bibliographie 46 http fr wikibooks or
124. the counter associated with this new float should depend on outer counter for example chapter 3 The default name that appears at the start of the caption is the type If you wish to alter this use floatname type floatname 4 Changing float style can be issued with floatstyle style Works on all subsequent newfloat commands therefore must be inserted before newfloat to be effective e plain the normal style for Latex floats but the caption is always below the content plaintop the normal style for Latex floats but the caption is always above the content boxed a box is drawn that surrounds the float and the caption is printed below e ruled the caption appears above the float with rules immediately above and below Then the float contents followed by a final horizontal rule Float styles can also be customized as the second example below illustrates An example document using a new program float type documentclass article usepackage float 13 http www tex ac uk cgi bin texfaq2html label 2colfltorder 14 Chapter 24 2 4 on page 208 212 Captions floatstyle ruled newfloat program thp lop floatname program Program begin document begin program begin verbatim class HelloWorldApp public static void main String args Display the string System out println Hello World end verbatim caption The Hello World program in Java end program end
125. the float However it is up to you to therefore insert the caption command after the actual contents of the float but still within the environment If you place it before then the caption will appear above the float Try out the following example to demonstrate this effect 5 http ctan org tex archive macros latex contrib placeins 6 http www ctan org pkg endfloat 205 Floats Figures and Captions documentclass a4paper 12pt article usepackage english babel usepackage graphicx begin document begin figure h caption A picture of a gull centering includegraphics width 0 5 textwidth gul end figure begin figure h centering reflectbox includegraphics width 0 5 textwidth g caption A picture of the same gull looking the other way end figure begin table h begin center Figure 1 A picture of a gull begin tabular 1 c r Figure 2 A picture of the same gull looking the other way hline 1 amp 28 amp 3 NN 4 amp 5 amp 6 NN 7 amp 8 amp 9 NN hline end tabular end center caption A simple table end table Notice how the tables and figures have independent counters end document Figure 56 nun a c Table 1 A simple table Notice how the tables and figures have independent counters note that the command reflectbox flips its content horizontally 24 2 1 Lists of figures and tables Captions can
126. the source to the desired output This is largely hidden to the user but because of all the complexity of the referencing of citations from your source LaTeX file to the database entries in another file you actually need multiple passes to accomplish the task This means you have to run LaTeX a number of times Each pass will perform a particular task until it has managed to resolve all the citation references Here s what you need to type into command line tex latex source code tex la bibtex latex source code aux la la D tex latex_source_code tex e ASAS la latex latex_source_code tex 62 BibTeX Extensions are optional if you put them note that the bibtex command takes the AUX file as input After the first LaTeX run you will see errors such as LaTeX Warning Citation lamport94 on page 1 undefined on input line 21 LaTeX Warning There were undefined references The next step is to run bibtex on that same LaTeX source or more precisely the corresponding AUX file however not on the actual bib file to then define all the references within that document You should see output like the following This is BibTeX Version 0 99c Web2C 7 3 1 The top level auxiliary file latex source code aux The style file plain bst Database file 41 sample bib The third step which is invoking LaTeX for the second time will see more errors like LaTeX Warning Label s may have changed
127. the system s apt package manager 41 1 2 Mac OS X Mac OS X users may use MacTeX supporting TeX LaTeX AMSTeX ConTeXt XeTeX and many other core packages TeX Live is also available through MacPorts and Fink 1 teTeX Home Page http www tug org tetex Retrieved January 31 2007 2 http en wikipedia org wiki Ubuntu 20 28Linux 20distribution 29 3 http en wikipedia org wiki Debian 4 http en wikipedia org wiki Advanced 20Packaging 20Tool 5 http tug org mactex 6 http www macports org 7 http www finkproject org 333 Installation 41 1 3 Microsoft Windows Microsoft Windows users can install MiKTeX onto their computer This distribution has advanced features such as automatic installation of packages and simple interfaces to modify settings such as default paper sizes 41 1 4 Online To get started without needing to install anything users can use ScribTeX which is a completely online LaTeX compiler based on the TeX Live distribution 41 2 Editors TeX and LaTeX source documents as well as related files are all text files and can be opened and modified in almost any text editor A few recommended editors include Cross platform TexStudio Texmaker e Vim with Vim LaTeX Vimscript plugin e Emacs with AUCTeXP e ScribTeX browser based Verbosus browser based TeXworks e Gummi Linux only e Kile Mac OS X only TeXShop Windows only
128. to see how you can use these The command newsavebox creates a placeholder for storing a text the command savebox stores the speci fied text in this placeholder and does not display anything in the document and usebox recalls the content of the placeholder into the document See LaTeX Page Layout for samples using these 42 4 Samples Resize an image to take exactly half the text width includegraphics width 0 5 textwidth mygraphic Make distance between items larger inside an itemize environment 3 Chapter 12 on page 95 339 Useful Measurement Macros addtolength itemsep 0 5 baselineskip Use of savebox to resize an image to the height of the text Create the holders we will need for our work newlength mytitleheight newsavebox mytitletext Create the reference text for measures savebox mytitletext Large bfseries This is our title settoheight mytitleheight usebox mytitletext Now creates the actual object in our document framebox textwidth 1 includegraphics height mytitleheight my_image hspace 2mm usebox mytitletext 42 5 References 42 6 See also University of Cambridge gt Engineering Department gt computing help gt LaTeX gt Squeezing Space in LaTeX 4 http www h eng cam ac uk help tpl textprocessing squeeze html 340 43 Useful Size Commands 1 REDIRECT LaTeX Text Formatting 1 http en wikibooks org wik
129. usepackage xunicode Ndefaultfontfeatures Mapping tex text To support LaTeX quoting style setromanfont Hoefler Text else Nusepackage ut f8 inputenc usepackage T1 fontenc fi begin document Lorem ipsum end document 33 2 Useful websites The Latex Font Catalogue LaTeX font commands e How to change fonts in Latex http en wikipedia org wiki XeTeX http en wikipedia org wiki LuaTeX http www ctan org tex archive help Catalogue entries fontspec html http en wikipedia org wiki Opentype http en wikipedia org wiki Unicode http www ctan org tex archive macros generic ifxetex http www tug dk FontCatalogue http www cl cam ac uk rf10 pstex latexcommands htm 0 http www ee iitb ac in trivedi LatexHelp latexfont htm ko v DJ Ch LS WW 270 Useful websites e ftp tug ctan org tex archive fonts utilities fontinst doc talks et99 font tutorial pdf Understanding the world of TEX fonts and mastering the basics of fontinst e Font installation the shallow way For one off projects you can cut corners with font installation i e fontinst and end up with a more manageable set of files and a cleaner TEX installation This article shows how and why 33 2 1 TrueType ttf fonts Step by step guide to manually install a ttf font for PdfTeX A bash script for installing a LaTeX font family MikTeX TeXLive gt LaTeX And TrueType Font True Type Fonts with LaTeX under
130. vectors you have to decide how they will look There are several different standards used in many books If a is a vector some people like to add an arrow over it d other people write it underlined a another common version is to write it bold a Let us assume you want to write your vectors with an arrow over them then add the following line in your mystyle sty newcommand myvec 1 vec 1 and write your vectors inside the new myvec command You can call it as you wish but you d better choose a short name because you will probably write it very often Then if you change your mind and you want your vectors to look differently you just have to change the definition of your myvec Use this approach whenever you can this will save you a lot of time 37 6 External Links Subfiles package documentation pdfpages package documentation 8 http tug ctan org tex archive macros latex contrib subfiles subfiles pdf 9 http mirror ctan org macros latex contrib pdfpages pdfpages pdf 308 38 Export To Other Formats Strictly speaking LaTeX source can be used to directly generate two formats DVI using latex the first one to be supported PDF using pdflatex more recent Using other software freely available on Internet you can easily convert DVI and PDF to other document formats In particular you can obtain the PostScript version using software which is included in your LaTeX distribution Some LaTeX ID
131. wikibooks home Both point at the same page but in the first case the URL will be shown while in the second case the URL will be hidden Note that if you print your document the link stored using href will not be shown anywhere in the document 26 2 2 Other possibilities Apart from linking to websites discussed above hyperref can be used to provide mailto links links to local files and links to anywhere within the PDF output file 230 Customization Mail address A possible way to insert email links is by href mailto my_address wikibooks org my _address wikibooks org it just shows your email address so people can know it even if the document is printed on paper but if the reader clicks on it s he can easily send you an email Or to incorporate the url package s formatting and line breaking abilities into the displayed text use href mailto my_address wikibooks org nolinkurl my_address wikibooks org When using this form note that the nolinkurl command is fragile and if the hyperlink is inside of a moving argument it must be preceeded by a protect command Local file Files can also be linked using the url or the href commands You simply have to add the string run at the beginning of the link string url run path to my file ext href run path to my file ext text displayed You can use relative paths to link documents near the location of your current document in order to
132. will prevail The Library refers to a covered work governed by this License other than an Application or a Combined Work as defined below An Application is any work that makes use of an interface provided by the Library but which is not otherwise based on the Library Defining a subclass of a class defined by the Library is deemed a mode of using an interface provided by the Library program Copyright C year name of author This program comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY for details type show w This is free software and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions type show c for details The hypothetical commands show w and show c should show the appro priate parts of the General Public License Of course your program s com mands might be different for a GUI interface you would use an about box You should also get your employer if you work as a programmer or school if any to sign a copyright disclaimer for the program if necessary For more information on this and how to apply and follow the GNU GPL see lt http www gnu org licenses gt The GNU General Public License does not permit incorporating your pro gram into proprietary programs If your program is a subroutine library you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library If this is what you want to do use the GNU Lesser General Public License ins
133. will let you easily define any theorem like enunciation 14 1 Basic theorems First of all make sure you have the amsthm package enabled Nusepackage amsthm The easiest is the following newtheorem name Printed output put it in the preamble The first argument is the name you will use to reference it the second argument is the output LaTeX will print whenever you use it For example newtheorem mydef Definition will define the mydef environment if you use it like this begin mydef Here is a new definition end mydef It will look like this Definition 3 Here is a new definition with line breaks separating it from the rest of the text 14 2 Theorem counters Often the counters are determined by section for example Theorem 2 3 refers to the 3rd theorem in the 2nd section of a document In this case specify the theorem as follows newtheorem name Printed output numberby 1 http en wikipedia org wiki Theorem 147 Theorems where numberby is the name of the section level section subsection etc at which the numbering is to take place By default each theorem uses its own counter However it is common for similar types of theorems e g Theorems Lemmas and Corollaries to share a counter In this case define subsequent theorems as newtheorem name counter Printed output where counter is the name of the counter to be used Usually this will be the name of the master theorem
134. work and here then that part and only that part is released under the terms of GFDL like any other text here on Wikibooks Working 47 2 Wiki users Major contributors to the book on Wikibooks are oo JA Ch LN P L HA ra ttp www andy roberts net misc latex index html ttp www ctan org tex archive info lshort english lshort pdf ttp it oetiker ch ttp homepage boku ac at partl ttp www ctan org tex archive info beginlatex beginlatex 3 6 pdf ttp silmaril ie cgi bin blog ttp sarovar org projects ltxprimer ttp www maths tcd ie dwilkins LaTeXPrimer vd d vd d vd oO vd 365 Authors Alessio Damato e Jtwdog 9 http en wikibooks org wiki User 3AAlejo2083 10 http en wikibooks org wiki User 3AJtwdog 366 48 Contributors Edits 112 40 125 44 25 User 3mta3 ABCD ATC2 Aadornellesf Abonnema Adam majewski Adamcrume Adouglass Adrignola Alejo2083 9 AllenZh Alzahrawi 1 Amamory Ambrevar Anarchyboy Ans 6 Arided Arnehe Arthurchy Asmeurer Astrophizz Ra Ne e ua N tA Rh ug VD GJ Ch tA UT a N N ken Feat e ben ken Fe Fe Feat Fe Fe Ev OO A Eh LN E WNYC vd D vd DD vd vd vd 90 vd vd vd vd dd vd vd vd vd Chock ver och Ch EE Ct cb cb EE check ct ctcct ck CF ck ch en en en en en en en en en en en en en en en en
135. you are going to use in the document For more information see the Internationalization section bm allows use of bold greek letters in math mode using the bm command This super sedes the amsbsy package boxedminipage it introduces the boxedminipage environ ment that works exactly like minipage but adds a frame around it caption allows customization of appearance and place ment of captions for figures tables etc Chapter 13 on page 111 Chapter 14 on page 147 Chapter 10 on page 77 Chapter 39 on page 315 Du RW 249 Packages cancel provides commands for striking out mathemat ical expressions The syntax is Xcancel x or cancelto 0 x changepage to easily change the margins of pages The syntax is changepage textheight textwidth evensidemargin oddsidemargin columnsep topmargin headheight headsep 3 footskip All the arguments can be both positive and negative numbers they will be added keeping the sign to the relative variable cite assists in citation management color it adds support for colored text For more information see the relevant section easylist adds support for arbitrarily deep nested lists useful for outlines esint adds additional integral symbols for integrals over squares clockwise integrals over sets etc eucal other mathematical symbols fancyhdr
136. 2 Rossdub kibooks org w index php title User Rafaelgr kibooks org w index php title User Rafopar kibooks org w index php title User Rajkiran g kibooks org w index php title User Ramac kibooks org w index php title User Raphael Ackermann kibooks org w index php title User Raylu kibooks org w index php title User RaymondSutanto kibooks org w index php title User Rbonvall kibooks org w index php title User Rdg nz kibooks org w index php title User RealSebix kibooks org w index php title User Recent Runes kibooks org w index php title User Redirect fixer kibooks org w index php title User Rehoot kibooks org w index php title User Ricordisamoa kibooks org w index php title User Risk kibooks org w index php title User Rnddim kibooks org w index php title User Roarbakk kibooks org w index php title User Robbiemorrison kibooks org w index php title User Robert Borkowski kibooks org w index php title User Robert Horning kibooks org w index php title User Robin kibooks org w index php title User Rogal kibooks org w index php title User Rogerbrent kibooks org w index php title User Rondenaranja kibooks org w index php title User Rossdub Wiki users 4 Sabalka 29 Samuel Bi 4 Sanderd17 1 Sandman10000 1 Sandrobt gt 14 Sargas 2 Schaber 1 SciYann gt 1 Scientific293 1 Scorwin 1 Scruss 2 Semperos 1 Sgenier 1 Shahbaz Youssefi 9 1 Silca6783 1 Simeon 1
137. 25 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 ht ht ht ht ht ht ht ht ht ht ht ht ht ht ht ht ht ht ht ht ht ht ht ht ht en en en en en en en en en en en en en en en en en 312 en wi wi wi wi en wi wi wi wi en en wi wi wi wi wi en wi wi wi wi en en wi wi wi wi wi en wi wi wi kiboo kiboo kiboo kiboo kiboo kiboo kiboo kiboo kiboo kiboo kiboo kiboo kiboo kiboo kiboo kiboo kiboo kiboo kiboo kiboo kiboo kiboo kiboo kiboo kiboo org w index org w index org w index org w index org w index org w index org w index org w index org w index org w index org w index org w index org w index org w index org w index org w index org w index org w index org w index org w index org w index org w index org w index org w index org w index OI FOE 199 0 O U 7 OO IO I9 TU d Ogg OOOO hp hp hp hp hp hp hp hp hp hp hp hp hp hp hp hp hp hp hp hp hp hp hp hp hp ti ti ti ti ti EL ti ti ET ti ti ti ti ti ti ti ti ti ti ti ti ti EL ti ti CF ct ct ct ct ct ct ct ct ct ct ct ct ct ct ct ct ct cr ct c
138. 3 Jevon 8 5 Jflycn 3 Jguk 1 Jid 1 Jim 1 Jmcdon10 1 Joaospam 1 Jodi a schneider 2 Joe Schmedley 172 http en wikibooks org w index php title User JECompton 173 http en wikibooks org w index php title User JV 174 http en wikibooks org w index php title User Jacho 175 http en wikibooks org w index php title User JackPotte 176 http en wikibooks org w index php title User Jacobrothstein 177 http en wikibooks org w index php title User Jamoroch 178 http en wikibooks org w index php title User Jan_Winnicki 179 http en wikibooks org w index php title User Janltx 180 http en wikibooks org w index php title User Janskalicky 181 http en wikibooks org w index php title User Jason_barrington 182 http en wikibooks org w index php title User Jasu 183 http en wikibooks org w index php title User Javalenok 184 http en wikibooks org w index php title User Jayk 185 http en wikibooks org w index php title User Je ne d C3 A9tiens pas la v C3 A9rit C3 A9 universelle 186 http en wikibooks org w index php title User JenVan 187 http en wikibooks org w index php title User Jer789 188 http en wikibooks org w index php title User Jevon 189 http en wikibooks org w index php title User Jflycn 190 http en wikibooks org w index php title User Jguk 191 http en wikibooks org w index php title User Jld 192 http en wikibooks org w index php title User Jlrn 193 http en wikibooks org w index php ti
139. 4 13 7 Roots The Nsqrt command creates a square root surrounding an expression It accepts an optional argument specified in square brackets and to change magnitude Nel sqrt frac a b Ya NE sqrt n 1 x x 2 x 3 ldots N Vlt L H Some people prefer writing the square root closing it over its content This method arguably makes it more clear what is in the scope of the root sign This habit is not normally used while writing with the computer but if you still want to change the output of the square root LaTeX gives you this possibility Just add the following code in the preamble of your document 118 Roots New definition of square root it renames sqrt as oldsqrt let oldsqrt sqrt it defines the new sqrt in terms of the old one def sqrt mathpalette DHLhksart def DHLhksqrt 1 2 setbox0 hbox 1 oldsqrt 2 dimen0 ht0 advance dimen0 0 2 ht0 setbox2 hbox vrule height ht0 depth dimen0 box0 lower0 4pt box2 CL CL 2 2 Figure 32 The new style is on left the old one on right This TeX code first renames the sqrt command as oldsqrt then redefines sqrt in terms of the old one adding something more The new square root can be seen in the picture on the left compared to the old one on the right Unfortunately this code won t work if you want to use multiple roots if you try to write Ya as sqrt b a after you used the code above you ll
140. 42 Useful Measurement Macros A list of macros and their values 42 1 Units First we introduce the LaTeX measurement units All LaTeX units are two letter abbreviations You can choose from a variety of units Here are the most common ones 1 Abbreviation Definition Value in points pt pt a point is 1 72 27 inch that 1 means about 0 0138 inch or 0 3515 mm mm a millimeter 2 84 cm a centimeter 28 4 in inch 72 27 ex roughly the height of an x in undefined depends on the the current font font used em roughly the width of an M undefined depends on the uppercase in the current font used font And here are some less common units Abbreviation Definition Value in points pt bp a big point is 1 72 inch that 1 00375 means about 0 0139 inch or 0 3527 mm pe pica 12 dd did t 1157 did t 1238 1 07 points cc cicero 12 did t 12 84 sp scaled point 65536sp per 0 000015 point 1 http www uz ac zw science maths latex ltx 86 html 2 http www uz ac zw science maths latex ltx 86 html 337 Useful Measurement Macros 42 2 Length macros Some length commands are baselineskip The normal vertical distance between lines in a paragraph baselinestretch Multiplies baselineskip columnsep The distance between columns columnwidth The width of the column evensidemargin The margin for even pages think of a printed booklet M
141. 5 5 Do ee N ee A ee EL IR EE EI ERI s 349 4536 TR 349 ASTI RA a ee Sk Bes art ee cde EEN 349 AS Os ses he oS an fena IRR Bae ar bep GER Hae Suy Bee on 350 uon PT 350 45 TOT 5 utu derer dauern reas Pire arabe d d n wetter tet eos 351 SILIK uie sodio a mscr qubd s qe Bo ed e b A ood bles do 1 351 45 1217 uet auf a RN 351 AST 3M ce dee ete cae he th dy ee BE TAE Iden aha d Ct ER tha d en ed s 352 ASIAN gt 4 2 ats tod pato ee a mero needed an cu ee ol s at e ded anis 353 ASAD MMC rcc 354 AS NOP 4 u shoe exon te Wb n b ie 354 AS LIBRAS A A nee qui ua EXE AA A pu es 355 AL OS i s ha e a M s oM e bets DE re A N ut 356 45 0 Tc x ee em td NR See EE MAE eM 357 KE HEEN 359 CA ENEE 360 46 Links 361 47 Authors 365 SG Included books nn cr dos IR reru dre ee Quse POR dte 365 47 24 WIKU USES A ee rs eom CA On A a er BE 365 48 Contributors 367 List of Figures 385 49 Licenses 391 49 1 GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE len 391 49 2 GNU Free Documentation License 392 49 3 GNU Lesser General Public License 392 1 Permission is granted to copy distribute and or modify this document under the terms of the Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike 3 0 Unported License 1 http en wikibooks org wiki Category 3ALaTeX 1 Contents e Introduction Chapters Ne Rh aah a ADA AA pa Absolute Beginners Basics Document Structure Errors and Warnings Title Creation Bibliography Management Tables Fo
142. 8 Copyright O 2000 2001 2002 2007 2008 Free Software Foundation Inc lt http fsf org gt Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document but changing it is not allowed 0 PREAMBLE The purpose of this License is to make a manual textbook or other func tional and useful document free in the sense of freedom to assure everyone the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it with or without modifying it either commercially or noncommercially Secondarily this License pre serves for the author and publisher a way to get credit for their work while not being considered responsible for modifications made by others This License is a kind of copyleft which means that derivative works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense It complements the GNU General Public License which is a copyleft license designed for free software We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for free software because free software needs free documentation a free program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms that the software does But this License is not limited to software manuals it can be used for any textual work regardless of subject matter or whether it is published as a printed book We recommend this License principally for works whose purpose is instruction or reference 1 APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS This License applies to any manual or other w
143. Doe date today maketitle If you are provided with a class file from a publisher or if you use the AMS article class amsart then you can use several different commands to enter author information The email address is at the end and the texttt commands formats the email address using a mono spaced font The built in command called today will be replaced with the current date when processed by LaTeX But you are free to put whatever you want as a date in no set order If braces are left empty then the date is omitted Using this approach you can create only basic output whose layout is very hard to change If you want to create your title freely see the Title Creation section 6 1 3 Abstract As most research papers have an abstract there are predefined commands for telling LaTeX which part of the content makes up the abstract This should appear in its logical order therefore after the top matter but before the main sections of the body This command is available for the document classes article and report but not book documentclass article begin document begin abstract Your abstract goes here Vendiabstracti E By default LaTeX will use the word Abstract as a title for your abstract if you want to change it into anything else e g Executive Summary add the following line before your abstract renewcommand abstractname Executive Summary 2 Chapter 8 on page 45 33 Document Structur
144. E will give you the possibility to generate the PostScript version directly even if it uses internally a DVI md step e g LaTeX DVI PS It is also possible to create PDF from DVI and vice versa It doesn t seem logical to create a file with two steps when you can create it straight away but some users might need it because as you remember from the first chapters the format you can generate depends upon the formats of the images you want to include EPS for DVI PNG and JPG for PDF Here you will find sections about different formats with description about how to get it Other formats can be produced such as RTF which can be used in Microsoft Word and HTML However these documents are produced from software that parses and interprets the LaTeX files and do not implement all the features available for the primary DVI and PDF outputs Nonetheless they do work and can be crucial tools for collaboration with colleagues who do not edit documents with LaTeX 38 1 Convert to PDF 38 1 1 Directly pdflatex my file 38 1 2 DVI to PDF dvipdfm my file dvi will create my_file pdf Another way is to pass through PS generation dvi2ps myfile dvi ps2pdf myfile ps you will get also a file called my Ale pe that you can delete 309 Export To Other Formats 38 1 3 Merging PDF If you have created different PDF documents and you want to merge them into one single PDF file you can use the following command line com
145. F format Then you can view the result with your preferred PDF viewer Adobe Reader Okular Evince Sumatra Foxit Practically all LaTeX distributions have a DVI viewer for viewing the default output of 1atex and also tools such as dvi2pdf for converting the result automatically to PDF and PS formats 2 4 4 Applications within a distribution Here are the main programs you expect to find in any LaTeX distribution latex compiler reads a LaTeX tex file and creates a dvi e pdflatex compiler reads a LaTeX tex file and creates a pdf e dvi2ps converts the dvi file to ps postscript dvi2pdf converts the dvi file to pdf dvi2pdfmis an improved version Also tex and pdftex compilers are included but you should be careful with using them because they support only plain TeX Note that since LaTeX is just a collection of macros for TeX if you compile a plain TeX document with a LaTeX compiler such as pdf latex it will work while the opposite is not true if you try to compile a LaTeX source with a TeX compiler you will get many errors When LaTeX was created the only format it could create was DVI later PDF support was added by pdflatex PDF files can be created with both pdflatex and dvipdfm The output of pdflatex takes direct advantage of modern features of PDF such as hyperlinks and embedded fonts which are not part of DVI Passing through DVI imposes limitations of its older format On the other hand some packages s
146. GFDL 36 Neet PD 37 Neet PD 38 Neet PD 39 Neet PD 40 Neet PD 41 Alessio Damato GFDL 42 Alessio Damato 13 31 12 J anuary 2007 UTC GFDL 43 Alessio Damato GFDL 44 Nemti gt PD 45 MyName Gkc talk 57 GFDL 46 LaTeX GPL 47 Derbeth GFDL 48 PD 49 gms GFDL 50 Original uploader was Jtwdog at en wikibooks GFDL 51 Original uploader was Jtwdog at en wikibooks GFDL 52 Original uploader was Jtwdog at en wikibooks GFDL 469 http en wikibooks org wiki User 3ADirk 20H FCnniger 470 http en wikibooks org wiki User 3ADirk 20H FCnniger 471 http en wikibooks org wiki User 3AAlejo2083 472 http en wikibooks org wiki User 3ATomato86 473 http en wikibooks org wiki User 3AAlejo2083 474 http en wikibooks org wiki User 3AChrisHodgesUK 475 http en wikibooks org wiki User 3AWinfree 476 http en wikibooks org wiki User 3ATomato86 477 http en wikibooks org wiki User 3ANeet 478 http en wikibooks org wiki User 3ANeet 479 http en wikibooks org wiki User 3ANeet 480 http en wikibooks org wiki User 3ANeet 481 http en wikibooks org wiki User 3ANeet 482 http en wikibooks org wiki User 3AAlejo2083 483 http en wikibooks org wiki User 3AAlejo2083 484 http en wikibooks org wiki User 3AAlejo2083 485 http en wikibooks org wiki User 3ANemt i 486 http en wikibooks org wiki User 3AGkc 487 http en wikibooks org wiki User 20talk 3AGkc 488 http en wikiboo
147. Group TUGIndia The Indian TeX Users Group news comp text tex comp text tex Newsgroup for La TeX related questions CTAN hundreds of add on packages and programs 46 0 2 Tutorials FAQs Tobias Oetiker s Not So Short Introduction to LaTex2e http www ctan org tex archive info Ishort english Ishort pdf also at http people ee ethz ch oetiker Ishort Ishort pdf Vel s introduction to LaTeX What is it why should you use it who should use it and how to get started http www vel co nz vel co nz Blog Entries 2009 11 4 LaTeX Document Preparation System html Peter Flynn s beginner s guide formatting http www ctan org tex archive info beginlatex beginlatex 3 6 pdf The AMS Short Math Guide for LaTeX a concise summary of math formula typesetting features http www ams org tex amslatex htm amsmath users guide PDF and related files http www ctan org tex archive macros latex required amslatex math LaTeX Primer from the Indian TeX Users Group http sarovar org projects Itxprimer LaTeX Primer http www maths ted ie dwilkins LaTeXPrimer ttp en wikipedia org wiki TeX ttp en wikipedia org wiki LaTeX ttp www tug org ttp uk tug org ttp www tug org in ttp www ctan org ttp www ctan org tex archive info lshort english lshort pdf ttp www ams org tex amslatex html vd d vd d vd YP vd oo JA Ch tA P L HA ra 361 Links PSTricks fancy graphics exploiting PDF
148. LaTeX Wikibooks org June 21 2012 On the 28th of April 2012 the contents of the English as well as German Wikibooks and Wikipedia projects were licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike 3 0 Unported license An URI to this license is given in the list of figures on page 385 If this document is a derived work from the contents of one of these projects and the content was still licensed by the project under this license at the time of derivation this document has to be licensed under the same a similar or a compatible license as stated in section 4b of the license The list of contributors is included in chapter Contributors on page 367 The licenses GPL LGPL and GFDL are included in chapter Licenses on page 391 since this book and or parts of it may or may not be licensed under one or more of these licenses and thus require inclusion of these licenses The licenses of the figures are given in the list of figures on page 385 This PDF was generated by the IATEX typesetting software The IATEX source code is included as an attachment source 7z txt in this PDF file To extract the source from the PDF file we recommend the use of http www pdflabs com tools pdftk the pdf toolkit utility or clicking the paper clip attachment symbol on the lower left of your PDF Viewer selecting Save Attachment After extracting it from the PDF file you have to rename it to source 7z To uncompress the resulting archive we recommend the use of http
149. N Search Additional resources form The TeX Catalogue Online Alphabetic catalogue With brief descriptions Topical catalogue with packages sorted systematically Hierarchical mirroring the CTAN folder hierarchy 2 Chapter 24 on page 203 22 Chapter 34 4 on page 276 23 http tug ctan org search html 24 http www ctan org tex archive help Catalogue catalogue html 25 http www ctan org tex archive help Catalogue alpha html 26 http www ctan org tex archive help Catalogue brief html 27 http www ctan org tex archive help Catalogue bytopic html 28 http www ctan org tex archive help Catalogue hier html 253 29 Packages Installing Extra Packages Most LaTeX installations come with a large set of pre installed style packages but many more are available on the net The main place to look for style packages on the Internet is CTAN http www ctan org Once you have identified a package you need and haven t already got or you have got it and need to update it use the indexes on any CTAN server to find the package you need and the directory where it can be downloaded from If on a debian system there is an alternative way of installing packages through synaptics package manager 29 0 1 Downloading packages What you need to look for is usually two files one ending in dt x and the other in ins The first is a DOCTeX file which combines the package program and its documentation in a single file
150. N lalldone ACTIONEQ write line CALL Z ENDACTION ENDACTIONS END end program And here s the transformed and corrected version begin program seq line i 1 WHILE i neq n 1 ADO line item i concat concat number i i itl WHILE i neq n l AND item i litem i 1 ADO line line concat concat number i i i41 MOD write line MOD end program The package also provides a macro for typesetting a set like this set x Nin N x gt 0J Lines can be numbered by setting NumberProgramstrue and numbering turned off with NumberProgramsfalse Package page Package documentation 19 5 Source Code Formatting using the Listings package See the Listings package reference page for more information 3 http www ctan org pkg program 4 http mirror ctan org macros latex contrib program program doc pdf 5 Chapter 30 on page 259 172 Source Code Formatting using the Listings package A complete reference manual can be found at http tug ctan org tex archive macros latex contrib listings listings pdf This is a basic example for some Pascal code documentclass article usepackage listings Include the listings package begin document lstset language Pascal Set your language you can change the language for each code block optionally begin lstlisting frame single Start your code block for i maxint to 0 do begin
151. OD D D D D D D 71 Bibliography Management Having all your references in one place can be a big advantage And having them in a structured form that allows customizable output is another one There are a variety of free utilities that can load your bib files and allow you to view them in a more efficient manner as well as sort them and check for errors 9 4 Bibliography in the table of contents If you are writing a book or report you ll likely insert your bibliography using something like begin thebibliography 99 bibitem bib one_book some information bibitem bib one_article other information end thebibliography Or if you are using BibTeX your references will be saved in a bib file and your TeX document will include the bibliography by these commands bibliographystyle plain bibliography mybibtexfile Both of these examples will create a chapter like or section like output showing all your references But even though the resulting References looks like a chapter or section it will not be handled quite the same it will not appear in the Table of Contents 9 4 1 Using tocbibind The most comfortable way of adding your bibliography to the table of contents is to use the dedicated package tocbibind that works with many standard document classes Simply include this code in the preamble of your document usepackage nottoc numbib tocbibind This will include the Bibliography in the Table
152. Ser Ser Ser Ser Ser Comput2h ConditionalZenith Conighion Conrad Irwin Courcelles Crasic Crasshopper CrazyTerabyte Crissov C C3 ADcero Dan Polansky Danielstrong52 David s hollman DavidMcKenzie Debejyo Dendik Derbeth Derwaldrandfoerster Dilaudid Dirk H C3 BCnniger Dmb Dncarley Dporter Dreaven3 Drevicko Wiki users 3 Drewbie 1 Dubbaluga 3 Elewisl Echeban 6 Ediahist 1 Edudobay 3 Elliptic11 Elwikipedista Emreg00 1 Erp 06 16 Erylaos Eudoxos 1 Everlong Evin 5 Eyliu 1 Ffangs 2 Filip Dominec 1 Fishpi Fall 1 FlashSheridan Fmccown 1 Fongs 4 Franzl aus tirol 1 Frap 1 Fredmaranhao 97 http en wikibooks org w index 98 http en wikibooks org w index 99 http en wikibooks org w index 100 http en wikibooks org w index 101 http en wikibooks org w index 102 http en wikibooks org w index 103 http en wikibooks org w index 104 http en wikibooks org w index 105 http en wikibooks org w index 106 http en wikibooks org w index 107 http en wikibooks org w index 108 http en wikibooks org w index 109 http en wikibooks org w index 110 http en wikibooks org w index 111 http en wikibooks org w index 112 http en wikibooks org w index 113 http en wikibooks org w index 114 http en wikibooks org w index 115 http en wikibooks org w index 116 http en wikibooks org w
153. SiriusB33 2 Sjlegg 1 Skarakoleva3 5 1 Skou 66 5 Snaxe920 7 1 Snoopy67 4 Spag8530 II Spelemann 4 Spirosdenaxas 347 http en wikibooks org w index p 348 http en wikibooks org w index p 349 http en wikibooks org w index p 350 http en wikibooks org w index p 351 http en wikibooks org w index p 352 http en wikibooks org w index p 353 http en wikibooks org w index p 354 http en wikibooks org w index p 355 http en wikibooks org w index p 356 http en wikibooks org w index p 357 http en wikibooks org w index p 358 http en wikibooks org w index p 359 http en wikibooks org w index p 360 http en wikibooks org w index p 361 http en wikibooks org w index p 362 http en wikibooks org w index p 363 http en wikibooks org w index p 364 http en wikibooks org w index p 365 http en wikibooks org w index p 366 http en wikibooks org w index p 367 http en wikibooks org w index p 368 http en wikibooks org w index p 369 http en wikibooks org w index p 370 http en wikibooks org w index p 371 http en wikibooks org w index p hp hp hp hp hp hp hp hp hp hp hp t hp t hp t hp hp t hp t hp t hp hp hp t hp t hp hp hp hp tit tit tit tit tit cytl tit tit tit ct i et t p EF ett ZE ER cheek eto eke cb tit1 tit tit EPT ser ser Sanderd17 ser ser ser ser ser S
154. TeX It is a three by three table but without any lines 11 Chapter 42 on page 337 79 Tables lA ha ra oo tA N VD Ch Lu begin tabular l cr 1 amp 2 amp 3 4 amp 5 amp 6 NN 7 amp 8 amp 9 NN end tabular Expanding upon that by including some vertical lines 1 2 415 7 8 ON Ww begin tabular 1 c r The 2 amp 8 A3 4 amp 5 amp 6 NN 7 amp 8 amp 9 NN end tabular To add horizontal lines to the very top and bottom edges of the table 11213 41516 789 begin tabular 1 c r hline 1 amp 2 amp 3 4 amp 5 amp 6 NN 7 amp 8 amp 9 NN hline end tabular And finally to add lines between all rows as well as centering notice the use of the center environ ment of course the result of this is not obvious from the preview on this web page 1 2 3 41516 begin center 7 8 9 begin tabular 1 c r hline 1 amp 2 6 amp 3 hline 4 amp 5 amp 6 NN hline 7 amp 8 amp 9 NN hline end tabular end center 80 The tabular environment begin tabular r 1 7C0 hexadecimal hline 7C0 hexadecimal 3700 3700 amp octal NN cline 2 2 11111000000 amp binary AM 11111000000 binary hline hline 1984 amp decimal 1984 decimal hline end tabular Figure 9 10 2 2 Column specification using gt cmd and lt cmd The column specification can be altered using the array pack
155. The second is the installation routine much smaller You must always download both files If the two files are not there it means one of two things Either the package is part of a much larger bundle which you shouldn t normally update unless you change version of LaTeX or it s an older or relatively simple package written by an author who did not use a dt x file Download the package files to a temporary directory There will often be a readme txt with a brief description of the package You should of course read this file first 29 0 2 Installing a package There are five steps to installing a LaTeX package These steps can also be used on the pieces of a complicated package you wrote yourself in this case skip straight to Step 3 1 Extract the files Run LaTeX on the ins file That is open the file in your editor and process it as if it were a LaTeX document which it is or if you prefer type latex followed by the ins filename in a command window in your temporary directory This will extract all the files needed from the dtx file which is why you must have both of them present in the temporary directory Note down or print the names of the files created if there are a lot of them read the log file if you want to see their names again 2 Create the documentation Run LaTeX on the dt x file You might need to run it twice or more to get the cross references right just like any other LaTeX document This will crea
156. Theorem styles N end proof The method above does not work with the deprecated environment eqnarrayx Use alignx instead To use a custom Q E D symbol redefine the gedsymbol command To hide the Q E D symbol altogether redefine it to be blank renewcommand gedsymbol 14 4 Theorem styles It adds the possibility to change the output of the environments defined by newt heorem using the theoremstyle command command in the header theoremstyle stylename the argument is the style you want to use All subsequently defined theorems will use this style Here is a list of the possible pre defined styles stylename Description plain Used for theorems lemmas propositions etc default definition Used for definitions and examples remark Used for remarks and notes 14 4 1 Custom styles To define your own style use the newtheoremstyle command newtheoremstyle stylename name of the style to be used spaceabove measure of space to leave above the theorem E g 3pt spacebelow measure of space to leave below the theorem E g 3pt bodyfont name of font to use in the body of the theorem indent measure of space to indent headfont name of head font headpunctuation punctuation between head and body headspace space after theorem head normal interword space headspec Manually specify head Any arguments that are left blank will assume their default value He
157. URIs you can consider using the verb command which will be discussed later in the section on formatting 5 1 3 LaTeX commands LaTeX commands are case sensitive and take one of the following two formats They start with a backslash and then have a name consisting of letters only Command names are terminated by a space a number or any other non letter They consist of a backslash and exactly one non letter 3 Chapter 11 on page 93 20 The LaTeX source Some commands need an argument which has to be given between curly braces after the command name Some commands support optional parameters which are added after the command name in square brackets The general syntax is commandname optionl option2 fargumentl argument2 5 1 4 LaTeX groups A group is basically defined by a pair of braces The range of commands put between braces is limited to them The begingroup and endgroup commands are equivalent to opening brace and closing brace Example bf This is bold This is no more bold For some commands it is important to restrict their range of action and that s where groups come to be very useful 5 1 5 LaTeX environments Environments in LaTeX have a role that is quite similar to commands but they usually have effect on a wider part of the document Their syntax is begin environmentname text to be influenced end environmentname Between the begin and the end y
158. User Tully le User Tweenk le User Uluboz le User Unbitwise Le User Unco le User Urhixidur le User Vadik_wiki le User Vaffelkak le User Vaucouleur le User Velociostrich le User Vesal le User Waldir le User Wdcf le User Webinn le User Wenzeslaus le User White gecko le User Whiteknight le User Wikieditoroftoday le User Willy james 383 Contributors Winfree 1 Winniehell 25 Withinfocus Wkdurfee Wmheric 1 Wn202 7 2 Writalnaie 2 Wxm29 1 Wysinwygaa 5 Xania Xeracles Xnn 12 Xonqnopp Yanuzz 1 Ypey 6 2 Ysnikraz 3 ZeroOne 1 Zylorian 2 Zyggh 1 var Arnfj r Bjarmason 1 Inra Maka 1 leis lg sl s 422 http en wikibooks org w index php ti 423 http en wikibooks org w index php ti 424 http en wikibooks org w index php ti 425 http en wikibooks org w index php ti 426 http en wikibooks org w index php ti 427 http en wikibooks org w index php ti 428 http en wikibooks org w index php ti 429 http en wikibooks org w index php ti 430 http en wikibooks org w index php ti 43 http en wikibooks org w index php ti 432 http en wikibooks org w index php ti 433 http en wikibooks org w index php ti 434 http en wikibooks org w index php ti 435 http en wikibooks org w index php ti 436 http en wikibooks org w index php ti 437 http en wikibooks org w index php ti 438 http en wikibooks org w index php ti 439 http
159. X is support for Unicode and modern typography See its Wikipedia entry for more details http pdfshuffler sourceforge net http www accesspdf com http en wikipedia org wiki Shel1 20 28computing 29 http www2 warwick ac uk fac sci statistics staff academic firth software pdfjam 5 http en wikipedia org wiki XeTeX Run 310 Convert to PostScript Customization of PDF output in XeTeX setting document title author keywords etc is done using the configuration of hyperref package 38 2 Convert to PostScript from PDF pdf2ps my file pdf from DVI dvi2ps my file dvi 38 3 Convert to RTF LaTeX can be converted into an RTF file which in turn can be opened by a word processor such as OpenOffice org Writer or Microsoft Word This conversion is done through latex2rtf which can run on any computer platform The program operates by reading the LaTeX source and mimicking the behaviour of the LaTeX program 1atex2rtf supports most of the standard implementations of LaTeX such as standard formatting some math typesetting inclusion of EPS PNG or JPG graphics and tables As well it has some limited support for packages such as varioref and natbib However many other packages are not supported latex2rtf is simple to use The Windows version has a GUI 12rshell exe which is straightforward to use The command line version is offered for all platforms and can be used on an example mypaper tex file
160. a babunsrt bababbrv and bababbr3 must be used bibliographystyle babplain bibliography sample 2 http www mps mpg de software latex localtex localltx html makebst 22 http www mps mpg de software latex localtex doc merlin pdf 23 http tug ctan org tex archive biblio bibtex contrib babelbib 67 Bibliography Management 9 3 12 Showing unused items Usually Latex only display the entries which are referred to with Xcite It s possible to make uncited entries visible o nocite Name89 Show Bibliography entry of Name89 o nocite x Show all Bib entries 9 3 13 Getting Bibliographic data Many online databases provide bibliographic data in BibTeX Format making it easy to build your own database For example Google Scholar offers the option to return properly formatted output but you must turn it on in the Preferences One should be alert to the fact that bibliographic databases are frequently the product of several generations of automatic processing and so the resulting BibTex code is prone to a variety of minor errors especially in older entries 9 3 14 Helpful Tools UNKNOWN TEMPLATE See also w en Comparison of reference management software Wie schreibe ich eine Seminar oder Examensarbeit Daten ndern DIN 1505 Walter Kr mer DIN 1505 2 Kr mer Walter Wie schreibe ich eine Seminar oder Examensarbeit Frankfurt Main Campus WIE SCHREIBE ICH EINE Verlag
161. abi 6 http tug ctan org tex archive macros xetex latex xepersian 318 Hyphenating languages 39 4 3 Cyrillic script Please add the section Writing in Cyrillic from Mhttp www ctan org tex archive info Ishort english Ishort pdf You are allowed to copy it See also the Bulgarian translation of the Not so Short Introduction to LaTeX 2e from http www ctan org tex archive info Ishort bulgarian Ishort bg pdf This enables you to type cyrillic letters directly via your keyboard but with a different dis tribution than a standard cyrillic keyboard To get the standard distribution only include usepackage OT1 fontenc usepackage russian babel 39 4 4 Czech Czech is fine using usepackage czech babel usepackage T1 fontenc usepackage ut f8 inputenc You may use different encoding but UTF 8 is becoming standard and it allows you to have czech quotation marks directly in your text Otherwise there are macros glgg and grqq to produce left and right quote or place quotated text uv here 39 4 5 Finnish Finnish language hyphenation is enabled with usepackage finnish babel This will also automatically change document language section names etc to Finnish Remember to use Unicode encoding for Finnish if you re using an editor in utf8 mode Nusepackage ut 8 inputenc The default encoding system can oftenly be changed regardless of the operating system this happens at leas
162. ackage you can use unicode characters in bookmarks This will give you a much larger selection of characters to pick from when using texorpdfstring 237 Hyperlinks 26 7 Problems with tables and figures The links created by hyperref point to the label created within the float environment which as pre viously described must always be set after the caption Since the caption is usually below a figure or table the figure or table itself will not be visible upon clicking the link A workaround exists by using the package hypcap http www ctan org tex archive macros latex contrib oberdiek hypcap pdf with usepackage all hypcap Be sure to call this package after loading hyperref which should otherwise be loaded last If you use the wrapfig package mentioned in the Wrapping text around figures section of the Floats Figures and Captions chapter or other similar packages that define their own environments you will need to manually include capstart in those environments e g begin wrapfigure R 0 5 textwidth capstart begin center includegraphics width 0 48 textwidth filename end center caption label labelname a figure end wrapfigure 26 8 Problems with long caption and listoffigures or long title There is an issue when using listoffigures with hyperref for long captions or long titles This happens when the captions or the titles are longer than the page width about 7 9 words
163. ad several encodings simultaneously The default LaTeX font encoding is OT1 the encoding of the original Computer Modern TeX text fonts It contains only 128 characters many from ASCII but leaving out some others and including a number that are not in ASCII When accented characters are required TeX creates them by combining a normal character with an accent While the resulting output looks perfect this approach stops the automatic hyphenation from working inside words containing accented characters Besides some of Latin letters could not be created by combining a normal character with an accent to say nothing about letters of non Latin alphabets such as Greek or Cyrillic To overcome these shortcomings several 8 bit CM like font sets were created Extended Cork EC fonts in T1 encoding contains letters and punctuation characters for most of the European languages based on Latin script The LH font set contains letters necessary to typeset documents in languages using Cyrillic script Because of the large number of Cyrillic glyphs they are arranged into four font encodings T2A T2B T2C and X2 The CB bundle contains fonts in LGR encoding for the composition of Greek text By using these fonts you can improve enable hyphenation in non English documents Another advantage of using new CM like fonts is that they provide fonts of CM families in all weights shapes and optically scaled font sizes 317 Internationalization Here is a c
164. addtolist accepts multiple sets of the above mentioned four arguments all separated by commas The proper recursive definition is addtolist page number type heading 1 1 pagecommand Declares LaTeX commands which are executed on each sheet of paper Default pagecommand Nhispagestyle empty pagecommand label fig mylabel 194 abel abel lof list Creating Vector Graphics includepdfmerge Inserts pages of several external PDF documents includepdfmerge key val file page list Layout Several PDFs can be placed table like on one page See more information in its documentation 22 2 Creating Vector Graphics 22 2 1 TikZ PGF More thorough introduction to TikZ is available at the PGF TikZ chapter You can draw graphics directly with TeX commands using the tikz package http ftp dante de tex archive help Catalogue entries pgf html It comes with very good documentation with many examples p This needs usepackage tikz in the preamble begin figure centering begin tikzpicture draw thick rounded corners 8pt LED 0r2 1 3429 2229 92 0 ae M e 2 Se 2 2 0020 end tikzpicture caption This is the caption of my figure label fig test end figure An extensive collection of examples can be found here http www texample net tikz Further packages which are based on TikZ e g for drawing electrical circuits can be found here ht
165. ade something like begin eqnarray a b nonumber end eqnarray The error disappears if you use instead this form begin eqnarray a b end eqnarray Beware that the shown line number is often completely different from the erroneous line Possible solution Place the amsmath package before the hyperref package 26 5 Problems with Links and Pages Messages like the following pdfTeX warning ext4 destination with the same identifier name page 1 has been already used duplicate ignored appear when a counter gets reinitialized for example by using the command mainmatter provided by the book document class It resets the page number counter to 1 prior to the first chapter of the book But as the preface of the book also has a page number all links to page 1 would not be unique anymore hence the notice that duplicate has been ignored The counter measure consists of putting plainpages false into the hyperref options This unfortunately only helps with 235 Hyperlinks the page counter An even more radical solution is to use the option hypertexnames false but this will cause the page links in the index to stop working The best solution is to give each page a unique name by using the pagenumbering command pagenumbering alph 3 a b C titlepage other front matter pagenumbering roman ie di d Ev table of contents table of figures pagenumbering arabic 1 2 3 4
166. age This is done in the argument of the tabular environment using gt command for commands executed right before each column element and lt command for commands to be executed right after each column element As an example to get a column in math mode enter begin tabular gt c lt Another example is changing the font begin tabular gt small c to print the column in a small font The argument of the and specifications must be correctly balanced when it comes to and characters This means that Nb series is valid while gt 1textb will not work and gt textbf is not valid If there is the need to use the text of the table as an argument for instance using the textbf to produce bold text one should use the bgroup and egroup commands gt textbf bgroup c lt egroup produces the intended effect This works only for some basic LaTeX commands For other commands such as underline to underline text it is necessary to temporarily store the column text in a box using 1rbox First you must define such a box with newsavebox Nboxname and then you can define gt begin lrbox boxname 13 lt end lrbox underline unhbox boxname This stores the text in a box and afterwards takes the text out of the box with unhbox this destroys the box if the box is needed again one should use unhcopy instead and passing it to Nunderline For LaTeX2e you may want to use useb
167. ake care of getting the right version for us Consider the following situation you have added some pictures to your document in JPG and you have successfully compiled it in PDF Now you want to compile it in DVI you run latex and you get a lot of errors because you forgot to provide the EPS versions of the pictures you want to insert At the beginning of this book we had stated that the same 190 The graphicx package LaTeX source can be compiled in both DVI and PDF without any change This is true as long as you don t use particular packages and graphicx is one of those In any case you can still use both compilers with documents with pictures as well as long as you always remember to provide the pictures in two formats EPS and one of JPG PNG or PDF 22 1 5 Borders It is possible to have LaTeX create a border around your image by using fbox setlength fboxsep 0pt setlength fboxrule 0 5pt fbox includegraphics chick You can control the border padding with the set Llength fboxsep Opt command in this case I set it to Opt to avoid any padding so the border will be placed tightly around the image You can control the thickness of the border by adjusting the setlength fboxrule 0 5pt command 22 1 6 Graphics storage There is a way to tell LaTeX where to look for images for example it can be useful if you store images centrally for use in many different documents The answer is in the command graphicspath which
168. alf or 2 to double angle xx This option can rotate the image by xx degrees counter clockwise trim 1 brt This option will crop the imported image by from the left b from the bottom r from the right and t from the top Where 1 b r and t are lengths clip For the t rim option to work you must set clip true page x If the image file is a pdf file with multiple pages this parameter allows you to use a different page than the first In order to use more than one option at a time simply separate each with a comma The order you give the options matters E g you should first rotate your graphic with angle and then specify its width Included graphics will be inserted just there where you placed the code and the compiler will handle them as big boxes As we will see in the next section this can disrupt the layout you ll probably want to place graphics inside floating objects Also note that the trim option does not work with XeLaTex 33 Chapter 24 on page 203 187 Importing Graphics The star version of the command will work for eps files only For a more portable solution the standard way should take precedence The star command will take the crop dimension as extra parameter Vincludegraphicsx 100 100 300 300 mypicture 22 1 4 Examples OK it s time to see graphicx in action Here are some examples includegraphics chick This simply imports the image without any other processing H
169. algorithms anywhere in the document and LaTeX will print a list of the algorithm environments in the document with the corresponding page and the caption 19 3 3 An example from the manual This is an example taken from the manual official manual p 14 begin algorithm caption Calculate y x n label algl the document begin algorithmic Require n geq 0 vee x neq 0 Ensure Sy x n enter the algorithm environment give the algorithm a caption and a label for ref commands later in de oo oo oe enter the algorithmic environment 2 Chapter 19 2 3 on page 167 169 Typesetting Algorithms State Sy Leftarrow 1 If n lt 0 State X Leftarrow 1 x State N Leftarrow n Else State X Leftarrow x State N Leftarrow n EndIf while N neq 0 I f N is even State X Leftarrow X times X State N Leftarrow N 28 Else N is odd State y Leftarrow y times XS State N Leftarrow N 1 EndIf EndWhile end algorithmic end algorithm More information about all possible commands available at the project page http developer berlios de docman group_id 3442 The official manual is located at http mirrors ctan org macros latex contrib algorithms algorithms pdf 19 4 Typesetting using the program package The program package provides macros for typesetting algorithms Each line is set in math mode so all the indentation and spacing is done automatically
170. alignment of the box relative to the baseline of the surrounding text width takes a length argument specifying 266 Boxes the width of the box The main difference between a minipage and a parbox is that you cannot use all commands and environments inside a parbox while almost anything is possible in a minipage While Nparbox packs up a whole paragraph doing line breaking and everything there is also a class of boxing commands that operates only on horizontally aligned material We already know one of them it s called mbox It simply packs up a series of boxes into another one and can be used to prevent LaTeX from breaking two words As you can put boxes inside boxes these horizontal box packers give you ultimate flexibility makebox width pos text width defines the width of the resulting box as seen from the outside This means it can be smaller than the material inside the box You can even set the width to Opt so that the text inside the box will be typeset without influencing the surrounding boxes Besides the length expressions you can also use width height depth and totalheight in the width parameter They are set from values obtained by measuring the typeset text The pos parameter takes a one letter value center flushleft flushright or spread the text to fill the box The command ramebox works exactly the same as makebox but it draws a box around the text The following example shows you some thin
171. alpaper can be specified flegn Typesets displayed formulas left aligned in stead of centered 5 http www ctan org tex archive macros latex contrib memoir memman pdf 6 Chapter 25 on page 217 23 Basics Document Class Options leqno Places the numbering of formulas on the left hand side instead of the right titlepage notitlepage Specifies whether a new page should be started after the document title or not The article class does not start anew page by de fault while report and book do onecolumn twocolumn Instructs LaTeX to typeset the document in one column or two columns twoside oneside Specifies whether double or single sided output should be generated The classes article and report are single sided and the book class is double sided by default Note that this option concerns the style of the document only The option twoside does not tell the printer you use that it should actu ally make a two sided printout landscape Changes the layout of the document to print in landscape mode openright openany Makes chapters begin either only on right hand pages or on the next page available This does not work with the article class as it does not know about chapters The report class by default starts chapters on the next page available and the book class starts them on right hand pages draft makes LaTeX indicate hyphenation and justi ficati
172. an above or below The sidecap package can be used to place a caption beside a figure or table The following example demonstrates this for a figure by using a SCfigure environment in place of the figure environment documentclass article usepackage pdftex graphicx usepackage sidecap Figure 1 The giraffe Giraffa camelopardalis is an African even toed ungulate mammal the tallest of all land living an imal species Males can be 4 8 to 5 5 metres tall and weigh up to 1 360 kilograms The record sized bull was 5 87 m tall and weighed approximately 2 000 kg Females are generally slightly shorter and weigh less than the males do begin document begin SCfigure centering includegraphics width 0 5 textwidth 3 Giraff_picture picture filename Ncaption caption text end SCfigure end document Figure 58 24 2 3 Labels and Cross referencing Labels and cross references work fairly similarly to the general case see the Labels and Cross referencing section for more information 7 Chapter 15 on page 151 207 Floats Figures and Captions Warning If you want to label a figure so that you can reference it later you have to add the label after the caption inside seems to work in LaTeX 2e but inside the floating environment If it is declared outside it will give the section number If the label picks up the section or list number instead of the figure number put the label
173. an contain all the commands explained before An example is the following o fancypagestyle plain fancyhf remove everything renewcommand headrulewidth Opt remove lines as well Xrenewcommand Xfootrulewidth 0pt Finally here is the complete code of a possible style you could use for a two sided document Nusepackage fancyhdr 105 Page Layout setlength headheight 15pt pagestyle fancy renewcommand chaptermark 1 markboth 1 renewcommand sectionmark 1 markright 1 fancyhf fancyhead LE RO thepage fancyhead RE textit nouppercase leftmark fancyhead LO textit nouppercase rightmark fancypagestyle plain fancyhf remove everything renewcommand headrulewidth Opt remove lines as well renewcommand footrulewidth 0Opt 12 3 4 Page n ofm Some people like to put the current page number in context with the whole document LaTeX only provides access to the current page number However you can use the 1astpage package to find the total number of pages like this usepackage lastpage cfoot thepage of pageref LastPage Note the capital letters Also add a backslash after thepage to ensure adequate space between the page number and of And recall when using references that you have to run LaTeX an extra time to resolve the cross references 12 3 5 Alternative packages Other packages for page styles are scrpage2 very si
174. ands directly to the file that generates the specified list or table addtocounter counter value increments the counter address Return address addtolength len cmd len increments a length command see Useful Measurement Macros 3 Chapter 13 on page 111 4 Chapter 42 on page 337 346 addvspace adds a vertical space of a specified height alph causes the current value of a specified counter to be printed in alphabetic characters appendix changes the way sectional units are numbered so that information after the command is considered part of the appendix Varabic causes the current value of a specified counter to be printed in Arabic numbers author declares the author s See Document Structure 45 3 B backslash prints a backslash baselineskip a length command see Useful Measurement Macros which specifies the minimum space between the bottom of two successive lines in a paragraph Waselinestretch scales the value of baselineskip Wf Boldface typeface Wibitem generates a labeled entry for the bibliography bigskipamount bigskip equivalent to vspace bigskipamount boldmath bold font in math mode 5 Chapter 6 1 2 on page 32 6 Chapter 42 on page 337 7 Chapter 6 1 8 on page 38 347 Command Glossary 45 4 C cal Calligraphic style in math mode caption generate caption for figures and tables cdots Centered dots centering Used to center align LaTeX environments chapte
175. ant such a patent license to a party means to make such an agreement or commitment not to enforce a patent against the party If you convey a covered work knowingly relying on a patent license and the Corresponding Source of the work is not available for anyone to copy free of charge and under the terms of this License through a publicly available net work server or other readily accessible means then you must either 1 cause the Corresponding Source to be so available or 2 arrange to deprive your self of the benefit of the patent license for this particular work or 3 arrange in a manner consistent with the requirements of this License to extend the patent license to downstream recipients Knowingly relying means you have actual knowledge that but for the patent license your conveying the covered work in a country or your recipient s use of the covered work in a country would infringe one or more identifiable patents in that country that you have reason to believe are valid If pursuant to or in connection with a single transaction or arrangement you convey or propagate by procuring conveyance of a covered work and grant a patent license to some of the parties receiving the covered work authoriz ing them to use propagate modify or convey a specific copy of the covered work then the patent license you grant is automatically extended to all recip ients of the covered work and works based on it A patent license is disc
176. anybody can edit is an example of such a server A Massive Multi author Collaboration or MMC contained in the site means any set of copyrightable works thus published on the MMC site CC BY SA means the Creative Commons Attribution Share Alike 3 0 li cense published by Creative Commons Corporation a not for profit corpora tion with a principal place of business in San Francisco California as well as future copyleft versions of that license published by that same organization Incorporate means to publish or republish a Document in whole or in part as part of another Document An MMC is eligible for relicensing if it is licensed under this License and if all works that were first published under this License somewhere other than this MMC and subsequently incorporated in whole or in part into the MMC 1 had no cover texts or invariant sections and 2 were thus incorporated prior to November 1 2008 The operator of an MMC Site may republish an MMC contained in the site under CC BY SA on the same site at any time before August 1 2009 pro vided the MMC is eligible for relicensing ADDENDUM How to use this License for your documents To use this License in a document you have written include a copy of the License in the document and put the following copyright and license notices just after the title page Copyright C YEAR YOUR NAME Permission is granted to copy dis tribute and or modify this document under the t
177. are but magnitude can be given as an optional parameter stackrel Takes two arguments and stacks the first on top of the second subparagraph Starts a new subparagraph See Document Structure subsection Starts a new subsection See Document Structure subsubsection Starts a new sub subsection See Document Structure 45 19 T tableofcontents 61 Chapter 12 on page 95 62 Chapter 12 on page 95 63 Chapter 12 on page 95 64 Chapter 13 7 on page 118 65 Chapter 6 1 4 on page 34 66 Chapter 6 1 4 on page 34 67 Chapter 6 1 4 on page 34 357 Command Glossary Inserts a table of contents based on section headings at the point where the command appears telephone In the letter class specifies the sender s telephone number TeX Prints TeX logo See Formatting textbf Sets bold font style See Formatting textcolor Creates colored text See Entering colored text Mextit Sets italic font style See Formatting textmd Sets medium weight of a font See Formatting textnormal Sets normal font See Formatting textrm Sets roman font family See Formatting textsc Sets font style to small caps See Formatting gt textsf Sets sans serif font family See Formatting textsl Sets slanted font style See Formatting texttt Sets typewriter font family See Formatting 68 Chapter 12 on page 95 69 Chapter 12 on page 95 70 Chapter 27 2 on pag
178. are some document classes that can be used with LaTeX Document Classes article for articles in scientific journals presenta tions short reports program documentation invitations IEEEtran for articles with the IEEE Transactions for mat proc a class for proceedings based on the article class minimal is as small as it can get It only sets a page size and a base font It is mainly used for debugging purposes report for longer reports containing several chapters small books thesis book for real books slides for slides The class uses big sans serif let ters memoir for changing sensibly the output of the document It is based on the book class but you can create any kind of document with it http www ctan org tex archive macros latex contrib memoir memman p f letter for writing letters beamer for writing presentations see LaTeX Presen tations The most common options for the standard document classes are listed in the following table Document Class Options 10pt 11pt 12pt Sets the size of the main font in the document If no option is specified 10pt is assumed a4paper letterpaper Defines the paper size The default size is letterpaper However many European distributions of TeX now come pre set for A4 not Letter and this is also true of all distribu tions of pdfLaTeX Besides that a5paper b5paper executivepaper and leg
179. ations then as a consequence you may not convey it at all For example if you agree to terms that obligate you to collect a royalty for further conveying from those to whom you convey the Program the only way you could satisfy both those terms and this License would be to refrain entirely from conveying the Program 13 Use with the GNU Affero General Public License Notwithstanding any other provision of this License you have permission to link or combine any covered work with a work licensed under version 3 of the GNU Affero General Public License into a single combined work and to convey the resulting work The terms of this License will continue to apply to the part which is the covered work but the special requirements of the GNU Affero General Public License section 13 concerning interaction through a network will apply to the combination as such 14 Revised Versions of this License The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and or new versions of the GNU General Public License from time to time Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns Each version is given a distinguishing version number If the Program speci fies that a certain numbered version of the GNU General Public License or any later version applies to it you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that numbered version or of any later version pub
180. ay simply want finer control over the delimiter sizes In this case the big Big bigg and Bigg modifier commands may be used MT big Big bigg Bigg Di 13 10 Matrices and arrays A basic matrix may be created using the mat rix environment in common with other table like structures entries are specified by row with columns separated using an ampersand amp and a new rows separated with a double backslash NE begin matrix a amp b amp c NN d amp e amp NN g amp he amp i end matrix RA D0 m s 6 To specify alignment of columns in the table use starred version 25 requires the amsmath package 26 requires the mathtools package 124 Matrices and arrays begin matrix 1 amp 3 26 4 end matrix begin matrix r 1 amp 3 2 amp 4 Nend matrixx The alignment by default is c but it can be any column type valid in array environment However matrices are usually enclosed in delimiters of some kind and while it is possible to use the left and right commands there are various other predefined environments which automatically include delimiters Environment name Surrounding delimiter Notes pmatri ya centers columns by default pmatrixx allows to specify alignment of columns in optional param eter bmat rix centers columns by default bmatri
181. aying the docu ment unicode false true allows to use characters of non Latin based languages in Acrobat s bookmarks pdfborder RadiusH RadiusV Width Dash Pattern set the style of the border around a link The first two parameters RadiusH Ra diusV have no effect in most pdf viewers Width defines the thickness of the border Dash Pattern is a series of numbers separated by space and enclosed by box brackets It is an optional parameter to specify the length of each line amp gap in the dash pat tern For example 0 0 0 5 3 3 is supposed to draw a square box no rounded corners of width 0 5 and a dash pattern with a dash of length 3 followed by a gap of length 3 There is no unifor mity in whether how different pdf viewers render the dash pattern pdftoolbar true false show or hide Acrobat s tool bar pdfmenubar true false show or hide Acrobat s menu 4 http www tug org applications hyperref manual html x1 120003 8 232 Customization variable values comment pdffitwindow true false resize document window to fit document size odfstartview FitH FitV etc fit the width of the page to the window pdftitle text define the title that gets dis played in the Document Info window of Acrobat pdfauthor the name of the PDF s author it works like the one above pdfsu
182. be listed at the beginning of a paper or report in a List of Tables or a List of Figures section by using the listoftables or listof1 figures commands respectively The caption used for each figure will appear in these lists along with the figure numbers and page numbers that they appear on The caption command also has an optional parameter caption short long which is used for the List of Tables or List of Figures Typically the short description is for the caption listing and the 1ong description will be placed beside the figure or table This is particularly useful if the caption is long and only a one liner is desired in the figure table listing Here is an example of this usage 206 Captions List of Figures Ndocumentclass 12pt article 1 Close up of Hemidactylus ep 1 usepackage graphicx 1 Introduction begin document listoffigures section Introduction begin figure hb centering includegraphics width 4in gecko caption Close up of textit Hemidactylus Close up of textit Hemidactylus sp wh part the genus of the gecko family It is ES E Ea SE most speciose genus in the family Figure 1 Close up of Hemidactylus sp which is part the genus of the gecko end figure family It is the second most speciose genus in the family end document Figure 57 24 2 2 Side captions It is sometimes desirable to have a caption appear on the side of a float rather th
183. before then the bash script ps2svg sh can be used as all the software used by this script is multiplatform this is also possible in Windows a step by step guide could be written One can also use dvisvgm an open source utility that converts from DVI to SVG 38 6 Convert to plain text If you are thinking of converting to plain text for spell checking or to count words there may be an easier way read Tips and Tricks first Most LaTeX distributions come with det ex program which strips LaTeX commands It can handle multi file projects so all you need is to give one command detex yourfile note the omission of tex extension This will output result to standard output If you want the plain text go to a file use detex yourfile yourfile txt If the output from detex does not satisfy you you can try a newer version available on Google Code or use HTML conversion first and then copy text from your browser 15 http www imagemagick org 16 http optipng sourceforge net 17 http www cityinthesky co uk pdf2svg html 18 http en wikipedia org wiki Wikipedia WikiProject Electronics Ps2svg sh 19 http dvisvgm sourceforge net 20 Chapter 36 6 on page 298 2 http code google com p opendetex 313 39 Internationalization When you write documents in languages other than English areas where LaTeX has to be configured appropriately 1 LaTeX needs to know how to hyphenate the
184. beginning of the main matter chapter 1 Another solution is to use pagenumbering alph before the command maketitle which will give the title page the label page a Since the page number is suppressed it won t make a difference to the output By changing the page numbering every time before the counter is reset each page gets a unique name In this case the pages would be numbered a b c i ii iii iv v 1 2 3 4 5 If you don t want the page numbers to be visible for example during the front matter part use pagestyle empty pagestyle plain The important point is that although the numbers are not visible each page will have a unique name Another more flexible approach is to set the counter to something negative setcounter page 100 titlepage other front matter pagenumbering roman de is Ii3 We table of contents table of figures pagenumbering arabic 1 2 3 4 beginning of the main matter chapter 1 which will give the first pages a unique negative number The problem can also occur with the a1gorithms package because each algorithm uses the same line numbering scheme the line identifiers for the second and follow on algorithms will be duplicates of the first The problem occurs with equation identifiers if you use nonumber on every line of an eqnarray environment In this case use the ed form instead e g begin eqnarray Nend eqnarrayx which is an u
185. bject text subject of the document it works like the one above odfcreator text creator of the document it works like the one above pdfproducer text producer of the document it works like the one above pdfkeywords text list of keywords separated by brackets example below pdi fnewwindow true false define if a new window should get opened when a link leads out of the current document pa gebackref false true activate back references in side bibliography Must be specified as part of the usepa ckage statement co lorlinks false true surround the links by color frames false or colors the text of the links true The color of these links can be configured using the follow ing options default colors are shown hi delinks hide links removing color and border li nkcolor red color of internal links sec tions pages etc li nktoc none section page al defines which part of an entry in the table of contents is made into a link Cur tecolor green color of citation links bibli ography fi lecolor magenta color of file links 5 Other possible values are defined in the hyperref manual http mirror switch ch ftp mirror tex macros latex contrib hyperref doc manual html TBL 7 40 1 233 Hyperlinks
186. blocks setbeamertemplate blocks rounded shadow true setbeamertemplate background canvas vertical shading bottom white top structure fg 25 setbeamertemplate sidebar canvas left horizontal shading left white 40 black right black 221 Presentations You can also suppress the navigation bar beamertemplatenavigationsymbolsempty Fonts You may also change the fonts for particular elements If you wanted the title of the presentation as rendered by frame titlepage to occur in a serif font instead of the default sanserif you would use setbeamerfont title family rm You could take this a step further if you are using OpenType fonts with Xe La TeX and specify a serif font with increased size and oldstyle proportional alternate number glyphs setbeamerfont title family rm addfontfeatures Scale 1 18 Numbers Lining Proportional Math Fonts The default settings for beamer use a different set of math fonts than one would expect from creating a simple math article One quick fix for this is to use at the beginning of the file the option mathserif Ndocumentclass mathserif beamer Others have proposed to use the command Nusefonttheme onlymath serif but it is not clear if this works for absolutely every math character 25 1 4 Frames Options The plain option Sometimes you need to include a large figure or a large table and you don t want to have the bottom and the top of the sl
187. box but instead of a width argument it takes a tag During compilation it bookkeeps which eqmakebox with a certain tag contains the widest text and can stretch all eqmakeboxes with the same tag to that width Combined with the array package one can define a column specifier that justifies the text in all lines See the documentation of the eqparbox package for more details newsavebox tstretchbox newcolumntype S 1 gt begin lrbox tstretchbox 1 lt end lrbox eqmakebox 1 s unhcopy tstretchbox 83 Tables 10 2 5 Other environments inside tables If you use some LaTeX environments inside table cells like verbat im or enumerate begin tabular c c hline begin verbatim code end verbatim amp description hline end tabular you might encounter errors similar to L2 LaTeX Error Something s wrong perhaps a missing item To solve this problem change column specifier to paragraph p m or b begin tabular m 5cm c 10 2 6 Defining multiple columns It is possible to define many identical columns at once using the num str syntax This is particularly useful when your table has many columns Here is a table with six centered columns flanked by a single column on each side begin tabular l 6 c r Team amp P amp W amp D amp L amp F amp AE Pts NN hline Manchester United 6 46 0 2 amp 10 amp 5 amp 12 AN
188. brackets is the number of the page onto which the offending line was printed The codes separated by slashes are the typeface and font style and size used in the line Ignore them for the moment This comes up if you force a linebreak e g and have a return before it Normally TeX ignores linebreaks providing full paragraphs to ragged text In this case 1t is necessary to pull the linebreak up one line to the end of the previous sentence 7 3 6 Overfull hbox 101 Overfull Mhbox 9 11617pt too wide in paragraph at lines 860 861 NLYl brm m n 10 Windows LY1 brm m it 10 see LY1 brm m n 10 X Win An overfull hbox means that there is a hyphenation or justification problem moving the last word on the line to the next line would make the spaces in the line wider than the current limit keeping the word on the line would make the spaces smaller than the current limit so the word is left on the line but with the minimum allowed space between words and which makes the line go over the edge The warning is given so that you can find the line in the code that originates the problem in this case 860 861 and fix it The line on this example is too long by a shade over 9pt The chosen hyphenation point which minimizes the error is shown at the end of the line Win Line numbers and page numbers are given as before In this case 9pt is too much to ignore over 3mm and a manual correction needs making such as a change to the hyphenat
189. but the compiler will inform you printing on the screen at the end of the compilation LaTeX Warning Label s may have changed Rerun to get cross references right Using the command pageref you can help the reader to find the referenced object by providing also the page number where it can be found You could write something like See figure ref fig test on page pageref fig test 151 Labels and Cross referencing Since you can use exactly the same commands to reference almost anything you might get a bit confused after you have introduced a lot of references It is common practice among LaTeX users to add a few letters to the label to describe what you are referencing Here is an example chap chapter sec section fig figure tab table eq equation lst code listing Following this convention the label of a figure will look like label fig my_figure ete You are not obligated to use these prefixes You can use any string as argument of label but these prefixes become increasingly useful as your document grows in size Another suggestion try to avoid using numbers within labels You are better off describing what the object is about This way if you change the order of the objects you will not have to rename all your labels and their references If you want to be able to see the markers you are using in the output document as well you can use the showkeys package this can
190. cal BibTeX editor JabRef and a file server for the PDF files of publications in the data base The usage of three different tools for one task is rather challenging for infrequent users and users that are not familiar with these tools Furthermore the file server can be only accessed by local users Therefore we consider to implement an integrated server solution like WIKINDX http wikindx sourceforge net Aigaion http www aigalon nl or refBASE http refbase sourceforge net Using this solution only requires a computer with internet access and a web browser which makes the usage of our data base considerably easier for infrequent users Moreover the stored PDF files are available not only from within the department but throughout the world Depending on the copy rights of the stored PDF files the access to the server or least the access to the PDF files has to be restricted to members of the department Even Non LaTeX users of our department might benefit from a server based solution because it should be easier to use this bibliographic data base in other word processing software packages because these servers provide the data not only in BibTeX format but also in other formats All readers are encouraged to contribute to this wikibook by adding further hints or ideas or by providing further solutions to the problem of collaborative writing of LaTeX documents 35 9 Acknowledgements Arne Henningsen thanks Francisco Rei
191. can easily create PostScript PNG JPEG etc 2 2 1 Philosophy of use Flexibility and modularity One of the most frustrating things beginners and even advanced users might encounter using LaTeX is the lack of flexibility regarding the document design and layout If you want to design your document in a very specific way you may have trouble accomplishing this Keep in mind that LaTeX does the formatting for you and mostly the right way If it is not exactly what you desired then the LaTeX way is at least not worse if not better One way to look at it is that LaTeX is a bundle of macros for TeX that aims to carry out everything regarding document formatting so that the writer only needs to care about content If you really want flexibility use plain TeX instead One solution to this dilemma is to make use of the modular possibilities of LaTeX You can build your own macros or use macros developed by others You are likely not the first person to face some particular formatting problem and someone who encountered a similar problem before may have published their solution as a package CTAN is a good place to find many resources regarding TeX and derivative packages It is the first place where you should begin searching Questions and documentation Besides internet resources being plentiful the best documentation source remains the official manual for every specific package and the reference documentation i e the TeXbook by D Knuth a
192. capabilities http sarovar org projects pstricks PDFScreen create LaTeX PDF files that have navigation buttons used for presentations http sarovar org projects pdfscreen David Bausum s list of TeX primitives these are the fundamental commands used in TeX http www tug org utilities plain cseq html Leslie Lamport s manual for the commands that are unique to LaTeX commands not used in plain TeX http www tex uniyar ac ru doc latex2e pdf The UK TeX FAQ List of questions and answers that are frequently posted at comp text tex http www tex ac uk faq TeX on Mac OS X Guide to using TeX and LaTeX on a Mac http www rna nl tex html Text Processing using LaTeX http www h eng cam ac uk help tpl textprocessing The La TeX encyclopaedia http tex loria fr index html Hypertext Help with LaTeX http www giss nasa gov latex EpsLatex a very comprehensive guide to images figures and graphics http www ctan org tex archive info epslatex pdf The Comprehensive LaTeX Symbol List in PDF http www ctan org tex archive info symbols comprehensive symbols a4 pdf Getting to Grips with LaTeX HTML Collection of Latex tutorials taking you from the very basics towards more advanced topics http www andy roberts net misc latex index html Chapter 8 about typesetting mathematics of the LaTeX companion http www macrotex net texbooks latexcomp ch8 pdf 46 0 3 Reference e LaTeX Project Site The Comprehensive TeX Archiv
193. ce type in the form of t ype BibTeX knows of practically all types you can think of common ones are book article and for papers presented at conferences there is inproceedings In this example I have referred to an article within a journal After the type you must have a left curly brace to signify the beginning of the reference attributes The first one follows immediately after the brace which is the citation key or the BibTeX key This key must be unique for all entries in your bibliography It is this identifier that you will use within your document to cross reference it to this entry It is up to you as to how you wish to label each reference but there is a loose standard in which you use the author s surname followed by the year of publication This is the scheme that I use in this tutorial Next it should be clear that what follows are the relevant fields and data for that particular reference The field names on the left are BibTeX keywords They are followed by an equals sign where the value for that field is then placed BibTeX expects you to explicitly label the beginning and end of each value I personally use quotation marks however you also have the option of using curly braces But as you will soon see curly braces have other roles within attributes so I prefer not to use them for this job as they can get more confusing A notable exception is when you want to use characters with umlauts ii
194. ced 20Mathematics 23Custom Fractions and Binomials NE k ntl n 2 Kk n 2 k n 1 kn 1 n k Kn 1 An underscore _ can be used with a vertical bar to denote evaluation using subscript notation in mathematics vt f n n 5 4n 2 2 _ n 17 f n n 4n 2 17 13 6 Fractions and Binomials A fraction is created using the frac numerator denominator command for those who need their memories refreshed that s the top and bottom respectively Likewise the binomial coefficient aka the Choose function may be written using the binom command NE frac n k n k binom n k It is also possible to use the choose command without the amsmath package NE frac n k n k n choose k n n kl n k i You can embed fractions within fractions 12 http en wikipedia org wiki Binomial 20coefficient 13 requires the amsmath package 115 Mathematics NE frac frac 1 x frac l y lt gt y z Note that when appearing inside another fraction or in inline text 7 a fraction is noticeably smaller than in displayed mathematics The tfrac and dfrac commands force the use of the respective styles textstyle and displaystyle Similarly the tbinom and dbinom commands typeset the binomial coefficient Another way to write fractions is to use the over command without the amsmath package NE n over k n k n choose k
195. ciYann ser Scorwin ser ser ser ser Silca678 ser SiriusB ser ser ser ser Snoopy67 ser Spelemann ser ser ser ser ser ser ser Sabalka SamuelLB Sandman10000 Sandrobt Sargas Schaber Scientific29 Scruss Semperos Sgenier Shahbaz_Youssefi Simeon Sjlegg Skarakoleva Skou Snaxe920 Spag85 Spirosdenaxas 381 Contributors 1 Spook 3 Stephan Schneider 1 SteveM8237 1 StevenJohnston 7 Stoettner 1 Stuples Sue 1 Swift 1 TFTD 9 1 TWiStErRob Tauriel 1 1 Tdomhan Teles384 1 Tgwizard 9 5 Thefrankinator 13 Thenub314 2 Thietkeweb388 2 TinyTimZamboni 1 Tom Morris 3 Tom marcik 76 Tomato86 6 Tomxlawson 9 TomyDuby 2 Topodelapradera 1 TorfusPolymorphus 372 http en wikibooks org w index php 373 http en wikibooks org w index php 374 http en wikibooks org w index php 375 http en wikibooks org w index php 376 http en wikibooks org w index php 37 http en wikibooks org w index php 378 http en wikibooks org w index php 379 http en wikibooks org w index php 380 http en wikibooks org w index php 381 http en wikibooks org w index php 382 http en wikibooks org w index php 383 http en wikibooks org w index php 384 http en wikibooks org w index php 385 http en wikibooks org w index php 386 http en wikibooks org w index php
196. cial page for floats only Override internal parameters LaTeX uses for determining good float positions H Places the float at precisely the location in the LaTeX code Requires the float pack age e g usepackage float This is somewhat equivalent to h 0 oet What you do with these placement permissions is to list which of the options you wish to make available to LaTeX These are simply possibilities and LaTeX will decide when typesetting your document which of your supplied specifiers it thinks is best Use listoffigures to add a list of the figures in the beginning of the doc ument To change the name used in the caption from Figure to Example use renewcommand figurename Example in the figure contents 24 1 2 Figures with borders It s possible to get a thin border around all figures You have to write the following once at the beginning of the document usepackage float floatstyle boxed restylefloat figure The border will not include the caption 24 1 3 Tables Although tables have already been covered it was only the internal syntax that was discussed The tabular environment that was used to construct the tables is not a float by default Therefore for tables you wish to float wrap the tabular environment within a table environment like this 3 http www ctan org tex archive macros latex contrib float 4 Chapter 10 on page 77 204 Captions be
197. cific to Korean and provide Korean localization on top of the font support They both can process Korean input text files encoded in EUC KR HLATEX can even process input files encoded in CP949 Windows 949 UHC and UTF 8 when used along with A O The CJK package is not specific to Korean It can process input files in UTF 8 as well as in various CJK encodings including EUC KR and CP949 Windows 949 UHC it can be used to typeset documents with multilingual content especially Chinese Japanese and Korean The CJK package has no Korean localization such as the one offered by HLATEX and it does not come with as many special Korean fonts as HLATEX 3 The ultimate purpose of using typesetting programs like TEX and LATEX is to get documents typeset in an aesthetically satisfying way Arguably the most important element in typesetting is a set of welldesigned fonts The HLATEX distribution includes UHC PostScript fonts of 10 different families and Munhwabu fonts TrueType of 5 different families The CJK package works with a set of fonts used by earlier versions of HLATEX and it can use Bitstream s cyberbit True Type font To use the HLATEX package for typesetting your Korean text put the following declaration into the preamble of your document usepackage hangul This command turns the Korean localization on The headings of chapters sections subsections table of content and table of figures are all translated into Korean and the formatting of th
198. citation is quite common in scientific writing In other disciplines the author year style e g Roberts 2003 such as Harvard is preferred and is in fact becoming increasingly common within scientific publications A discussion about which is best will not occur here but a possible way to get such an output is by the nat bib package In fact it can supersede LaTeX s own citation commands as Natbib allows the user to easily switch between Harvard or numeric The first job is to add the following to your preamble in order to get LaTeX to use the Natbib package usepackage options natbib Also you need to change the bibliography style file to be used so edit the appropriate line at the bottom of the file so that it reads bibliographystyle plainnat Once done it is basically a matter of altering the existing cite commands to display the type of citation you want Natbib compatible styles Style Source Description 53 Bibliography Management Natbib compatible styles Style Source Description plainnat Provided natbib compatible version of plain abbrvnat Provided natbib compatible version of abbrv unsrtnat Provided natbib compatible version of unsrt apsrev REVTeX 4 home page natbib compatible style for Physical Review journals rmpaps REVTeX 4 home page natbib compatible style for Review of Modern Physics jou
199. collaborative preparation of LaTeX docu ments The presented solution is primarily based on the version control system Subversion http subversion apache org The Wikibook describes how Subversion can be used together with several other software tools and LaTeX packages to organise the collaborative preparation of LaTeX documents 35 1 1 Other Methods Online LaTeX editor LIMSUP allowing real time collaboration of LaTeX documents The online LaTeX editor ScribTeX makes sharing your document with others very easy It provides a full LaTeX environment with all the usual features of LaTeX like bibtex images and custom style files It also provides full version histories of your files essential for collaborating The free account allows only 3 projects and only one collaborator per project ShareLaTeX com is a new cloud based LaTeX editor designed to making working collaboratively as easy as possible With real time collaborative editing similar to google documents it is currently in public beta writelatex com is like EtherPad for LaTeX Start writing with one click and share the link It supports real time preview figures bibliographies and custom styles Currently in beta publications li is a real time collaborative LaTeX editor Verbosus is a professional Online LaTeX Editor that supports collaboration with other users and is free to use Merge conflicts can easily resolved by using a built in merge tool that uses an implementation
200. countries other activities as well To convey a work means any kind of propagation that enables other parties to make or receive copies Mere interaction with a user through a computer network with no transfer of a copy is not conveying An interactive user interface displays Appropriate Legal Notices to the ex tent that it includes a convenient and prominently visible feature that 1 dis plays an appropriate copyright notice and 2 tells the user that there is no warranty for the work except to the extent that warranties are provided that licensees may convey the work under this License and how to view a copy of this License If the interface presents a list of user commands or options such as a menu a prominent item in the list meets this criterion 1 Source Code The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for mak ing modifications to it Object code means any non source form of a work A Standard Interface means an interface that either is an official standard defined by a recognized standards body or in the case of interfaces speci fied for a particular programming language one that is widely used among developers working in that language The System Libraries of an executable work include anything other than the work as a whole that a is included in the normal form of packaging a Major Component but which is not part of that Major Component and b serves only to enable use
201. cussion of LaTeX and TEX strategies for graphics and fonts can be found in TEX Unbound The last but certainly not least is the PGF TIKZ system While the previous systems picture epic pstricks or metapost focus on the how to draw TikZ focuses more on the what to draw One could say that TikZ is to drawing in LaTeX as LaTeX is to digital typesetting It s recommended to use it if your LaTeX distribution includes it 23 2 Alternatives In many cases especially for more advanced diagrams it may be easier to draw the graphics using external vector graphics software and then import the file into the document see Importing Graphics However most software does not support LaTeX fonts or mathematical notation which can result in not suitable and inconsistent graphics There are several solutions to this problem The easiest solution is to use the picture environment and then simply use the put command to put a graphics file inside the picture along with any other desired LaTeX element For example setlength unitlength 0 8cm begin picture 6 5 put 3 5 0 4 Ndisplaystyle s frac atbt c 2 put 1 1 Nincludegraphics width 2cm height 2cm picture eps end picture Figure 55 6 http en wikipedia org wiki MetaPost 7 http en wikipedia org wiki METAFONT 8 Chapter 22 on page 183 200 Alternatives Note that the border around the picture in the above example was added by using 1 box
202. d blackandwhite true input test tex First the command blackandwhite gets defined and then the actual file is read with input By setting blackandwhite to false the color version of the document would be produced 34 4 Creating your own package If you define a lot of new environments and commands the preamble of your document will get quite long In this situation it is a good idea to create a LaTeX package containing all your command and environment definitions You can then use the Nusepackage command to make the package available in your document Writing a package basically consists of copying the contents of your document preamble into a separate file with a name ending in sty It is very simple just follow the steps 1 create a simple text file called mypack sty or any other name you like and open it with any text editor 2 at the very beginning of the text document just write XProvidesPackage mypack note 1t has to have the same name of the file without the extension It tells LaTeX the name of the package and will allow it to issue a sensible error message when you try to include a package twice 3 write whatever you want in it using all the LaTeX commands you know Normally you should define new commands or import other packages 4 import your new package with the known command Nusepackage mypack 276 Creating your own style 5 or XRequirePackage mypack the file mypack sty and the LaTeX so
203. d francais for Parisian French and acadian and canadien for new world French All enable French hyphenation if you have configured your LaTeX system accordingly All of these also change all automatic text into French chapter prints Chapitre today prints the current date in French and so on A set of new commands also becomes available which allows you to write French input files more easily Check out the following table for inspiration input code rendered output og guillemets fg guillemets M up me D up r MI Dr l ier l iere l1 ieres Jk ES E 2 ieme 4 iemes DEAS No 1 no 2 N 1 n 2 20 Ndegres C 45 degres 20 C 45 M bsc Durand M Durand nombre 1234 56789 1 234 567 89 OE uvre or OE uvre and oe uvre et uvre uvre re c coivent or re c c oivent re oivent h ro isme h ro sme 11 Chapter 39 4 16 on page 328 320 Hyphenating languages You will also notice that the layout of lists changes when switching to the French language For more information on what the french option of babel does and how you can customize its behavior run LaTeX on file frenchb dtx and read the produced file frenchb pdf or frenchb dvi 39 4 7 German You can load German language support using either one of the two following commands For old German orthography use Nusepackage german babel or for new German orthography use Nusepackage nger
204. d your document as twosided the alignment can also be i for inside or o for outside as well as J or O The width is of course the width of the figure An example Gulls are birds in the family Laridae They are most closely related to in wr fi r r x xtwi h the terns family Sternidae auks and skimmers and more distantly to the beg ap gu e xit 0 S te t dth waders Most gulls belong to the large genus Larus begin center They are in general medium to includegraphics width 0 48 textwidth gu large birds typically grey or white often th black kings on the end center n with black mar n th head or wings Th re stout caption A gull longish bills and web end wrapfigure Most gulls par Larus species are ground nesting carni vores which will take live food or scavenge opportunistically The live food often ineludes crabs and small fish Apart from the kittiwakes gulls are typically coastal or inland rarely ventu ar out to je species take up attain full adult plurnage but two years is typical for Figure 1 A gull small gulls Gulls the larger species in particular are resourceful and highly intelligent birds demonstrating complex methods of communication and a highly developed social structure Certain species e g the Herring Gull have exhibited tool Figure 59 8 http en wikibooks org wiki LaTeX Packages Installing Extra Packages 208 Captions Note that we hav
205. degraphics Inserts an image Requires graphicx package includeonly indent input Used to read in LaTex files For more see LaTex Basics it Italicizes the text which is inside curly braces with the command Such as it This is in italics em is generally preferred since this allows nesting item Creates an item in a list Used in list structures 45 11 K Will 45 12 L Mabel Used to create label which can be later referenced with ref See Labels and Cross referencing Marge Sets font size See Formatting 24 Chapter 12 on page 95 25 Chapter 5 4 2 on page 29 26 Chapter 22 1 9 on page 195 27 Chapter 5 4 2 on page 29 28 Chapter 12 on page 95 29 Chapter 15 on page 151 30 Chapter 12 on page 95 351 Command Glossary Large Sets font size See Formatting LARGE Sets font size See Formatting LaTeX Prints LaTeX logo See Formatting LaTeXe Prints current LaTeX version logo See Formatting ldots Prints sequence of three dots See Formatting Meft lefteqn line linebreak Suggests LaTeX to break line in this place See Page Layout linethickness linewidth listoffigures Inserts a list of the figures in the document Similar to TOC listoftables Inserts a list of the tables in the document Similar to TOC location 45 13 M makebox 31 Chapter 12 on page 95 32 Chapter 12 on page 95 33 Chapter 12 on page 95 34 Chapter 12 on page 95 35 Chapter
206. degraphics height 80mm Abb bluesniper jpg caption Selbstgebaute Bluesniper um Bluetooth Ger te aus ber 1 km Entfernung anzugreifen Stand 2004 Mabel bluesniper end wrapfigure Placement There are overall eight possible positioning targets r R right side of the text l L left side of the text i I inside edge near the binding in a twoside document 36 Chapter 24 on page 203 192 The graphicx package o O outside edge far from the binding The uppercase character allows the figure to float while the lowercase version means exactly here 37 22 1 9 Including full PDF pages There is a great package for including full pages of PDF files pdfpages It is capable of inserting full pages as is and more pages per one page in any layout e g 2x3 Package Options Nusepackage options pdfpages Options final Inserts pages This is the default draft Does not insert pages but prints a box and the filename instead enable survey Activates survey functionalities experimental subject to change Commands includepdf includepdf key val filename Options for key val A comma separated list of options using the key value syntax 37 http ftp univie ac at packages tex macros latex contrib wrapfig wrapfig doc pdf 38 http www ctan org tex archive macros latex contrib pdfpages 193 Importing Graphics pages Sel
207. depending on your settings To fix this you need to use the option breaklinks when first declaring usepackage breaklinks hyperref This will then cause the links in the listoffigures to word wrap properly Chapter 24 2 3 on page 207 http www ctan org tex archive macros latex contrib hyperref README http www ctan org tex archive macros latex contrib oberdiek hypcap pdf Chapter 24 2 4 on page 208 m M Di N o 238 Problems with already existing toc lof and similar files 26 9 Problems with already existing toc lof and similar files The format of some of the auxilliary files generated by latex changes when you include the hyperref package One can therefore encounter errors like Argument of Hy setref link has an extra when the document is typeset with hyperref for the first time and these files already exist The solution to the problem is to delete all the files that latex uses to get references right and typeset again 26 10 Problems with footnotes and special characters See the relevant section 26 11 Problems with Beamer Using the command hyperref some_label some text is broken when pointed at a label Instead of sending the user to the desired label upon clicking the user will be sent to the first frame A simple work around exists instead of using phantomsect Lon label some_label to label your frames use hypertarget some_label and reference it with hyp
208. dex entries in the left margin of the text This is quite useful for proofread ing a document and verifying the index For more information see the Indexing section subfiles the root and child document can be compiled at the same time without making changes to the child document For more in formation see the Subfile package section subfig it allows to define multiple floats figures tables within one environment giving individ ual captions and labels in the form 1a 1b syntonly if you add the following code in your pream ble usepackage syntonly syntaxonly LaTeX skims through your document only checking for proper syntax and usage of the commands but doesn t produce any DVI or PDF output As LaTeX runs faster in this mode you may save yourself valuable time If you want to get the output you can simply comment out the second line textcomp provides extra symbols e g arrows like textrightarrow various cur rencies 1texteuro things like textcelsius and many other theorem you can change the style of newly defined theorems For more information see the Theo rems section todonotes lets you insert notes of stuff to do with the syntax todo Add details siunitx helps you typeset of SI units correctly For example SI 12 mega hertz Auto matically handles the correct spacing between the number and the unit Note that even non SI
209. difications This considerably increases the effort to find and review the effective modifications Therefore ineffective modifications should be avoided In this sense it is very important not to change the positions of line breaks without cause Hence automatic line wrapping of the users LaTeX editors should be turned off and line breaks should be added manually Otherwise if a single word in the beginning of a paragraph is added or removed all line breaks of this paragraph might change so that most diff tools indicate the en tire paragraph as modified because they compare the files line by line The diff tools wdiff http www gnu org software wdiff and dwdiff http os ghalkes nl dwdiff html are not affected by the positions of line breaks because they compare documents word by word However their output 1s less clear so that modifications are more difficult to track Moreover these tools cannot be used directly with the Subversion command line switch diff cmd but a small wrapper script has to be used http textsnippets com posts show 1033 A reasonable convention is to add a line break after each sentence and start each new sentence in a new line Note that this has an advantage also beyond version control if you want to find a sentence in your LaTeX code that you have seen in a compiled DVI PS or PDF file or on a printout you can easily identify the first few words of this sentence and screen for these words on the
210. ding on page number takes two passes 31 2 Display gotchas NOTE Many DVI viewers do not support rotating of text and tables The text will be displayed normally You must convert your DVI file to a PDF document and view it in a PDF viewer to see the rotation in effect Take care however that printing from those PDF files may rotate the respective page again in the same direction under certain circumstances This behaviour can be influenced by the settings of your dvi2pdf converter look at your manual for further information This is included in the Ubuntu texlive latex recommended package 1 http en wikibooks org wiki Ubuntu 264 32 Advanced Topics Here are some topics that are not really necessary to write a proper document but could help you making your life easier and giving you some details to modify FORCETOC 32 1 Adding your own counters In LaTeX it is fairly easy to create new counters and even counters that reset automatically when another counter is increased think subsection in a section for example With the command newcounter NameOfTheNewCounter you create a new counter that is automatically set to zero If you want the counter to be reset to zero every time another counter is increased use newcounter NameOfTheNewCounter NameOfTheOtherCounter To increase the counter either use Nstepcounter NameOfTheNewCounter or o refstepcounter NameOfTheNewCounter used for labels and cr
211. do so use the standard Unix like notation is the current directory is the previous directory etc 26 2 3 Hyperlink and Hypertarget It is also possible to create an anchor anywhere in the document with or without caption and to link to it with hyperlink label anchor caption and hypertarget label link caption 26 3 Customization The standard settings should be fine for most users but if you want to change something you can easily do it There are several variables you can change and there are two methods to pass those to the package You can pass the options as an argument of the package when you load it that s the standard way packages work or you can use the hypersetup command hypersetup optionl 2 Emaillink with hyperref url packages Retrieved 231 Hyperlinks you can pass as many options as you want separate them with a comma Options have to be in the form variable_name new_value exactly the same format has to be used if you pass those options to the package while loading it like this usepackage optionl option2 hyperref Here is a list of the possible variables you can change for the complete list see the official documen tation The default values are written in an upright font Checkout 3 8 Big list at hyperref manual at tug org variable values comment bookmarks true false show or hide the bookmarks bar when displ
212. document The verbat im environment is an environment that is already part of Latex Although not introduced so far its name is fairly intuitive Latex will reproduce everything you give it including new lines spaces etc It is good for source code but if you want to introduce a lot of code you might consider using the 1istings package that was made just for it While this is useful one should be careful when embedding the float within another float In particular the errornot in outer par mode may occur One solution might be to use the H option not any other on the inner float as this option pins the inner float to the outer one Newly created floats with newfloat can also be used in combination with the wrapfig package from above E g the following code creates a floating text box which floats in the text on the right side of the page and is complete with caption numbering an index file with the extension lob and a customization of the float s visual layout documentclass article have hyperref package before float in order to get strange errors with theHfloatbox usepackage pdftex hyperref usepackage float gallows use of before begin document makeatletter this creates a custom and simpler ruled box style newcommand floatc simplerule 2 fs cfont 1 2 par gt newcommand fs simplerule def fs cfont bfseries let fs capt floatc simplerule def fs pre hrule height 8pt depthOp
213. ds is fairly intuitive if it has head in it it affects the head etc and obviously c and r means left centre and right respectively Documents can be either one or two sided Articles are by default one sided books are two sided Two sided documents differentiate the left even and right odd pages whereas one sided do not Watch out if you provide long text in two different parts only in the footer or only in the header you might see overlapping text There are special commands you can use as arguments number of the current page Nthepage current chapter name printed like CHAP an TER 3 THIS IS THE CHAPTER TITLE 102 Page styles current section name printed like 1 6 THIS en IS THE SECTION TITLE the name chapter in the current language If Se this is English it will display Chapter current chapter number thechapter current section number thesection Note that leftmark and rightmark convert the names to uppercase whichever was the formatting of the text If you want them to print the actual name of the chapter without converting it to uppercase use the following command renewcommand chaptermark 1 markboth 1 renewcommand sectionmark 1 markright 1 now leftmark and rightmark will just print the name of the chapter and section without number and without affecting the formatting Note that these redefinitions must be inserted after the first call of pa
214. e 6 1 4 Sectioning Commands The commands for inserting sections are fairly intuitive Of course certain commands are appropriate to different document classes For example a book has chapters but an article doesn t Here is an edited version of some of the structure commands in use from simple tex section Introduction This section s content section Structure his section s content H subsection Top Matter his subsection s content H Nsubsubsection Article Information his subsubsection s content H Notice that you do not need to specify section numbers LaTeX will sort that out for you Also for sections you do not need to markup which content belongs to a given block using begin and end commands for example LaTeX provides 7 levels of depth for defining sections Command Level Comment part part 1 not in letters chapter chapter 0 only books and reports section section 1 not in letters subsection subsection 2 not in letters subsubsection subsubsection 3 not in letters paragraph paragraph 4 not in letters subparagraph subparagraph 5 not in letters All the titles of the sections are added automatically to the table of contents if you decide to insert one But if you make manual styling changes to your heading for example a very long title or some special line breaks or unusual font play this would appear in the Table of Contents a
215. e so that we only need to include the file graph tex in our document Vinput graphl tex The above steps can be automated by the package gnuplottex By placing gnuplot commands inside begin gnuplot end gnuplot and compiling with latex shell escape the graphs are created and added into your document When you are using gnuplottex it is also possible to directly pass the terminal settings as an argument to the environment begin gnuplot terminal epslatex terminaloptions color scale 0 9 linewidth 2 end gnuplot Using gnuplottex can cause fraudulent text highlighting in some editors when using algebraic functions on imported data such as 2x 1 2 Some editors will think of all following text as part of a formular and highlight 1t as such because of the that is interpreted as part of the latex code This can be avoided by ending with L end gnuplot As it uncomments the dollar sign for the gnuplot interpreter but is not affecting the interpretation of the tex by the editor When using pdfLaTeX instead of simple LaTeX we must convert the EPS image to PDF and to substitute the name in the graph1 tex file If we are working with a Unix like shell it is simply done using eps2pdf graphl eps sed i s eps pdf g graphl tex With the included tex file we can work as with an ordinary image Instead of calling eps2pdf directly we can also
216. e 241 71 Chapter 12 on page 95 72 Chapter 12 on page 95 73 Chapter 12 on page 95 74 Chapter 12 on page 95 75 Chapter 12 on page 95 76 Chapter 12 on page 95 77 Chapter 12 on page 95 78 Chapter 12 on page 95 358 textup Sets upright shape of a font See Formatting Mextwidth textheight thanks thispagestyle tiny Sets font size See Formatting Mitle today Writes current day See Formatting Mt twocolumn typeout typein 45 20 U uline Underlines text Requires ulem package See Formatting underbrace underline unitlength usebox usecounter uwave Creates wavy underline Requires ulem package See Formatting 79 Chapter 12 on page 95 80 Chapter 12 on page 95 81 Chapter 12 on page 95 82 Chapter 12 on page 95 83 Chapter 12 on page 95 359 Command Glossary 45 21 V Walue vbox text Encloses a paragraph s text to prevent it from running over a page break vdots Creates vertical dots See Mathematics Wector Werb Creates inline verbatim text See Formatting Wfill Wline vphantom vspace This page uses material from Dr Sheldon Green s Hypertext Help with LaTeX 84 Chapter 13 15 2 on page 135 85 Chapter 12 on page 95 360 46 Links w TeX w LaTeX Here are some other online resources available 46 0 1 Community The TeX Users Group Includes links to free versions of La TeX for many kinds of computer e UK TUG The UK TeX Users
217. e Network Latest La TeX related packages and software TeX Directory Structure used by many La TeX distributions e Natural Math converts natural language math formulas to LaTeX representation e Obsolete packages and commands Lamport s book LaTeX A Document Preparation System 9 http www ctan org tex archive info epslatex pdf 10 http www latex project org ll http www ctan org 12 http www tug org tds 13 http www math missouri edu stephen naturalmath 4 http www ctan org tex archive info l2tabu english l12tabuen pdf 362 46 0 4 Templates A resource for free high quality LaTeX templates for a variety of applications LaTeX template for writing PhD thesis 2007 UCL computer department thesis template UT thesis template 2006 15 16 17 18 http http http http www LaTeXTemplates com openwetware org wiki LaTeX template for PhD thesis www cs ucl ac uk research students Latexforthesis htm www cs utexas du users jbednar latex 5 363 47 Authors 47 1 Included books The following books have been included in this wikibook or we are working on it with permission of the author Andy Roberts Getting to grips with Latex Done Not So Short Introduction to LaTex2e by Tobias Oetiker Hubert Partl and Irene Hyna We have contacted the authors by email asking for permission they allowed us to use their material but they never edited directly th
218. e User PAC le User PAC2 le User Pamputt le User Pandora85 le User Panic2k4 le User PatrickGalyon le User Paxinum le User Pdelong le User PeterAllen le User Petter_Strandmark le User Pi_zero le User Piksi le User Pmillerrhodes le User Pmlineditor le User Polytropos_Technikos le User Ppadmapriya le User Prawojazdy le User Prispartlow Le User Pstar le User PsyberS le User QUBot le User Qeny le User Quaristice le User QuiteUnusual le User Qwertyus 379 Contributors 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 380 ht ht ht ht ht ht ht ht ht ht ht ht ht ht ht ht ht ht ht ht ht ht ht ht ht en en en en en en en en en en en en en en en en en en en en en en en en en wi wi wi wi wi wi wi wi wi wi wi wi wi wi wi wi wi wi wi wi wi wi wi wi wi 1 Rafaelgr 1 Rafopar 2 3 Rajkiran g 2 Ramac 1 Raphael Ackermann 1 Raylu 1 RaymondSutanto 3 Rbonvall 1 Rdgnz 4 RealSebix 7 Recent Runes 1 Redirect fixer 4 Rehoot 1 Ricordisamoa 1 Risk 6 1 Rnddim 1 Roarbakk 4 Robbiemorrison 1 Robert Borkowski 4 Robert Horning 3 Robin 1 Rosati 1 Rogerbrent 4 4 Rondenaranja
219. e a special type of column which will wrap around the text as in a normal paragraph You can pass the width using any unit supported by LaTeX such as pt and cm or command lengths such as textwidth You can find a complete list in appendix Useful Measurement Macros The optional parameter pos can be used to specify the vertical position of the table relative to the baseline of the surrounding text In most cases you will not need this option It becomes relevant only if your table is not in a paragraph of its own You can use the following letters b bottom center default t top In the first line you have pointed out how many columns you want their alignment and the vertical lines to separate them Once in the environment you have to introduce the text you want separating between cells and introducing new lines The commands you have to use are the following amp column separator NN start new row additional space may be spec ified after NN using square brackets such as 6pt hline horizontal line newline start a new line within a cell in a paragraph column cline i j partial horizontal line beginning in column i and ending in column j Note any white space inserted between these commands is purely down to ones preferences I personally add spaces between to make it easier to read 10 2 1 Basic examples This example shows how to create a simple table in La
220. e document is changed to follow Korean conventions The package also provides automatic particle selection In Korean there are pairs of post fix particles grammatically equivalent but different in form Which of any given pair is correct depends on whether the preceding syllable ends with a vowel or a consonant It is a bit more complex than this but this should give you a good picture Native Korean speakers have no problem picking the right particle but it cannot be determined which particle to use for references and other automatic text that will change while you edit the document It takes a painstaking effort to place appropriate particles manually every time you add remove 13 http jshin net faq 324 Hyphenating languages references or simply shuffle parts of your document around HLATEX relieves its users from this boring and error prone process In case you don t need Korean localization features but just want to typeset Korean text you can put the following line in the preamble instead Nusepackage hfont For more details on typesetting Korean with HLATEX refer to the HLATEX Guide Check out the web site of the Korean TEX User Group KTUG at http www ktug or kr 39 4 13 Polish If you plan to use Polish in your utf 8 encoded document use the following code Nusepackage ut 8 inputenc usepackage polski Nusepackage polish babel The above code merely allows to use polish letters and trans
221. e document structure documentclass article usepackage mathptmx begin document The first line is a comment as denoted by the sign The document class command takes an argument which in this case is article because that s the type of document we want to produce It is also possible to create your own as is often done by journal publishers who simply provide you with their own class file which tells LaTeX how to format your content But we ll be happy with the standard article class for now usepackage is an important command that tells LaTeX to utilize some external macros In this instance we specified mat hptmx which means LaTeX will use the Postscript Times type 1 font instead of the default ComputerModern font And finally the begin document This strictly isn t part of the preamble but I ll put it here anyway as it implies the end of the preamble by nature of stating that the document is now starting 6 1 2 Top Matter At the beginning of most documents there will be information about the document itself such as the title and date and also information about the authors such as name address email etc All of this type of information within LaTeX is collectively referred to as top matter Although never explicitly specified there is no topmatter command you are likely to encounter the term within LaTeX documentation A simple example documentclass 11pt a4paper oneside report begin document ti
222. e line numbers the style that is used for the line numbers the step between two line numbers If it s 1 oo oo de will be numbered numbersep 5pt how far the line numbers are from the code backgroundcolor color white choose the background color You must add dp oe 2 https code google com p dtsyntax 260 External resources usepackage color showspaces false showstringspaces false showtabs false show spaces adding particular underscores underline spaces within strings show tabs within strings adding particular de oe oe underscores frame single adds a frame around the code rulecolor color black if not set the frame color may be changed on line breaks within not black text e g commens green here tabsize 2 sets default tabsize to 2 spaces captionpos b breaklines true breakatwhitespace false at whitespace sets the caption position to bottom sets automatic line breaking sets if automatic breaks should only happen de oe oe title lstname show the filename of files included with lstinputlisting also try caption instead of title keywordstyle color blue keyword style commentstyle color dkgreen comment style stringstyle color mauve escapeinside code morekeywords x set string literal style if you want to add a comment within your oe oe 9e if you want to add more keywords to the The escapeinside line needs an explanatio
223. e specified a size for both the wrapfigure environment and the image we have included We did it in terms of the text width it is always better to use relative sizes in LaTeX let LaTeX do the work for you The wrap is slightly bigger than the picture so the compiler will not return any strange warning and you will have a small white frame between the image and the surrounding text You can change it to get a better result but if you don t keep the image smaller than the wrap you will see the image over the text The wrapfig package can also be used with user defined floats with float package See below in the section on custom floats 24 2 5 Tip for figures with too much white space It happens that you ll generate figures with too much or too little white space on the top or bottom In such a case you can simply make use of the optional argument lineheight It specifies the height of the figure in number of lines of text Also remember that the environment center adds some extra white space at its top and bottom consider using the command centering instead Another possibility is adding space within the float using the vspace command The argument is the size of the space you want to add you can use any unit you want including pt mm in etc If you provide a negative argument it will add a negative space thus removing some white space Using vspace tends to move the caption relative to the float while the lineheight ar
224. eX Lettre 2 http www ctan org tex archive macros latex contrib koma script scrguien pdf http pl wikibooks org wiki LaTeX 2FPisanie 20list F3w 4 http fr wikibooks org wiki LaTex 2FLettre Lu 182 22 Importing Graphics Strictly speaking LaTeX cannot manage pictures directly in order to introduce graphics within documents LaTeX just creates a box with the same size as the image you want to include and embeds the picture without any other processing This means you will have to take care that the images you want to include are in the right format to be included This is not such a hard task because LaTeX supports the most common picture formats around 22 1 The graphicx package As stated before LaTeX can t manage pictures directly so we will need some extra help we have to load the graphicx package in the preamble of our document usepackage graphicx This package accepts as an argument the external driver to be used to manage pictures however the latest version of this package takes care of everything by itself changing the driver according to the compiler you are using so you don t have to worry about this Still just in case you want to understand better how it works here are the possible options you can pass to the package dvips default if compiling with latex if you are compiling with latex to get a DVI and you want to see your document with a DVI or PS viewer e dvipdfm if you are compiling with
225. eak page in this place See Page Layout not 45 15 O onecolumn opening Inserts an opening phrase when using the letter class for example opening Dear Sir oval overbrace Draws a brace over the argument Can be used in displaystyle with superscript to label formulae See Advanced Mathematics Voverline Draws a line over the argument 45 16 P pagebreak Suggests LaTeX breaking page in this place See Page Layout 44 Chapter 45 7 on page 349 45 Chapter 12 on page 95 46 Chapter 12 5 on page 107 47 http en wikibooks org wiki LaTeX 2FAdvanced Mathematics 23Above and below 48 Chapter 12 5 on page 107 354 pagenumbering Defines the type of characters used for the page numbers Options arabic roman Roman alph Alph gobble invisible pageref Used to reference to number of page where a previously declared label is located See Floats Figures and Captions pagestyle See Page Layout par Starts anew paragraph paragraph Starts a new paragraph See Document Structure parbox Defines a box whose contents are created in paragraph mode See Advanced Topics parindent Normal paragraph indentation See Useful Measurement Macros parskip part Starts a new part of a book See Document Structure protect providecommand LaTeX2e See Customizing LaTeX put 45 17 R raggedbottom Command used for top justified within other environments 49 Chap
226. ects pages to insert The argument is a comma separated list containing page num bers pages 3 5 6 8 ranges of page num bers pages 4 9 or any combination To insert empty pages use E g pages 3 8 11 15 will insert page 3 an empty page and pages 8 9 10 11 and 15 Actually not only links but all kinds of PDF annotations will get lost Page ranges are specified by the following syntax m n This selects all pages from m to n Omitting m defaults to the first page omitting n defaults to the last page of the doc ument Another way to select the last page of the document is to use the keyword last This is only permitted in a page range E g pages will insert all pages of the document and pages last 1 will insert all pages in re verse order Default pages 1 angle You can use the angle option for turning the included page for exampe for turning a landscape document when the latex document is portrait E g angle 90 addtolist Adds an entry to the list of figures the list of tables or any other list e g from float sty This option requires four arguments separated by commas addtolist page number type heading page number Page number of the inserted page type Name of a floating environment fig ure table etc heading Title inserted into LoF LoT etc label Name of the label This label can be referred to with ref and pageref Like addtotoc
227. ed work in an aggregate does not cause this License to apply to the other parts of the aggregate 6 Conveying Non Source Forms You may convey a covered work in object code form under the terms of sections 4 and 5 provided that you also convey the machine readable Corre sponding Source under the terms of this License in one of these ways a Convey the object code in or embodied in a physical product including a physical distribution medium accompanied by the Corresponding Source fixed on a durable physical medium customarily used for software inter change b Convey the object code in or embodied in a physical product including a physical distribution medium accompanied by a written offer valid for at least three years and valid for as long as you offer spare parts or customer support for that product model to give anyone who possesses the object code either 1 a copy of the Corresponding Source for all the software in the product that is covered by this License on a durable physical medium customarily used for software interchange for a price no more than your rea sonable cost of physically performing this conveying of source or 2 access to copy the Corresponding Source from a network server at no charge c Convey individual copies of the object code with a copy of the written offer to provide the Corresponding Source This alternative is allowed only occa sionally and noncommercially and only if you received the objec
228. eeps all the authors names in a citation on one line to fix some hyperref problems causes overfull hboxes The main commands simply add a t for textual or p for parenthesized to the basic cite command You will also notice how Natbib by default will compress references with three or more authors to the more concise st surname et al version By adding an asterisk you can override this default and list all authors associated with that citation There are some other specialized commands that Natbib supports listed in the table here Keep in mind that for instance abbrvnat does not support citet and will automatically choose between all authors and et al The final area that I wish to cover about Natbib is customizing its citation style There is acommand called bibpunct that can be used to override the defaults and change certain settings For example I have put the following in the preamble W oibpunct 0 03 623 3162 06 The command requires six mandatory parameters 1 The symbol for the opening bracket 2 The symbol for the closing bracket 3 The symbol that appears between multiple citations 4 This argument takes a letter n numerical style e s numerical superscript style any other letter author year style 5 The punctuation to appear between the author and the year in parenthetical case only 6 The punctuation used between years in multiple citations when there is a common author e g
229. el then the last language in the option list will be active i e languageB and you can use the command selectlanguage languageA to change the active language You can also add short pieces of text in another language using the command foreignlanguage languageB Text in another language 1 http en wikibooks org wiki LaTeX 2FAccents 315 Internationalization Babel also offers various environments for entering larger pieces of text in another language begin otherlanguage languageB Text in language B This environment switches all language related definitions like the language specific names for figures tables etc to the other language Nend otherlanguage The starred version of this environment typesets the main text according to the rules of the other language but keeps the language specific string for ancillary things like figures in the main language of the document The environment hyphenrules switches only the hyphenation patterns used it can also be used to disallow hyphenation by using the language name nohyphenation The ftp ftp tex ac uk tex archive macros latex required babel babel pdf babel manual provides much more information on these and many other options 39 2 Text encoding Most of the modern computer systems allow you to input letters of national alphabets directly from the keyboard In order to handle variety of input encoding used for different groups of languages and or on di
230. elevant section mathrsfs other mathematical symbols natbib gives additional citation options and styles pdfpages This package simplifies the insertion of exter nal multi page PDF or PS documents rotating It lets you rotate any kind of object It is par ticularly useful for rotating tables For more information see the relevant section setspace Lets you change line spacing e g provides the Ndoublespacing command for mak ing double spaced documents For more infor mation see the relevant section showkeys itis very useful while writing any docu ment If you want to reference an image or a formula you have to give it a name using label and then you can recall it using ref When you compile the document these will be replaced only with numbers and you can t know which label you had used unless you take a look at the source If you have loaded the showkeys package you will see the label just next or above the relevant number in the compiled version An example of a reference to a section is Se in section I T Moreover Figure 64 This way you can easily keep track of the labels you add or use simply looking at the preview both dvi or pdf Just before the final version remove it 12 Chapter 39 on page 315 13 Chapter 30 on page 259 14 Chapter 31 on page 263 15 Chapter 34 1 on page 273 251 Packages showidx it prints out all in
231. en en en en en wi wi wi wi wi wi wi wi wi wi wi wi wi wi wi wi wi wi wi wi wi kiboo kiboo kiboo kiboo kiboo kiboo kiboo kiboo kiboo kiboo kiboo kiboo kiboo kiboo kiboo kiboo kiboo kiboo kiboo kiboo org w ind org w ind org w ind org w ind org w ind org w ind org w ind org w ind org w ind org w ind org w ind org w ind org w ind org w ind org w ind org w ind org w ind org w ind org w ind org w ind kibooks org w ind Kafe H e Be e e 10 0 9 SO g O FO OID FS IO SO CG hp hp hp hp hp hp hp hp hp hp hp hp hp hp hp hp hp hp hp hp hp tit1 tit tit tit tit tit tit tit tit tit Et titl tit tit tit1 tit tit tit titl tit EPT le User 3mta3 le User ABCD le User ATC2 le User Aadornellesf le User Abonnema le User Adam_majewski le User Adamcrume le User Adouglass le User Adrignola le User Alejo2083 le User Allenzh le User Alzahrawi le User Amamory le User Ambrevar le User Anarchyboy Le User Ans le User Arided le User Arnehe le User Arthurchy le User Asmeurer le User Astrophizz 367 Contributors Rh a EA Eech Feat A Re DD gt pa AR Rh Fa e Fa Lu Fa ra Ne Atallcostsky Atiq ur Rehman Atulyal988 4 Aurelian Radoaca Avila gas 0 Bajrangkhichi967 Bakken Bamgooly Barakafrit Basenga Bempinc Belt
232. en register it as a user managed texmf directory see http docs miktex org manual localadditions html id573803 The right place sometimes causes confusion especially if your TeX installation is old or does not conform to the TeX Directory Structure For a TDS conformant system the right place for a LaTeX sty file is a suitably named subdirectory of texmf tex latex Suitably named means sensible and meaningful and probably short For a package like paralist for example I d call the directory texmf tex latex paralist Often there is just a st y file to move but in the case of complex packages there may be more and they may belong in different locations For example new BibTeX packages or font packages will typically have several files to install This is why it is a good idea to create a sub directory for the package rather than dump the files into misc along with other unrelated stuff If there are configuration or other files read the documentation to find out if there is a special or preferred location to move them to Where to put files from packages Type Directory under texmf Description or texmf local afm fonts afm foundryltypeface Adobe Font Metrics for Type fonts bst bibtex bst packagename BibTeX style cls tex latex base Document class file dvi doc package documentation enc fonts enc Font encoding fd tex latex mfnfss Font Definition files for METAFONT fonts
233. en wikibooks org w index php ti 440 http en wikibooks org w index php ti 44 http en wikibooks org w index php ti Bjarmason 442 http en wikibooks org w index php ti 9FSDOSB8 5DOSBASDOSBO 443 http en wikibooks org w index php ti 384 A 7 D8SB9 D9 88 D8 A7 D9 86 DB 8C 441 CF ct ct ct ct ct ct ct ct ct ct ct ct ct ct ct ct ct ct ct le User Winfree le User Winniehell le User Withinfocus le User Wkdurfee le User Wmheric le User Wn202 le User Writalnaie le User Wxm29 le User Wysinwygaa le User Xania le User Xeracles le User Xnn le User Xonqnopp le User Yanuzz Le User Ypey le User Ysnikraz le User ZeroOn le User Zylorian le User Zyqqh le User C3 86var Arnfj C3 B6r C3 BO0 le User D0 9F D0 B8 DOSBASDOSBO D0 le User D8 A7 D9 85 DB 8C D8 Bl1 D8 List of Figures GFDL Gnu Free Documentation License http www gnu org licenses fdl html cc by sa 3 0 Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike 3 0 License http creativecommons org licenses by sa 3 0 cc by sa 2 5 Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike 2 5 License http creativecommons org licenses by sa 2 5 cc by sa 2 0 Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike 2 0 License http creativecommons org licenses by sa 2 0 cc by sa 1 0 Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike 1 0 License http creativecommons org licenses by sa 1 0 cc by 2 0 Creative Commons A
234. end document You get the following output Without specifying width for last column Day Min Temp Max Temp Summary Monday 11C 22C A clear day with lots of sunshine However the strong breeze w Tuesday 9C 19C Cloudy with rain across many northern regions Clear spells ac Wednesday 10C 21C Rain will still linger for the morning Conditions will improve by With width specified Day Min Temp Max Temp Summary Monday 11C 22C A clear day with lots of sunshine However the strong breeze will bring down the temperatures Tuesday 9C 19C Cloudy with rain across many northern regions Clear spells across most of Scotland and Northern Ireland but rain reach ing the far northwest Wednesday 10C 21C Rain will still linger for the morn ing Conditions will improve by early afternoon and continue throughout the evening Figure 10 Note that the first table is cropped The output is wider than the page width 10 2 4 Text justification in tables On rare occasions it might be necessary to stretch every row in a table to the natural width of its longest line for instance when one has the same text in two languages and wishes to present these next to each other with lines synching up A tabular environment helps control where lines should break but cannot justify the text which leads to ragged right edges The eqparbox package provides the command eqmakebox which is like make
235. ent Structure 6 1 5 Appendices The separate numbering of appendices is also supported by LaTeX The appendix macro can be used to indicate that following sections or chapters are to be numbered as appendices In the report or book classes this gives Nappendix chapter First Appendix For the article class use appendix section First Appendix Only use the appendix macro once for all appendices 6 1 6 Ordinary paragraphs Paragraphs of text come after section headings Simply type the text and leave a blank line between paragraphs The blank line means start a new paragraph here it does not mean you get a blank line in the typeset output For formatting paragraph indents and spacing between paragraphs refer to the Formatting section 6 1 7 Table of contents All auto numbered headings get entered in the Table of Contents ToC automatically You don t have to print a ToC but if you want to just add the command tableofcontents at the point where you want it printed usually after the Abstract or Summary Entries for the ToC are recorded each time you process your document and reproduced the next time you process it so you need to re run LaTeX one extra time to ensure that all ToC pagenumber references are correctly calculated We ve already seen how to use the optional argument to the sectioning commands to add text to the ToC which is slightly different from the one printed in the body of the document It is also
236. er 4j end document This code would process the base file but only include the content of the author s first and fourth chapters Chapter 1l texand Chapter 4 tex Importantly this alternative retains as much of the aux information as possible from the previous run so messes up your cross references much less than the makeshift suggestion above 37 2 4 Subfiles package A disadvantage of using input and include is that only the root document can be compiled and not the child documents individually The package subfiles resolves this problem In the root document the package must be loaded as usepackage subfiles 1 http ctan org tex archive macros latex contrib subfiles 304 Getting LaTeX to process multiple files Instead of using input and include child documents must be loaded as follows subfile filename The child documents must start with the following statements documentclass rootdocument tex subfiles begin document and end with end document In summary root document main tex looks like documentclass book usepackage subfiles begin document e my document content subfile chapterl 9 more of my document content end document and chapter 1 chapter1 tex looks like documentclass main tex subfiles begin document S my chapter 1 content 9 2 de a o 9 more of my chapter 1 content end document Some linux distribut
237. er dimensions using the geomet ry package the paperwidth and paperheight options can be used For example usepackage margin lin paperwidth 5 5in paperheight 8 5in geometry A quick way to eliminate the difference in position between even and odd numbered pages would be setting the values to evensidemargin and oddsidemargin to the half of odd s default setlength oddsidemargin 15 5pt setlength evensidemargin 15 5pt The value of evensidemargin is larger than oddsidemargin in the two sided default layout as one could wish to write notes on the side of the page The side for the large margin is chosen opposite to the side where pages are conjucted together 12 1 1 Top margin above Chapter The top margin above a chapter can be changed using the titlesec package Example http www ctex org documents packages layout titlesec pdf usepackage titlesec titlespacing chapter Opt 50pt 20pt titleformat chapter display normalfont huge bfseries chaptertitlename thechapter 20pt Huge The command titleformat must be used when the spacing of a chapter is changed In case of a section this command can be omitted 1 http www ctex org documents packages layout titlesec pdf 98 Page orientation 12 1 2 Page size issues If you intend to get a pdf in the end there are basically three ways TeX gt PDF TeX gt DVI gt PDF TeX gt DVI gt PS gt PDF Which are in general obtained w
238. erage is about 66 Studies have shown that it s easier to read text when there are 60 70 characters per line and it would seem that 66 is the optimal number Therefore the page margins are set to ensure that readability remains as good as possible Also white space is often left in the inner margin for the assumption that the document will be bound However those who want to read on iPads or other handheld digital devices need to create documents without the extra whitespace In order to create PDF documents with optimal handheld viewing not only must the text field and margins be adjusted so must the page size To do this use the setlength command to adjust the parameters pdfpagewidth and pdfpagelength to the appropriate dimensions If you are looking for a sensible dimension consider following the paper size used by the Supreme Court of the United States 441pt by 666pt or 6 125 inches by 9 25 inches which looks great on the iPad You could also use the Supreme Court s text field size of 297 pt by 513 pt but this is too wide for font s other than Century Schoolbook the font required by the Supreme Court If you wish to change the margins of your document there are many ways to do so e Simply use the fullpage package for somewhat standardized smaller margins around an inch usepackage fullpage For an even greater effect give 1t the cm option around 1 5cm Nusepackage cm fullpage Use the a4wide package for a page wi
239. erences in an external flat file database This database can be linked to any LaTeX document and citations made to any reference that is contained within the file This is often more convenient than embedding them at the end of every document written There is now a centralized bibliography source that can be linked to as many documents as desired write once read many Of course bibliographies can be split over as many files as one wishes so there can be a file containing references concerning General Relativity and another about Quantum Mechanics When writing about Quantum Gravity QG which tries to bridge the gap between these two theories both of these files can be linked into the document in addition to references specific to QG 9 1 Embedded system If you are writing only one or two documents and aren t planning on writing more on the same subject for a long time maybe you don t want to waste time creating a database of references you are never going to use In this case you should consider using the basic and simple bibliography support that is embedded within LaTeX LaTeX provides an environment called thebibliography that you have to use where you want the bibliography that usually means at the very end of your document just before the end document command Here is a practical example begin thebibliography 9 bibitem lamport94 Leslie Lamport emph LaTeX A Document Preparation System Addison Wesley Massachu
240. erlink some_label some text 26 12 References 11 Chapter 12 on page 95 239 27 Colors Adding colors to your text is supported by the color package Using this package you can set the color of the font of the text and set the background color of the page You can use one of the predefined colors such as white red or yellow or you can define your own named colors It s also possible to color formulas in math environments 27 1 Adding the color package To make use of these color features the color package must be inserted into the preamble usepackage color You may also want to add to the preamble after the previous line Nusepackage usenames dvipsnames svgnames table xcolor The usepackage is obvious but the initialization of additional commands like usenames allows you to use names of the default colors the same 16 base colors as used in HTML The dvipsnames allows you access to more colors another 64 and svgnames allows access to about 150 colors The initialization of table allows colors to be added to tables by placing the color command just before the table The package loaded here is the xcolor package If you need more colors then you may also want to look at adding the x names to the initialization section as well this offers more than 300 colors but you need to make sure your xcolor package is the most recent you can download 27 2 Entering colored text The simplest way to type colored tex
241. erms of the GNU Free Doc umentation License Version 1 3 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation with no Invariant Sections no Front Cover Texts and no Back Cover Texts A copy of the license is included in the section entitled GNU Free Documentation License If you have Invariant Sections Front Cover Texts and Back Cover Texts re place the with Texts line with this with the Invariant Sections being LIST THEIR TITLES with the Front Cover Texts being LIST and with the Back Cover Texts being LIST If you have Invariant Sections without Cover Texts or some other combina tion of the three merge those two alternatives to suit the situation If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code we recom mend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of free software license such as the GNU General Public License to permit their use in free software A Combined Work is a work produced by combining or linking an Appli cation with the Library The particular version of the Library with which the Combined Work was made is also called the Linked Version The Minimal Corresponding Source for a Combined Work means the Cor responding Source for the Combined Work excluding any source code for portions of the Combined Work that considered in isolation are based on the Application and not on the Linked Version The Corresponding Application Code for a Combined Work mean
242. es and then check it back in The server records all changes a user checks in usually with a message summarizing what changes the user made so that other users can easily apply those changes to their own local files Each user has a local working copy of a remote repository For instance users can update changes from the repository to their working copy commit changes from their own working copy to the repository or re view the differences between working copy and repository To set up a SVN version control system the SVN server software has to be installed on a single computer with permanent internet access If this computer has no static IP address one can use a 20 http en wikipedia org wiki List of revision control software 21 http subversion apache org 281 Collaborative Writing of LaTeX Documents service like DynDNS to be able to access the server with a static hostname It can run on many Unix modern MS Windows and Mac OS X platforms Users do not have to install the SVN server software but a SVN client software This is the unique way to access the repositories on the server Besides the basic SVN command line client there are several Graphical User Interface Tools GUIs and plug ins for accessing the SVN server see http subversion tigris org links html Additionally there are very good manuals about SVN freely available on the internet e g http svnbook red bean com At our department we ru
243. esetting especially for documents containing mathematical formulae Within the typesetting system its name is formatted as UNKNOWN TEMPLATE LaTeX Many later authors have contributed extensions called packages or styles to LaTeX Some of these are bundled with most TeX LaTeX software distributions more can be found in the Comprehensive TeX Archive Network CTAN Since LaTeX comprises a group of TeX commands LaTeX document processing is essentially programming You create a text file in LaTeX markup which LaTeX reads to produce the final document This approach has some disadvantages in comparison with a WYSIWYG What You See Is What You Get program such as Openoffice org Writer or Microsoft Word In LaTeX You don t usually see the final version of the document when editing it You generally need to know the necessary commands for LaTeX markup e It can sometimes be difficult to obtain a certain look for the document On the other hand there are certain advantages to the LaTeX approach Document sources can be read with any text editor and understood unlike the complex binary and XML formats used with WYSIWYG programs You can concentrate purely on the structure and contents of the document not get caught up with superficial layout issues You don t need to manually adjust fonts text sizes line heights or text flow for readability as LaTeX takes care of them automatically n LaTeX the document s
244. eshazzar Benjaminevans8 Benregn Bhanuvrat BiT Bianbum Bilbo1507 Blacktrumpeter Blaisorblade Bonuama Borge Bpsullivan Braindrain0000 Brendanarnold 5 3 934 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 368 ht ht ht ht ht ht ht ht ht ht ht ht ht ht ht ht ht ht ht ht ht ht ht ht ht en en en en en en en en en en en en en en en en en en en en en en en en en wi wi wi wi wi wi wi wi wi wi wi wi wi wi wi wi wi wi wi wi wi wi wi wi wi kibooks org w index php title User Atallcostsky kibooks org w index php title User Atiq ur Rehman kibooks org w index php title User Atulyal988 kibooks org w index php title User Aurelian Radoaca kibooks org w index php title User Avila gas kibooks org w index php title User Bajrangkhichi96 kibooks org w index php title User Bakken kibooks org w index php title User Bamgooly kibooks org w index php title User Barakafrit kibooks org w index php title User Basenga kibooks org w index php title User Bcmpinc kibooks org w index php title User Belteshazzar kibooks org w index php title User Benjaminevans82 kibooks org w index php title User Benregn kibooks org w index php title User Bhanuvrat kibooks org
245. eview of attitude representations used 1 euler axis for aircraft kinematics Journal of Aircraft 38 4 718 737 1 GPS Schaub et al 1995 Schaub H Tsiotras P and Junkins J L 1995 Principal rotation representations hand held l of proper NxN orthogonal matrices International Journal of Engineering Science 33 15 2277 2295 holonomic Shoemake 1985 Shoemake K 1985 Animating rotation with quaternion curves In SIGGRAPH 85 MU Proceedings of the 12th annual conference on Computer graphics and interactive techniques pages 245 254 New York NY USA ACM Press INS kalman Shoemake 1994 Shoemake K 1994 Quaternions Technical report Department of Computer and Information Science University of Pennsylvania Philadelphia PA 19104 kinematics g multisensor observability perturbation analysis 9090000000090009000000 quaternions reference frames E rotation composition amp s gt 4 rotation matrices rotations a s q M B B Jais 150 Sr 18 publications in group quaternions of 38 Figure 8 BibDesk Literatur Generator FAST and EASY to create your own Bibliographie Bibtex Endnote Din 1505 The Literatur Generator is totally free and you do not need a registration to use the Literatur Generator e Mendeley Mendeley is
246. ew colors 27 5 The 68 standard colors known to dvips Invoke the package with the usenames and dvipsnames option If you are using TikZ package you must declare the color package before that otherwise it will not work Nusepackage usenames dvipsnames xcolor Apricot Blue Brown Cerulean DarkOrchid Goldenrod JungleGreen Mahogany Mulberry OrangeRed PineGreen RawSienna Rhodamine Salmon SpringGreen Turquoise WildStrawberry Aquamarine BlueGreen BurntOrange CornflowerBlue Emerald Gray Lavender Maroon NavyBlue Orchid Plum Red RoyalBlue SeaGreen Tan Violet Yellow 27 6 Defining new colors If the predefined colors are not adequate you may wish to define your own Bittersweet BlueViolet CadetBlue Cyan ForestGreen Green LimeGreen Melon OliveGreen Peach ProcessBlue RedOrange RoyalPurple Sepia TealBlue VioletRed YellowGreen Black BrickRed CarnationPink Dandelion Fuchsia GreenYellow Magenta MidnightBlue Orange Periwinkle Purple RedViolet RubineRed SkyBlue Thistle White YellowOrange 243 Colors 27 6 1 Place Define the colors in the preamble of your document Reason Do so in the preamble so that you can already refer to them in the preamble which is useful for instance in an argument of another package that supports colors as arguments such as listings package 27 6 2 Method To define a new color follow the following example which defines orange f
247. ex documentclass a4paper scrlttr2 Nusepackage lmodern Nusepackage ut 8 inputenc Nusepackage T1 fontenc Nusepackage english babel usepackage url setkomavar fromname Joe Bloggs setkomavar fromaddress 21 Bridge Street Smallville NN Dunwich DU3 4WE setkomavar fromphone 0123 45679 begin document begin letter Director NN Doe amp Co NN 35 Anthony Road Newport Ipswich IP3 5RT KOMAoptions fromphone true fromfax false setkomavar subject Wikipedia YXsetkomavar customer 2342 opening Dear Sir or Madam I am writing to you on behalf of the Wikipedia project url http www wikipedia org an endeavour to build a fully fledged multilingual encyclopaedia in an entirely open manner to ask for permission to use your copyrighted material ldots That said allow me to reiterate that your material will be used to the noble end of providing a free collection of knowledge for everyone naturally enough only if you agree If that is the case could you kindly fill in the attached form and post it back to me We shall greatly appreciate it 180 Reference letter cls commands Thank you for your time and consideration I look forward to your reply Nclosing Yours Faithfully Nps P S You can find the full text of GFDL license at url http www gnu org copyleft fdl html encl Copyright permission form end letter end document The output is generated via
248. ext bg 90 black setbeamercolor block body example bg normal text bg 90 black setbeamercolor block title alerted use normal text alerted text fg salerted text fg 75 normal text fg bg normal text bg 75 black setbeamercolor block title bg blue setbeamercolor block title example use normal text example text fg example text fg 75 normal text fg bg normal text bg 75 black setbeamercolor fine separation line setbeamercolor frametitle fg brown setbeamercolor item projected fg black setbeamercolor normal text bg black fg yellow setbeamercolor palette sidebar primary use normal text fg normal text fg setbeamercolor palette sidebar quaternary use structure fg structure fg setbeamercolor palette sidebar secondary use structure fg structure fg setbeamercolor palette sidebar tertiary use normal text fg normal text fg setbeamercolor section in sidebar fg brown setbeamercolor section in sidebar shaded fg grey setbeamercolor separation line setbeamercolor sidebar bg red setbeamercolor sidebar parent palette primary setbeamercolor structure bg black fg green setbeamercolor subsection in sidebar fg brown setbeamercolor subsection in sidebar shaded fg grey setbeamercolor title fg brown setbeamercolor titlelike fg brown Remember that you can define your own colors definecolor chocolate RGB 33 33 33 You can also define the style of
249. ext normally you are said to be in text mode while you are typing within one of those mathematical environments you are said to be in math mode that has some differences compared to the text mode 1 Most spaces and line breaks do not have any significance as all spaces are either derived logically from the mathematical expressions or have to be specified with special commands such as Nquad 2 Empty lines are not allowed Only one paragraph per formula 3 Each letter is considered to be the name of a variable and will be typeset as such If you want to typeset normal text within a formula normal upright font and normal spacing then you have to enter the text using dedicated commands 13 1 1 Inserting Displayed maths inside blocks of text In order for some operators such as lim or sum to be displayed correctly inside some math environments read it might be convenient to write the displaystyle class inside the environment Doing so might cause the line to be taller but will cause exponents and indices to be displayed correctly for some math operators For example the Nsum will print a smaller Zand S displaystyle sum will print a bigger one gt like in equations This only works with AMSMATH package 13 2 Symbols Mathematics has lots and lots of symbols If there is one aspect of maths that is difficult in LaTeX it is trying to remember how to produce them There are of course a set of symbols that can be acces
250. ext within a document end framed 32 3 Rules and Struts The rule command in normal use produces a simple black box rule lift width height Here is an example Nrule 3mm 1pt Vrule 1mm 5mm 1cm rule 3mm 1lpt rule 1mm 1cm 5mm rule 3mm 1pt Figure 67 This is useful for drawing vertical and horizontal lines A special case is a rule with no width but a certain height In professional typesetting this is called a strut It is used to guarantee that an element on a page has a certain minimal height You could use it in a tabular environment to make sure a row has a certain minimum height 268 33 Fonts In order to select a font other than the default typeface in LaTeX environment it is necessary to include some commands in the preamble of the document For example usepackage T1 fontenc usepackage light math iwona Important This only works for fonts that are already prepared for use with LaTeX A Truetype font ttf or similar must first be converted and made available to LaTeX The external links section below has some useful resources 33 0 1 Example Below is an example found at the Google discussion group latexlovers The example demonstrates how to select different fonts in a simple document p default font familydefault rmdefault Computer Modern Roman Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet consectitur adipiscing elit Palatino font renewcommand rmdefault
251. ferences o oss hor nd reu od os la td Ew dl ae Tables 10 1 Floating with table s las ta urs ae re E use oo OQ tA Ut 15 17 19 19 22 25 29 31 31 51 51 52 55 72 74 75 77 77 III Contents 10 2 The tabular environment ees 10 3 S5pannng A Ae A BE redeo a A dE 10 4 Resize tables e NN Re EU a Eee dog s 10 5 Sideways tables 10 6 Alternate Row Colors in Tables ee 10 7 Colors of individual Cells o o ee ee 10 8 Partial Vertical Lines 3 4 ooo bee dee a ke Be ee 10 9 Space between TOWS u oes ad up rV we oR on 10 10The table environment captioning ete e 10 11The tabular environment controlling table width 10 12The tabularx package simple column stretching 10 13 Vertically centered images 10 14Professional tables e 10 15 Adding rule spacing above or below hline and clinecommands 10 16 Tables with different font size e T0 T9Summary 22 en WR de eR LR Evae feros TO 20R fere nces 4 3 a Bier Qo oos enden decet odo dae Ld 11 Formatting 12 Page Layout 12 1 Pase dimensions nn uos dou ovp hoe a Rue de v 12 2 Pageonent tion e e gol m eo RR om RR URN Y SE s 12 3 Pagestyles 4 2 uon RR oe Eoo tM once ce ii eR s 12 4 Multi column pages 12 5 Manual page formatting eA 12 6 Widows and orphans eA t27 Summary EENHEETEN 13 Mathematics IV 13 1 Mathematics environments
252. fferent computer platforms LaTeX employs the inputenc package usepackage encoding inputenc inputenc package tells LaTeX what the text encoding format of your tex files is The encoding depends on your operating system but often a software s encoding can be changed from the settings this happens at least with some editors the PuTTY terminal and TeXmaker You may choose whichever encoding you like but you must say so in the preamble so for example if you prefer to use the ISO 8859 1 write usepackage latin1 inputenc Most modern operating systems use Unicode utf 8 as a default encoding for text On such system for example Ubuntu you can use Nusepackage ut f8 inputenc The supported encoding by the LaTeX team is ut 8 and covers a fairly specific limited range of unicode input characters It only defines those symbols that are known to be available with the current font encoding ut 8x is not officially supported but covers a much broader range of input symbols You might encounter a situation where using usepackage ut 8 inputenc might result in error Package inputenc Error Unicode char u8 not set up for use with LaTeX 2 http en wikipedia org wiki PuTTY 3 http en wikipedia org wiki Texmaker 316 Output encoding This is due to the utf8 definition not necessarily having a mapping of all the character glyphs you are able to enter on your keyboard Such characters are for example 9 Y
253. form of the text according to the rules given in the document class file and in various style files LaTeX allows users to structure their documents with a variety of hierarchal constructs including chapters sections subsections and paragraphs 6 1 The document environment After the document class declaration the text of your document is enclosed between two commands which identify the beginning and end of the actual document Xdocumentclass 11pt alpaper oneside report begin document end document You would put your text where the dots are The reason for marking off the beginning of your text is that LaTeX allows you to insert extra setup specifications before it where the blank line is in the example above we ll be using this soon The reason for marking off the end of your text is to provide a place for LaTeX to be programmed to do extra stuff automatically at the end of the document like making an index A useful side effect of marking the end of the document text is that you can store comments or temporary text underneath the vend document in the knowledge that LaTeX will never try to typeset them end document 1 Chapter 5 2 1 on page 22 31 Document Structure 6 1 1 Preamble The preamble is everything from the start of the LaTeX source file until the begin document command It normally contains commands that affect the entire document o simple tex A simple article to illustrat
254. format LaTeX input format SGML or XML using a publicly available DTD and standard conforming simple HTML PostScript or PDF designed for human modification Examples of trans parent image formats include PNG XCF and JPG Opaque formats include proprietary formats that can be read and edited only by proprietary word pro cessors SGML or XML for which the DTD and or processing tools are not generally available and the machine generated HTML PostScript or PDF produced by some word processors for output purposes only The Title Page means for a printed book the title page itself plus such following pages as are needed to hold legibly the material this License re quires to appear in the title page For works in formats which do not have any title page as such Title Page means the text near the most prominent appearance of the work s title preceding the beginning of the body of the text The publisher means any person or entity that distributes copies of the Doc ument to the public A section Entitled XYZ means a named subunit of the Document whose ti tle either is precisely XYZ or contains XYZ in parentheses following text that translates XYZ in another language Here XYZ stands for a specific section name mentioned below such as Acknowledgements Dedications En dorsements or History To Preserve the Title of such a section when you modify the Document means that it remains a section Entitled XYZ accordin
255. g above this command is known gen erally to belong in the preamble This was the only actual line containing real content the text that we wanted displayed on the page The document environment ends here It EES tells LaTeX that the document source is com plete anything after this line will be ignored Hello World As we have said before each of the LaTeX commands begins with a backslash X This is LaTeX s way of knowing that whenever it sees a backslash to expect some commands Comments are not classed as a command since all they tell LaTeX is to ignore the line Comments never affect the output of the document 5 3 2 Generating the document It is clearly not going to be the most exciting document you have ever seen but we want to see it nonetheless I am assuming that you are at a command prompt already in the directory where hello tex is stored LaTeX itself does not have a GUI graphical user interface since it is just a program that crunches away at your input files and produces either a DVI or PDF file Some LaTeX installations feature a graphical front end where you can click LaTeX into compiling your input file On other systems there might be some typing involved so here is how to coax LaTeX into compiling your input file on a text based system Please note this description assumes that you already have a working LaTeX installation on your computer 1 Type the command latex hello the tex extensi
256. g and signature parts to the left insert the following before begin document longindentation 0pt The amount of space to the left can be adjusted by increasing the Opt 21 2 Envelopes 21 2 1 Using the envlab package The envlab package provides customization to the nakelabels command allowing the user to print on any of an assortment of labels or envelope sizes For example beginning your LaTeX file the following way produces a document which includes the letter and a business size 10 envelope on the following page documentclass letter 178 Envelopes Nusepackage businessenvelope envlab makelabels Refer to the envlab user guide for more information about this capable package 21 2 2 Using the geometry package Here is a relatively simple envelope which uses the geomet ry package which is used because it vastly simplifies the task of rearranging things on the page and the page itself o envelope tex documentclass letter usepackage left lin top 0 15in papersize 4 125in 9 5in landscape twoside false geometry setlength parskip 0pt pagestyle empty begin document FROM NAME FROM STREET ADDRESS FROM CITY STATE N ZIP vspace 1 0in large setlength parindent 3 6in TO NAME TO STREET ADDRESS TO CITY STATE ZIP end document Figure 48 A sample envelope to be printed in landscape mode 21 2 3 Printing The above will certainly take care of
257. g commands part chapter or maketitle specifya thispagestyle plain So if you wish to suppress all styles by inserting a pagestyle empty at the beginning of your document then the style command at each section will override your initial rule for those pages only To achieve the intended result one can follow the new section commands with thispagestyle empty The part command however cannot be fixed this way because it sets the page style but also advances to the next page so that thispagestyle cannot be applied to that page Another approach is to simply write Nusepackage nopageno in the preamble This package will make pagestyle plain have the same effect as pagestyle empty effectively suppressing page numbering when it is used 12 3 2 Customising with fancyhdr To get better control over the headers one can use the package fancyhdr written by Piet van Oostrum It provides several commands that allow you to customize the header and footer lines of your document For a more complete guide the author of the package produced this documentation The tricky problem when customizing headers and footers is to get things like running section and chapter names in there Standard LaTeX accomplishes this with a two stage approach although an alternative one stage mechanism is provided by the package titleps In the header and footer definition you use the commands rightmark and leftmark to represent the current sectio
258. g horizontal spacing LaTeX is obviously pretty good at typesetting math it was one of the chief aims of the core Tex system that LaTeX extends However it can t always be relied upon to accurately interpret formulas in the way you did It has to make certain assumptions when there are ambiguous expressions The result tends to be slightly incorrect horizontal spacing In these events the output is still satisfactory yet any perfectionists will no doubt wish to fine tune their formulas to ensure spacing is correct These are generally very subtle adjustments There are other occasions where LaTeX has done its job correctly but you just want to add some space maybe to add a comment of some kind For example in the following equation it is preferable to ensure there is a decent amount of space between the math and the text NE f n left begin array l 1 n 2 amp Nquad text if n is even n 1 2 quad text if n is odd end array right n 2 if nis even fin RR n 1 2 if n is odd This code produces errors with Miktex 2 9 and does not yield the results seen on the right Use textrm instead of just Mext Note that this particular example can be expressed in more elegant code by the cases construct provided by the amsmath package described in Advanced Mathematics chapter LaTeX has defined two commands that can be used anywhere in documents not just maths to insert some horizontal space They are q
259. g older formats The two most widely used encodings for Korean text files are EUC KR and its upward compatible extension used in Korean MS Windows 323 Internationalization CP949 Windows 949 UHC In these encodings each US ASCII character represents its normal ASCII character similar to other ASCII compatible encodings such as ISO 8859 x EUC JP Big5 or Shift JIS On the other hand Hangul syllables Hanjas Chinese characters as used in Korea Hangul Jamos Hiraganas Katakanas Greek and Cyrillic characters and other symbols and letters drawn from KS X 1001 are represented by two consecutive octets The first has its MSB set Until the mid 1990 s it took a considerable amount of time and effort to set up a Korean capable environment under a non localized non Korean operating system You can skim through the now much outdated http shin net faq to get a glimpse of what it was like to use Korean under non Korean OS in mid 1990 s 2 TEX and LATEX were originally written for scripts with no more than 256 characters in their alphabet To make them work for languages with considerably more characters such as Korean or Chinese a subfont mechanism was developed It divides a single CJK font with thousands or tens of thousands of glyphs into a set of subfonts with 256 glyphs each For Korean there are three widely used packages HLATEX by UN Koaunghi hLATEXp by CHA Jaechoon and the CJK package byWerner Lemberg HLATEX and hLATEXp are spe
260. g to this definition The Document may include Warranty Disclaimers next to the notice which states that this License applies to the Document These Warranty Disclaimers are considered to be included by reference in this License but only as re gards disclaiming warranties any other implication that these Warranty Dis claimers may have is void and has no effect on the meaning of this License 2 VERBATIM COPYING You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium either commer cially or noncommercially provided that this License the copyright notices and the license notice saying this License applies to the Document are re produced in all copies and that you add no other conditions whatsoever to those of this License You may not use technical measures to obstruct or control the reading or further copying of the copies you make or distribute However you may accept compensation in exchange for copies If you dis tribute a large enough number of copies you must also follow the conditions in section 3 You may also lend copies under the same conditions stated above and you may publicly display copies 3 COPYING IN QUANTITY If you publish printed copies or copies in media that commonly have printed covers of the Document numbering more than 100 and the Document s li cense notice requires Cover Texts you must enclose the copies in covers that carry clearly and legibly all these Cover Texts Front Cover Texts on the front c
261. g wiki LaTeX 2FGestion 20de 201a 20bibliographie 75 10 Tables In academic writing tables are a common feature often for summarizing results from research It is therefore a skill that needs mastering in order to produce quality papers However if there is one area about LaTeX that is the least intuitive then this is it Basic tables are not too taxing but you will quickly notice that anything more advanced can take a fair bit of construction So we start slowly and build up from there Workaround You might save lots of time by building tables using specialized software and exporting them in LaTeX format The following plugins and libraries are available for some popular software calc2latex for OpenOffice org Calc spreadsheets excel2latex for Microsoft Office Excel matrix2latex for MATLAB e matrix2latex for Python and MATLAB latex tools a Ruby library e xtable a library for R org mode for Emacs users org mode tables can be used inline in LaTeX documents see https www gnu org software emacs manual html node org A LaTeX example html for a tuto rial Emacs Align Commands while not a workaround per se the align commands can clean up a messy LaTeX table 10 1 Floating with table It is highly recommended to place a tabular environment only in the table environment which is able to float and add a label and caption begin table position specifier centering begin tabular 1
262. ge put in a placeholder and make another new even page A crude but effective method 36 8 Sidebar with information If you want to put a sidebar with information like copyright and author you might want to use the eso pic package Example usepackage eso pic AddToShipoutPicture AtPageLowerLeft rotatebox 90 begin minipage paperheight centering textcopyright today Humble me o end minipage odo Je If you want it on one page only use the starred version of the AddToShipoutPicture command at the page you want it AddToShipoutPicturex 36 9 Hide auxiliary files If you re using pdflatex you can create a folder in which all the output files will be stored so your top directory looks cleaner pdflatex output directory tmp Please note that the folder tmp should exist However if you re using linux you can do something like this alias pdflatex mkdir p tmp pdflatex output directory tmp Or for vim modify your vimrc use pdflatex let g Tex_DefaultTargetFormat pdf let g Tex MultipleCompileFormats pdf dvi let g Tex CompileRule pdf mkdir p tmp pdflatex output directory tmp interaction nonstopmode x cp tmp x pdf 299 37 General Guidelines During this guide we have seen what it is possible to do and how this can be achieved but the question is I want to write a proper text with LaTeX what to do then Where should I start from This is a short step
263. gestyle fancy The standard book formatting of the chaptermark is renewcommand chaptermark 1 markboth MakeUppercase chaptername thechapter 1 Moreover with the following commands you can define the thickness of the decorative lines on both the header and the footer renewcommand headrulewidth 0 5pt renewcommand footrulewidth Opt The first line for the header the second for the footer Setting it to zero means that there will be no line An example fancyhf 103 Page Layout lhead Andrew Roberts rhead today rfoot thepage It is often necessary to clear any defaults or a previous style definition and the first line of the above example will do this The commands are an alternative interface to customising the headers footers that fancyhdr offers and so by not passing anything to them it assumes that you want it all blank The result of these commands will put my name at the top left todays date at the top right and the current page number at the bottom right of the page Even if the document class was two sided because no optional text has been supplied for the even pages the style will be used for all pages This approach has a serious bad point some pages like the title or the beginning of each chapter have no header or footer but with the code we have shown every page will get the same output There is a way to solve this problem you can use the fancyplain style If yo
264. ghts granted under this License are granted for the term of copyright on the Program and are irrevocable provided the stated conditions are met This License explicitly affirms your unlimited permission to run the unmod ified Program The output from running a covered work is covered by this License only if the output given its content constitutes a covered work This License acknowledges your rights of fair use or other equivalent as provided by copyright law You may make run and propagate covered works that you do not convey without conditions so long as your license otherwise remains in force You may convey covered works to others for the sole purpose of having them make modifications exclusively for you or provide you with facilities for running those works provided that you comply with the terms of this License in conveying all material for which you do not control copyright Those thus making or running the covered works for you must do so exclusively on your behalf under your direction and control on terms that prohibit them from making any copies of your copyrighted material outside their relationship with you Conveying under any other circumstances is permitted solely under the con ditions stated below Sublicensing is not allowed section 10 makes it unnec essary 3 Protecting Users Legal Rights From Anti Circumvention Law No covered work shall be deemed part of an effective technological measure under any applicable
265. gin table begin tabular table data end tabular end table You may feel that it is a bit long winded but such distinctions are necessary because you may not want all tables to be treated as a float Use listoftables to add a list of the tables in the beginning of the document 24 1 4 Keeping floats in their place The placeins package provides the command FloatBarrier which can be used to pre vent floats from being moved over it This can e g be useful at the beginning of each section The package even provides an option to change the definition of section to automatically in clude a FloatBarrier This can be set by loading the package with the option section usepackage section placeins FloatBarrier may also be useful to prevent floats intruding on lists created using itemize or enumerate The flafter package can be used to force floats to appear after they are defined and the endfloat package can be used to place all floats at the end of a document 24 2 Captions It is always good practice to add a caption to any figure or table Fortunately this is very simple in LaTeX All you need to do is use the caption text command within the float environment Because of how LaTeX deals sensibly with logical structure it will automatically keep track of the numbering of figures so you do not need to include this within the caption text The location of the caption is traditionally underneath
266. gs you could do with the makebox and framebox commands makebox textwidth central cent ra l par s r e a d makebox textwidth s 3 P S p r e a d War Guess I m framed now framebox 1 1 width Guess I m framed now par Bum framebox 0 8 width r Bummer I am too wide par never fami yeu anad this framebox lcm 1 never mind so am I Can you read this Figure 65 Now that we control the horizontal the obvious next step is to go for the vertical No problem for LaTeX The raisebox lift extend above baseline extend below baseline text command lets you define the vertical properties of a box You can use width height depth and totalheight in the first three parameters in order to act upon the size of the box inside the text argument 267 Advanced Topics raisebox 0pt Opt Opt Large Aaaaaaa he shouted but not textbf Aaaa raisebox 0 3ex a even the ne ne in line noticed that Asco Rio Teal something terriblphad happened to him raisebox 1 2ex r vaisebox 2 2ex g raisebox 4 5ex h Figure 66 he shouted but not even the next one in line noticed that something terrible had happened to him An alternative to these approaches is the usage of the framed environment you will need to include the framed package to use it This provides an easy way to box a paragraph within a document begin framed This is an easy way to box t
267. gument does not Here is an example using the vspace command the code is exactly the one of the previous case we just added some negative vertical spaces to shrink everything up Gulls are birds in the farnily Laridae They are most closely related to a z the terns family Sternidae auks and skimmers and more distantly to the begin wrapfigure r 0 5 textwidth waders Most gulls belong to the large genus Larus vspace 20pt They are in general medium to begin center large birds typically grev or white H f often with black markings on the includegraphics width 0 48 textwidth gU head or wings Ber hire gout end center longish bills and webbed feet Nvspace 20pt Most gulls particularly Larus e ground nesting carni caption A gull Nvspace 10pt end wrapfigure fish Apart from the kittiw Figure 1 A gull gulls are typically coastal or inlanc rely venturing far out to sea The large sp tain full adult plumage but two ye Gulls the birds demonstrating complex methods of communication and a highly developed ake up to four s is typical for small gulls gt larger species in particular are resourceful and highly intelligent social structure Certain species e g the Herring Gull have exhibited tool use behaviour Many species of gull have learned to co exist successfully with man and have thrived in human habitats Others rely on kleptoparasitism to get their food
268. h centering includegraphics width textwidth gull caption A gull label fig gull end subfigure add desired spacing between images e g quad qquad etc or a blank line to force the subfigure onto a new line begin subfigure b 0 3 textwidth centering includegraphics width textwidth tiger caption A tiger label fig tiger end subfigure add desired spacing between images e g quad qquad etc or a blank line to force the subfigure onto a new line begin subfigure b 0 3 textwidth centering includegraphics width textwidth mouse caption A mouse label fig mouse end subfigure caption Pictures of animals label fig animals end figure 10 http tug ctan org tex archive macros latex contrib floatflt ll http www ctan org tex archive macros latex contrib floatflt floatflt pdf 210 Captions a A gull b A tiger c A mouse Figure 1 Pictures of animals Figure 61 You will notice that the figure environment is set up as usual You may also use a table environment for subtables For each subfloat you need to use begin subfigure lt placement specifier gt lt width gt centering figure or table caption lt sub caption end subfigure If you intend to cross reference any of the subfloats see where the label is inserted caption outside the subfigure environment will provide the global caption subcaption will arrange the figure
269. ha off input png output png 22 1 3 Including graphics Now that we have seen which formats we can include and how we could manage those formats it s time to learn how to include them in our document After you have loaded the graphicx package in your preamble you can include images with includegraphics whose syntax is the following includegraphics attrl vall attr2 val2 attrn valn imagename As you should hopefully be aware by now arguments in square brackets are optional whereas arguments in curly braces are compulsory The argument in the curly braces is the name of the image Write it without the extension This way the LaTeX compiler will look for any supported image format in that directory and will take the best one EPS if the output is DVI JPEG PNG or PDF if the output is PDF The variety of possible attributes that can be set is fairly large so only the most common are covered below width xx Specify the preferred width of the imported NB Only specifying image to xx either width or height height xx Specify the preferred height of the imported will scale the image image to xx whilst maintaining the keepaspectratio This can be set to either true or false When trusptcwritgoale the image according to both height and width but will not distort the image so that neither width nor height are exceeded scale xx Scales the image by the desired scale factor e g 0 5 to reduce by h
270. he maths syntax is ignored To bold lowercase Greek or other symbols use the boldsymbol command this will only work if there exists a bold version of the symbol in the current font As a last resort there is the pmb command poor mans bold this prints multiple versions of the character slightly offset against each other NE boldsymbol beta beta_l beta 2 ldots beta_n B B Bo Bn To change the size of the fonts in math mode see Changing font size 44 http en wikipedia org wiki Cryptography 45 http en wikipedia org wiki key 20space 46 http en wikipedia org wiki Kleene 27s 200 47 http en wikipedia org wiki Description 20logic 23Naming 20Convention 48 requires amsfonts or amssymb packages 49 http en wikipedia org wiki Fraktur 20 28script 29 50 http en wikipedia org wiki List 200f 20New 20Testament 20papyri 5 http en wikipedia org wiki Ideal 20 28ring 20theory 29 52 requires amsfonts or amssymb packages 53 http en wikipedia org wiki Blackboard 20bold 54 require mathrsfs package 55 http en wikipedia org wiki Script 20 28typefaces 29 56 requires the amsmath package 57 requires the amsmath package 58 http en wikibooks org wiki 2FAdvanced 20Mathematics 23Changing 20font 20size 130 Plus and minus signs 13 12 1 Accents So what to do when you run out of symbols and fonts Well the next step is to use accents a a a a hat
271. he references But this will be discussed in the future when it comes up 5 3 3 Compressed PDF For a PDF output you may have noticed that the output PDF file is not always the same size depending on the engine you used to compile the file So latex dvips ps2pdf will usually be much smaller than pdflatex So if you want pdflatex features along with a small output file size you can use the Ghostscript command gs dBATCH dNOPAUSE q sDEVICE pdfwrite sOutputFile Compressed pdf Original pdf 5 3 4 Picking suitable filenames Never ever use directories folders or file names that contain spaces Although your operating system probably supports them some don t and they will only cause grief and tears with TeX Make filenames as short or as long as you wish but strictly avoid spaces Stick to lower case letters without accents a z the digits 0 9 the hyphen and only one full point or period to separate the file 10 http en wikipedia org wiki Hanging 20punctuation 27 Basics extension somewhat similar to the conventions for a good Web URL it will let you refer to TeX files over the Web more easily and make your files more portable Some operating systems do not distinguish between upper case and lower case letters others do Therefore it s best not to mix them 5 3 5 Files you might encounter When you work with LaTeX you will soon find yourself in a maze of files with various extensio
272. hive macros latex contrib changebar 286 Managing collaborative bibliographies An example on how to use Latexdiff in the Terminal latexdiff old tex new tex gt diff tex Files old tex and new tex are compared and the file visualizing the changes is written to diff tex pdflatex diff tex Create a PDF showing the changes The program DiffPDF can be used to compare two existing PDFs visually There is also a command line tool comparepdf based on DiffPDF 35 7 Managing collaborative bibliographies Writing of scientific articles reports and books requires the citation of all relevant sources Bib TeX is an excellent tool for citing references and creating bibliographies Markey 2005 Fenn 2006 Many different BibTeX styles can be found on CTAN http www ctan org and on the LaTeX Bibliography Styles Database http jo irisson free fr bstdatabase If no suitable BibTeX style can be found most desired styles can be conveniently assembled with custombib makebst http www ctan org tex archive macros latex contrib custom bib Furthermore BibTeX style files can be created or modified manually however this action requires knowledge of the unnamed postfix stack language that is used in BibTeX style files Patashnik 1988 At our department we have a common bibliographic data base in the BibTeX format bib file It resides in our common texmf tree see section Hosting LaTeX files in Subversion in the subdirec
273. hm can appear as a single box in a formula For example to state that a particular action system is equivalent to a WHILE loop you can write NE NACTIONS A A NEQ IF B NTHEN S NCALL A ELSE NCALL Z FI OE ENDACTIONS EQT WHILE B ADO S MOD Dijkstra conditionals and loops begin program NIF x 1 MAR y y 1 BAR x 2 MAR y y 2 utdots BAR x n MAR y displaystyle sum_ i 1 n y i FI DO 2 origbar x AND x gt 0 MAR x x 2 BAR NOT 2 origbar x NAR x modbar x 3 NOD end program Loops with multiple exits begin program NDO ADO IF AB1 THEN EXIT AFI s1 IF B2 THEN EXIT 2 FI OD NIF AB1 THEN EXIT FI NOD end program 171 Typesetting Algorithms A Reverse Engineering Example Here s the original program begin program VAR seq m 0 p 0 last NACTIONS prog prog NACTIONEQ seq line m 0 i 1 CALL inhere ENDACTION 1 ACTIONEQ i itl NIF i n 1 NTHEN CALL alldone FI m re 1 NIF item i neq last p THEN writel lline l lline m 0 NCALL inhere NFI NCALL more ENDACTION linhere ACTIONEQ p number i line item i line line concat concat p CALL more ENDACTION more NACTIONEQ NIF m 1 THEN p number i line line concat concat p FI last item il CALL 1 ENDACTIO
274. ht notice for your modifications adjacent to the other copyright notices F Include immediately after the copyright notices a license notice giving the public permission to use the Modified Version under the terms of this License in the form shown in the Addendum below G Preserve in that license notice the full lists of Invariant Sections and required Cover Texts given in the Document s license notice H Include an unaltered copy of this License I Preserve the section Entitled History Preserve its Title and add to it an item stating at least the title year new authors and publisher of the Modified Version as given on the Title Page If there is no section En titled History in the Document create one stating the title year authors and publisher of the Document as given on its Title Page then add an item describing the Modified Version as stated in the previous sentence J Pre serve the network location if any given in the Document for public access to a Transparent copy of the Document and likewise the network locations given in the Document for previous versions it was based on These may be placed in the History section You may omit a network location for a work that was published at least four years before the Document itself or if the 49 3 GNU Lesser General Public License GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 3 29 June 2007 Copyright O 2007 Free Software Foundation Inc lt http fsf org gt
275. html 202 24 Floats Figures and Captions The previous chapter introduced importing graphics However just having a picture stuck in between paragraphs does not look professional For starters we want a way of adding captions and to be able to cross reference What we need is a way of defining figures It would also be good 1f LaTeX could apply principles similar to when it arranges text to look its best to arranging pictures as well This is where floats come into play 24 1 Floats Floats are containers for things in a document that cannot be broken over a page LaTeX by default recognizes table and figure floats but you can define new ones of your own see Custom Floats below Floats are there to deal with the problem of the object that won t fit on the present page and to help when you really don t want the object here just now Floats are not part of the normal stream of text but separate entities positioned in a part of the page to themselves top middle bottom left right or wherever the designer specifies They always have a caption describing them and they are always numbered so they can be referred to from elsewhere in the text LaTeX automatically floats Tables and Figures depending on how much space is left on the page at the point that they are processed If there is not enough room on the current page the float is moved to the top of the next page This can be changed by moving the Table or Figure definition to a
276. http en wikibooks org w index 65 http en wikibooks org w index 66 http en wikibooks org w index 67 http en wikibooks org w index 68 http en wikibooks org w index 69 http en wikibooks org w index 70 http en wikibooks org w index 71 http en wikibooks org w index 9 9 9 0 9 d U Ug OSS tO 9 Os FC uy YO 9 0 td OO Ug O g hp hp hp hp hp hp hp hp hp hp hp t hp t hp t hp hp t hp t hp t hp hp hp t hp t hp hp hp hp tit tit tit tit tit cytl tit tit tit ct i et t p EF ett ZE ER cheek eto eke cb tit1 tit tit EPT le User BrettMontgomery le User Brevity le User Bsander le User Bumbulski le User Bunyk le User Byassine52 le User Bytecrook le User CD Stevens le User Caesura le User Calimo le User Cameronc le User Canageek le User CarsracBot le User Cdecoro le User Cengiqu le User Cfailde le User Chafe66 le User Chazz le User Chisophugis le User ChrisHodgesUK le User ChristianGruen le User Chuaprap le User Chuckhoffmann le User Clebell le User Collinpark 369 Contributors 1 Comput2h 4 ConditionalZenith 1 Conighion 2 Conrad Irwin 1 Courcelles 1 Crasic 1 Crasshopper 2 CrazyTerabyte 2 Crissov 2 Cicero 37 Dan Polansky 1 Danielstrong52 1 David s hollman 6 DavidMcKenzie 1 Debejyo 1 Dendik 9 Derbeth
277. http hdl handle net 2268 6219 24 http en wikibooks org wiki LaTeX 2FAdvanced Mathematics 23Braces spanning multiple lines 122 Brackets braces and delimiters The use of delimiters such as brackets soon becomes important when dealing with anything but the most trivial equations Without them formulas can become ambiguous Also special types of mathematical structures such as matrices typically rely on delimiters to enclose them There are a variety of delimiters available for use in LaTeX NI Lee b he Nee Ny E NN langle f rangle lfloor g rfloor lceil h rceil a b cy ld llel N Le A 13 9 1 Automatic sizing Very often mathematical features will differ in size in which case the delimiters surrounding the expression should vary accordingly This can be done automatically using the left and right commands Any of the previous delimiters may be used in combination with these left frac x 2 y 3 right nn Bt NY Curly braces are defined differently by using left and right NE left frac x 2 y 3 right Gi If a delimiter on only one side of an expression is required then an invisible delimiter on the other side may be denoted using a period NE left frac x 3 3 right_0 1 123 Mathematics ml E 13 9 2 Manual sizing In certain cases the sizing produced by the left and right commands may not be desirable or you m
278. hy It is in a separated file and it is manually added to the table of contents using a tip suggested in the Tips amp Tricks Once you created your document tex you won t need to edit it anymore unless you want to add other files in the tex directory but this is not going to happen very often Now you can write your document separating it in as many files as you want and adding many pictures without getting confused thanks to the rigid structure you gave to the project you will be able to keep track of all your edits clearly A suggestion do not call your files like chapter_01 tex or figure_03 png i e try to avoid using numbers in file names if the numbering LaTeX gives them automatically is different from the one you gave and this will likely happen you will get really confused When naming a file stop for a second think about a short name that can fully explain what is inside the file without being ambiguous it will let you save a lot of time as soon as the document gets larger 5 Chapter 36 on page 291 6 _ Chapter 8 on page 45 7 Chapter 36 on page 291 307 General Guidelines 37 5 Writing your document While writing whenever you have to take a decision about formatting define your own command for it and add it to your mystyle st y let LaTeX work for you If you do so it will be very easy to change it if you change your mind Here is an example if you are writing a book about Mathematics and you have to use
279. hyperlinks It won t affect the way to write your documents just keep on using the standard Mabel ref system discussed in the chapter on Labels and Cross referencing with hyperref those con nections will become links and you will be able to click on them to be redirected to the right page Moreover the table of contents list of figures tables and index will be made of hyperlinks too 26 2 1 Commands The package provides three useful commands for inserting links pointing outside the document 1 Chapter 15 on page 151 229 Hyperlinks hyperref Usage hyperref label_name link text This will have the same effect as ref label_name but will make the text link text a full link instead The two can be combined for example in we use hyperref mainlemma lemma WVref mainlemma Note the x after ref for avoiding nested hyperlinks If the lemma labelled as mainlemma was number 4 1 1 then the outputted text would be we use lemma 4 1 1 with the hyperlink as expected url Usage Nurl my url It will show the URL using a mono spaced font and if you click on it your browser will be opened pointing at it href Usage href my_url description It will show the string description using standard document font but if you click on it your browser will be opened pointing at my url Here is an example url http www wikibooks org href http www wikibooks org
280. i LaTeX 2FText 20Formatting 341 44 Sample LaTeX documents The easiest way to learn how to use latex is to look at how other people use it Here is a list of real world latex sources that are freely available on the internet The information here is sorted by application area so that it is grouped by the scientific communities that use similar notation and LaTeX constructs 44 1 General examples Tutorial examples books and real world uses of LaTeX caption tex simple tex wrapped tex ftp tug ctan org tex archive macros latex base small2e tex small2e tex and ftp tug ctan org tex archive macros latex base sample2e tex sample2e tex The official sample documents A short example of how to use LaTeX for scientific reports by Stephen J Eglen The not so Short Introduction to LaTeX by Tobias Oetiker is distributed with full latex sources 44 2 Semantics of Programming Languages Articles on programming language research from syntax to semantics including source code listings type rules proof trees and even some category theory A good place to start is Mitchell Wand s Latex Resources including a sample file that also demonstrates Didier Remy s mathpartir package The following are latex sources of some articles books or presentations from this field Pugs Bootstrapping Perl 6 with Haskell This paper by Audrey Tang contains nice examples on configuring the listings package to format source code
281. ides In that case use the plain option frame plain If you want to include lots of text on a slide use the shrink option frame shrink Before using any verbatim environment like listings you should pass the option containsverbatim to the frame command 222 The Beamer package Nframe containsverbatim frametitle Source code begin lstlisting caption First C example int main printf Hello World return 0 end lstlisting 25 1 5 Text animations You can simply use the pause statement begin frame frametitle Some background We start our discussion with some concepts pause The first concept we introduce originates with Erd H os end frame For text animations for example in the itemize environment you can write begin itemize item This one is always shown Vitem lt 1 gt The first time item lt 2 gt The second time item lt 1 gt Also the first time only lt 1 gt This one is shown at the first time but it will hide soon end itemize begin frame frametitle Hidden higher order concepts begin itemize lt gt item The truths of arithmetic which are independent of PA in some sense themselves contain essentially color blue hidden higher order or infinitary concepts item Truths in the language of arithmetic which ldots item That suggests stronger version of Isaacson s thesis end itemize end frame 25 1 6
282. ie 1 MarSraM 1 Maratonda 4 Marozols 2 Mara 1 Martin scharrer 1 Martin von Wittich 5 MartinSpacek gt 1 Martinkunev24 2 Mathieu Perrin 1 Matthias M gt 8 1 Mckay 19 Mcld 6 1 Mecanismo 1 Merciadriluca 4 Mhue 1 MichaelBueker 1 Mietchen 05 1 Mijikenda 1 Mike lifeguard 2 Mikhail Ryazanov 2 Mimo 9 1 MoMaT 1 Modest Genius 247 http en wikibooks org w index php 248 http en wikibooks org w index php 249 http en wikibooks org w index php 250 http en wikibooks org w index php 251 http en wikibooks org w index php 252 http en wikibooks org w index php 253 http en wikibooks org w index php 254 http en wikibooks org w index php 255 http en wikibooks org w index php 256 http en wikibooks org w index php 257 http en wikibooks org w index php 258 http en wikibooks org w index php 259 http en wikibooks org w index php 260 http en wikibooks org w index php 261 http en wikibooks org w index php 262 http en wikibooks org w index php 263 http en wikibooks org w index php 264 http en wikibooks org w index php 265 http en wikibooks org w index php 266 http en wikibooks org w index php 267 http en wikibooks org w index php 268 http en wikibooks org w index php 269 http en wikibooks org w index php 270 http en wikibooks org w index php 27 http en wikibooks org w index php tit tit
283. in a portion of text 127 Mathematics A matrix in text must be set smaller ES Si to not increase lead ing in a portion of text Figure 35 13 11 Adding text to equations The math environment differs from the text environment in the representation of text Here is an example of trying to represent text within the math environment NE 50 apples Ntimes 100 apples lots of apples 2 N 50apples x 100apples lotsof apples There are two noticeable problems there are no spaces between words or numbers and the letters are italicized and more spaced out than normal Both issues are simply artifacts of the maths mode in that it treats it as a mathematical expression spaces are ignored LaTeX spaces mathematics according to its own rules and each character is a separate element so are not positioned as closely as normal text There are a number of ways that text can be added properly The typical way is to wrap the text with the text command a similar command is mbox though this causes problems with subscripts and has a less descriptive name Let s see what happens when the above equation code is adapted NE 50 text apples times 100 text apples text lots of apples 2 50apples x 100apples lots of apples The text looks better However there are no gaps between the numbers and the words Unfortunately you are required to explicitly add these There are many ways to add spaces between ma
284. inal publisher of the version it refers to gives permission K For any section Entitled Acknowledgements or Dedications Preserve the Title of the section and preserve in the section all the substance and tone of each of the contributor acknowledgements and or dedications given therein L Preserve all the Invariant Sections of the Document unaltered in their text and in their titles Section numbers or the equivalent are not considered part of the section titles M Delete any section Entitled Endorsements Such a section may not be included in the Modified Version N Do not retitle any existing section to be Entitled Endorsements or to conflict in title with any Invariant Section O Preserve any Warranty Disclaimers If the Modified Version includes new front matter sections or appendices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no material copied from the Document you may at your option designate some or all of these sections as invariant To do this add their titles to the list of Invariant Sections in the Modified Version s license notice These titles must be distinct from any other section titles You may add a section Entitled Endorsements provided it contains nothing but endorsements of your Modified Version by various parties for example statements of peer review or that the text has been approved by an organiza tion as the authoritative definition of a standard You may add a passage of up to five word
285. inewidth The width of a line in the local environment Voddsidemargin The margin for odd pages think of a printed booklet paperwidth The width of the page paperheight The height of the page parindent The normal paragraph indentation parskip The extra vertical space between paragraphs tabcolsep The default separation between columns in a tabular environment textheight The height of text on the page textwidth The width of the text on the page topmargin 338 Length manipulation macros The size of the top margin Wnitlength Units of length in Picture Environment 42 3 Length manipulation macros You can change the values of the variables defining the page layout with two commands With this one you can set a new value setlength parameter length with this other one you can add a value to the existing one addtolength parameter length You can create your own length with the command newlength parameter You may also set a length from the size of a text with one of these commands settowidth parameter some text settoheight parameter some text settodepth parameter some text When using these commands you may duplicate the text that you want to use as reference if you plan to also display it But LaTeX also provides a set of commands to avoid this duplication newsavebox boxname savebox boxname some text usebox boxname You may wish to look at the example below
286. ing Correspond ing Source o 1 Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library A suitable mechanism is one that a uses at run time a copy of the Library already present on the user s computer system and b will operate properly with a modified version of the Library that is interface compatible with the Linked Version e Provide Installation Information but only if you would otherwise be required to provide such information under section 6 of the GNU GPL and only to the extent that such information is necessary to install and execute a modified version of the Combined Work produced by recombining or relinking the Application with a modified version of the Linked Version If you use option 4d0 the Installation Information must accompany the Minimal Corresponding Source and Corresponding Applica tion Code If you use option 4d1 you must provide the Installation Infor mation in the manner specified by section 6 of the GNU GPL for conveying Corresponding Source 5 Combined Libraries You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side by side in a single library together with other library facilities that are not Ap plications and are not covered by this License and convey such a combined library under terms of your choice if you do both of the following a Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library uncombined with any other library facilities c
287. ing math can be tricky at times However because Latex provides so much control you can get professional quality mathematics typesetting with relatively little effort once you ve had a bit of practice of course It would be possible to keep going and going with math topics because it seems potentially limitless However with this tutorial you should be able to get along sufficiently 13 18 Notes 13 19 Further reading e meta Help Displaying a formula Wikimedia uses a subset of LaTeX commands 13 20 External links e LaTeX maths symbols e detexify9 applet for looking up LaTeX symbols by handwriting them e ftp ftp ams org pub tex doc amsmath amsldoc pdf amsmath documentation e LaTeX The Comprehensive LaTeX Symbol Lis The Student Room 67 pl LaTeX Matematyka 63 http 64 http 65 http 66 http 67 http pdt 68 http en meta org wiki Help 3ADisplaying 20a 20formula www artofproblemsolving com Wiki index php LaTeX Symbols detexify kirelabs org www thestudentroom co uk wiki LaTeX www ctan org tex archive info symbols comprehensive symbols letter pl wikibooks org wiki LaTeX 2FMatematyka 145 14 Theorems With theorem we can mean any kind of labelled enunciation that we want to look separated from the rest of the text and with sequential numbers next to it This approach is commonly used for theorems in mathematics but can be used for anything LaTeX provides a command that
288. ing up a terminal In this terminal type xfig without the quotation marks and press return 22 http www latexeditor org 23 http www texniccenter org 24 http www winedt com 25 http www winshell de 26 http jabref sourceforge net 27 http www mendeley com 28 http bibdesk sourceforge net 29 http en wikipedia org wiki Xfig 30 http www cygwin com 335 Installation 41 4 2 Inkscape Inkscape is an open source vector graphics editor which can export images to EPS or PDF files which may then be imported into LaTeX see Importing Graphics It can run natively under Windows Linux or Mac OS An extremely useful plug in is textext which can import LaTeX objects This can be used for inserting mathematical notation or LaTeX fonts into graphics which may then be imported into LaTeX documents 41 4 3 OpenOffice org It is also possible to export vector graphics to EPS format using OpenOffice org Draw which is an open source office suite available for Windows Linux and Mac 41 5 See also e Installing Extra Packages 41 6 References 3 http en wikipedia org wiki Inkscape 32 http en wikipedia org wiki Encapsulated 20PostScript 33 http en wikipedia org wiki Portable 20Document 20Format 34 Chapter 22 on page 183 35 http www elisanet fi ptvirtan software textext index html 36 http en wikipedia org wiki OpenOffice org 37 Chapter 29 on page 255 336
289. inside the caption to ensure correct numbering If you get an error when the label is inside the caption use protect infront of the label command 24 2 4 Wrapping text around figures Although not normally the case in academic writing an author may prefer that some floats do not break the flow of text but instead allow text to wrap around it Obviously this effect only looks decent when the figure in question is significantly narrower than the text width A word of warning Wrapping figures in LaTex will require a lot of manual adjustment of your document There are several packages available for the task but none of them work perfectly Before you make the choice of including figures with text wrapping in your document make sure you have considered all the options For example you could use a layout with two columns for your documents and have no text wrapping at all Anyway we will look at the package wrapfig Note wrapfig may not come with the default installation of LaTeX you might need to install additional packages manually To use wrapfig you must first add this to the preamble usepackage wrapfig This then gives you access to begin wrapfigure lineheight alignment width Alignment can normally be either for left or r for right Lowercase or r forces the figure to start precisely where specified and may cause it to run over page breaks while capital L or R allows the figure to float If you define
290. installed on Widows XP or later versions of Windows Start gt All Programs gt MikTex Settings In Settings menu choose the first tab and click on Refresh FNDB button MikTex will then check the Program Files directory and update the list of File Name DataBase After that just verify by clicking OK This step is utterly essential otherwise nothing will work 5 Update font maps If your package installed any TrueType or Type 1 fonts you need to update the font mapping files in addition to updating the index Your package author should have included a map file for the fonts The map updating program is usually some variant on updmap depending on your distribution TeX Live and MacTeX updmap nable Map mapfile map if you installed the files in a personal tree or updmap sys nable Map mapfile map if you installed the files in a system directory 257 Packages Installing Extra Packages MikTeX Run initexmf dit config file updmap add the line Map mapfile map to the file that opens then run initexmf mkmaps See http www tug org fonts fontinstall html The reason this process has not been automated widely is that there are still thousands of installations which do not conform to the TDS such as old shared Unix systems and some Microsoft Windows systems so there is no way for an installation program to guess where to put the files you have to know this There are also systems where the ow
291. iography As you can see there is no field for URLs One possibility is to include Internet addresses in howpublished field of misc or note field of Gtechreport article book howpublished url http www example com Note the usage of url command to ensure proper appearance of URLs Another way is to use special field url and make bibliography style recognise it url http www example com You need to use usepackage url in the first case or usepackage hyperref in the second case Styles provided by Natbib see below handle this field other styles can be modified using urlbst program Modifications of three standard styles plain abbrv and alpha are provided with urlbst If you need more help about URLs in bibliography visit FAQ of UK List of Tex 9 3 10 Customizing bibliography appearance One of the main advantages of BibTeX especially for people who write many research papers is the ability to customize your bibliography to suit the requirements of a given publication You will notice how different publications tend to have their own style of formatting references to which authors must adhere if they want their manuscripts published In fact established journals and conference organizers often will have created their own bibliography style bst file for those users of BibTeX to do all the hard work for you It can achieve this because of the nature of the bib database where all the information ab
292. ion or the flexibility settings need changing If the overfull word includes a forward slash such as input output this should be properly typeset as input slash output The use of slash has the same effect as using the character except that it can form the end of a line with the following words appearing at the start of the next line The character is typically used in units such as mm year character which should not be broken over multiple lines It can also issue this warning if the end document tag was not included and or was deleted 7 3 7 Missing package LaTeX Error File paralisy sty not found Type X to quit or RETURN to proceed or enter new name Default extension sty Enter file name 42 Examples When you use the Nusepackage command to request LaTeX to use a certain package it will look for a file with the specified name and the filetype st y In this case the user has mistyped the name of the paralist package so it s easy to fix However if you get the name right but the package is not installed on your machine you will need to download and install it before continuing If you don t want to affect the global installation of the machine you can simply download from Internet the necessary st y file and put it in the same folder of the document you are compiling 7 3 8 Package babel Warning No hyphenation patterns were loaded for the language X Although this is a warning fr
293. ions don t have subfiles package in their latex distributions You can download subfiles zip to generate subfiles cls and subfiles sty files wget http mirror ctan org macros latex contrib subfiles zip unzip subfiles zip cd subfiles latex subfiles dtx latex subfiles ins 37 2 5 Inserting PDF files If you need to insert an existing possibly multi page PDF file into your LaTeX document whether or not the included PDF was compiled with LaTeX or another tool consider using the pdfpages package In the preamble include the package usepackage final pdfpages This package also allows you to specify which pages you wish to include for example to insert pages 3 to 6 from some file insertme pdf use 2 http tezcatl fciencias unam mx tex archive macros latex contrib subfiles zip 3 http www ctan org tex archive macros latex contrib pdfpages 305 General Guidelines includepdf pages 3 6 insertme pdf To insert the whole of insertme pdf includepdf pages insertme pdf For full functionality compile the output with pdflatex 37 3 The file mystyle sty Instead of putting all the packages you need at the beginning of your document as you could the best way is to load all the packages you need inside another dummy package called mystyle you will create just for your document The good point of doing this is that you will just have to add one single usepackage in your document keeping your code
294. is License grants you permission to propagate or modify any covered work These actions in fringe copyright if you do not accept this License Therefore by modifying or propagating a covered work you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so 10 Automatic Licensing of Downstream Recipients Each time you convey a covered work the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensors to run modify and propagate that work subject to this License You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License An entity transaction is a transaction transferring control of an organiza tion or substantially all assets of one or subdividing an organization or merging organizations If propagation of a covered work results from an entity transaction each party to that transaction who receives a copy of the work also receives whatever licenses to the work the party s predecessor in interest had or could give under the previous paragraph plus a right to pos session of the Corresponding Source of the work from the predecessor in interest if the predecessor has it or can get it with reasonable efforts You may not impose any further restrictions on the exercise of the rights granted or affirmed under this License For example you may not impose a license fee royalty or other charge for exercise of rights granted under this License and you may not initiate litigation including a cross claim
295. is a consistency checker intended to spot mistakes in code It is available as source code or compiled for Windows and OS 2 Chapter 39 on page 315 Chapter 41 1 on page 333 http www ctan org tex archive macros latex contrib nag http www ctan org tex archive support lacheck BRWN ra 43 Errors and Warnings e chktex baruch ev en org proj chktex gt is a LaTeX semantic checker available as source code for Unix like systems 5 http baruch ev en org proj chktex 44 8 Title Creation There are several situations where you might want to create a title in a custom format rather than in the format natively supported by LaTeX For shorter documents such as basic articles the output of maketitle is often adequate but longer documents such as books and reports often require more involved formatting While it is possible to change the output of maketitle it can be complicated even with minor changes to the title In such cases it is often better to create the title from scratch and this section will show you how to accomplish this 8 1 Standard Title Pages Many document classes will form a title page for you One must specify what to fill it with using these commands placed in the top matter title The Triangulation of Titling Data in Non Linear Gaussian Fashion via rho Series Ndate October 31 475 author John Doe Magic Department Richard Miles University and Richard Row LaTeX Academy Commonly
296. is not a straightforward task and is often best left to the professionals 109 13 Mathematics One of the greatest motivating forces for Donald Knuth when he began developing the original TeX system was to create something that allowed simple construction of mathematical formulas whilst looking professional when printed The fact that he succeeded was most probably why TeX and later on LaTeX became so popular within the scientific community Typesetting mathematics is one of LaTeX s greatest strengths It is also a large topic due to the existence of so much mathematical notation If your document requires only a few simple mathematical formulas plain LaTeX has most of the tools that you will need If you are writing a scientific document that contains numerous complicated formulas the amsmath package introduces several new commands that are more powerful and flexible than the ones provided by LaTeX The mathtools package fixes some amsmath quirks and adds some useful settings symbols and environments to amsmath To use either package include Nusepackage amsmath or usepackage mathtools in the preamble of the document The mathtools package loads the amsmath package and hence there is no need to usepackage amsmath in the preamble if mathtools is used 13 1 Mathematics environments LaTeX needs to know beforehand that the subsequent text does in fact contain mathematical elements This is because LaTeX typesets maths
297. is wikibook That book is released under the GPL that is not compatible with the GFDL used here in Wikibooks Anyway we have the permission of the authors to use their work You can freely copy text from that guide to here If you find text on both the original book and here on Wikibooks then that text is double licensed under GPL and GFDL For more information about Tobias Oetiker and Hubert Partl their websites are http it oetiker ch and http homepage boku ac at partl respectively Done Peter Flynn s Formatting information a beginner s guide to typesetting with LaTeX We have contacted him by email asking for permission to use his work The original book is released under the GNU Free Documentation License the same as Wikibooks For more information his personal website is http silmaril ie cgi bin blog Working LaTeX Primer from the Indian TeX Users Group Their document is released under the GNU Free Documentation License the same as Wikibooks so we can include parts of their document as we wish In any case we have contacted Indian TeX Users Group and they allowed us to do it Working David Wilkins Getting started with LaTeX The book is not released under any free license but we have contacted the author asking him for the permission to use parts of his book on Wikibooks He agreed his work is still protected but you are allowed to copy the parts you want on this Wikibook If you see text on both the original
298. it in parentheses the name of the original author or publisher of that section if known or else a unique number Make the same adjustment to the section titles in the list of Invariant Sections in the license notice of the combined work In the combination you must combine any sections Entitled History in the various original documents forming one section Entitled History likewise combine any sections Entitled Acknowledgements and any sections Enti tled Dedications You must delete all sections Entitled Endorsements 6 COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other documents released under this License and replace the individual copies of this License in the various documents with a single copy that is included in the collection provided that you follow the rules of this License for verbatim copying of each of the documents in all other respects You may extract a single document from such a collection and distribute it individually under this License provided you insert a copy of this License into the extracted document and follow this License in all other respects regarding verbatim copying of that document 7 AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS A compilation of the Document or its derivatives with other separate and in dependent documents or works in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium is called an aggregate if the copyright resulting from the compi lation is
299. it to vref when the document is close to its final version and then making adjustments to fix possible problems 15 4 The hyperref package and Nautoref The hyperref package introduces another useful command autoref This command creates a reference with additional text corresponding to the target s type all of which will be a hyperlink For example the command autoref sec intro would create a hyperlink to the label sec intro command wherever it is Assuming that this label is pointing to a section the hyperlink would contain the text section 3 4 or similar the full list of default names can be found here Note that while there s an autoref command that produces an unlinked prefix useful if the label is on the same page as the reference no alternative Autoref 5 http en wikibooks org wiki LaTeX 2FPackages 2FHyperref 6 http www tug org applications hyperref manual html TBL 23 155 Labels and Cross referencing command is defined to produce capitalized versions useful for instance when starting sentences but since the capitalization or autoref names was chosen by the package author you can customize the prefixed text by redefining At ypeautorefname to the prefix you want as in def sectionautorefname Section This renaming trick can of course be used for other purposes as well If you would like a hyperlink reference but do not want the predefined text that autoref provides you
300. itanpad com 16 http etherpad org etherpadsites html 17 http en wikipedia org wiki EtherPad 18 http en wikipedia org wiki Mercurial 19 http en wikibooks org wiki Git 280 The Version Control System Subversion the document and explain the changes by e mail as well Unfortunately there is a problem when two or more authors are working at the same time on the same document So how can authors synchronise these files A second possibility is to provide the document on a common file server which is available in most departments The risk of overwriting each others modifications can be eliminated by locking files that are currently edited However generally the file server can be only accessed from within a department Hence authors who are out of the building cannot use this method to update commit their changes In this case they will have to use another way to overcome this problem So how can authors access these files A third possibility is to use a version control system A comprehensive list of version control systems can be found at Wikipedia Version control systems keep track of all changes in files in a project If many authors modify a document at the same time the version control system tries to merge all modifications automatically However if multiple authors have modified the same line the modifications cannot be merged automatically and the user has to resolve the conflict by deciding manually which
301. ith pdflatex myfile TeX gt PDF latex myfile TeX gt DVI dvipdf myfile DVI gt PDF dvips myfile o myfile ps DVI gt PS ps2pdf myfile ps myfile pdf PS gt PDF With all the available Ghostscript versions the safest way to always get the right paper size in the end is to add Ndocumentclass a4paper Nspecial papersize 210mm 297mm to the tex file t a4 after dvips and SPAPERSIZI fine using the package geometry usually works w a4 after the ps2pdf For pdflatex to work If you want US Letter instead replace 210mm 297mm by 8 5in 1 lin and a4 by letter 12 2 Page orientation When you talk about changing page orientation it usually means changing to landscape mode since portrait is the default I shall introduce two slightly different styles of changing orientation The first is for when you want all of your document to be in landscape from the very beginning There are various packages available to achieve this but the one I prefer is the geomet ry package All you need to do is call the package with landscape as an option usepackage landscape geometry Although if you intend to use geometry to set your paper size don t add the usepackage commands twice simply string all the options together separating with a comma Nusepackage a4paper landscape geometry 12 2 1 Change orientation of specific part The second method is for when you are writing a document in por
302. ithin the document itself It s simpler but it can be time consuming if you are writing several papers about similar subjects so that you often have to cite the same books you can store them in an external BibTeX file and then link them via a command to your current document and use a Bibtex style to define how they appear This way you can create a small database of the references you might use and simply link them letting LaTeX work for you In order to know how to add the bibliography to your document see the Bibliography Management section 7 http www bibtex org 8 http www cs stir ac uk kjt software latex showbst html 9 Chapter 9 on page 51 38 7 Errors and Warnings LaTeX describes what it s typesetting while it does it and if it encounters something it doesn t understand or can t do it will display a message saying what s wrong It may also display warnings for less serious conditions Don t panic if you see error messages it s very common to mistype or misspell commands forget curly braces type a forward slash instead of a backslash or use a special character by mistake Errors are easily spotted and easily corrected in your editor and you can then run LaTeX again to check you have fixed everything Some of the most common errors are described in next sections 7 1 Error messages The format of an error message is always the same Error messages begin with an exclamation mark at the start of the line and give
303. just get a wrong output In other words you can redefine the square root this way only if you are not going to use multiple roots in the whole document An alternative piece of TeX code that does allow multiple roots is LetLtxMacro oldsqrt sqrt makes all sqrts closed renewcommand sqrt 1 11 def DHLindex 1 mathpalette DHLhksqrt def DHLhksqrt 1 2 setbox0 hbox 1 oldsqrt DHLindex 2 dimen0 ht0 advance dimen0 0 2 ht0 setbox2 hbox vrule height ht0O depth dimen0 box0 lower0 71pt box2 lt gt Nsqrt a b quad oldsaqrt a b 119 Mathematics Figure 33 However this requires the usepackage let ltxmacro package 13 8 Sums and integrals The sum and int commands insert the sum and integral symbols respectively with limits specified using the caret and underscore _ The typical notation for sums is MI sum_ i 1 10 t i NI 10 iA li The limits for the integrals follow the same notation It s also important to represent the integration variables with an upright d which in math mode is obtained through the mathrm command and with a small space separating it from the integrand which is attained with the 1 command NE int_0 infty e x mathrm d x N Kreis There are many other big commands which operate in a similar manner 120 Sums and integrals O 9 0 34 TS 3OP TN LUTTEN ebpembtq sntdnbtq JOPoLTAN poadoowN
304. ka AM hline end tabular Figure 16 10 3 2 Columns spanning multiple rows The first thing you need to do is add usepackage multirow to the pream bie This then provides the command needed for spanning rows multirow num_ rows width contents The arguments are pretty simple to deduce x for the width means the content s natural width 14 Package multirow on CTAN http www ctan org tex archive macros latex contrib multirow 87 Tables Team sheet O ase qu ebd Goalkeeper GK Paul Robinson z LB Lucus Radebe Nbegin tabular lllllll Dd DC Michael Duberry n e DC Dominic Matteo multicolumn 3 c Team sheet EN hline RB Didier Domi Goalkeeper amp GK amp Paul Robinson hline David Batty multirow 4 Defenders amp LB Lucus Radeb me Biz Michael Puberty Mi Midfielders Eirik Bakke amp DC Dominic Matteo AM Jody Morris amp RB Didier Domi NN hline z multirow 3 Midfielders amp MC amp David gar Forward Jamie McMaster amp MC amp Eirik Bakke Strik Alan Smith amp MC amp Jody Morris hline trikers Mark Viduka Forward amp FW amp Jamie McMaster hline multirow 2 Strikers amp ST amp Alan Smith Ape amp ST amp Mark Viduka Figure 17 hline end tabular The main thing to note when using multirow is that a blank entry must be inserted for each appropriate cell in each subsequent row to be spa
305. ks org wiki User 3ADerbeth 489 http en wikibooks org wiki 3Awikibooks 3Aen 3AUser 3AJtwdog 490 http en wikibooks org 491 http en wikibooks org wiki 3Awikibooks 3Aen 3AUser 3AJtwdog 492 http en wikibooks org 493 http en wikibooks org wiki 3Awikibooks 3Aen 3AUser 3AJtwdog 494 http en wikibooks org 388 List of Figures 496 53 Original uploader was Jtwdog at en wikibooks GFDL 54 ChrisHodgesUK 7 55 ChrisHodgesUK 56 Alessio Damato GFDL 57 Mwtoews 00 GFDL 58 User Mwtoews 2 GFDL 59 Alessio Damato GFDL 60 Alessio Damato 0 GFDL 61 Alessio Damato GFDL 62 Israel Buitron gt GFDL 63 ChrisHodgesUK 64 Alessio Damato GFDL 65 Alessio Damato 07 GFDL 66 Alessio Damato GFDL 67 Alessio Damato GFDL 68 ChrisHodgesUK 69 Alessio Damato GFDL 70 Original uploader was Arnehe at en wikibooks gt 71 Original uploader was Arnehe at en wikibooks 72 Original uploader was Arnehe P at en wikibooks gt 73 Original uploader was Arnehe at en wikibooks 74 Original uploader was Arnehe at en wikibooks 75 Alessio Damato gt GFDL 495 http en wikibooks org wiki 3Awikibooks 3Aen 3AUser 3AJtwdog 496 http en wikibooks org 497 http en wikibooks org wiki User 3AChrisHodgesUK 498 http en wikibooks org wiki User 3AChrisHodgesUK 499 h
306. l purposes input is no more than a simple automated copy and paste of the source code in filename tex The other main inclusion command is include include filename 11 Chapter 6 on page 31 12 Chapter 37 on page 301 29 Basics This command is roughly equivalent to clearpage input filename clearpage The Ninclude command is different from input in that it s the output that is added instead of the commands from the other files Therefore a new page will be created at every include command which makes it appropriate to use it for large entities such as book chapters The file extension of the tex file which is to be included must also be omitted from the filename unlike with input for which it is optional This is because include also creates an appropriate aux file and needs the name without extension to achieve this Very large documents that usually include many files take a very long time to compile and most users find it convenient to test their last changes by including only the files they have been working on One option is to hunt down all include commands in the inclusion hierarchy and to comment them out 3 include filenamel include filename2 include filename3 include filename4 In this case the user wants to include only filename2 tex and filename3 tex If the inclusion hierarchy is intricate commenting can become error prone page numbering will change and any cross references won t work
307. l the appropriate commands are automatically executed to compile the document Vim LaTeX even detects how many times it has to run pdflatex and whether or not it has to run bibtex This is just one of the many nice features of Vim LaTeX you can read the excellent Beginner s Tutorial for more about the many clever shortcuts Vim LaTeX provides Another option exists if you are running Unix Linux or any other platform where you have make 6 Then you can simply create a Makefile and use vim s make command or use make in shell The Makefile would then look like this latex source code pdf latex source code tex latex source code bib pdflatex latex source code tex bibtex latex source code pdflatex latex source code tex pdflatex latex source code tex 9 3 8 Bibliography styles Below you can see three styles available with LaTeX Instead of WYSIWYG editors typesetting systems like TEX 1 or IATEX 2 can be used References 1 Paul W Abrahams Kathryn A Hargreaves and Karl Berry TpXfor the Impatient 2003 2 Leslie Lamport ATEX A Document Preparation System Addison Wesley second Edition 1994 Figure3 plain 14 http vim latex sourceforge net 15 http vim latex sourceforge net documentation latex suite quickstart 16 http en wikipedia org wiki Make_ 28software 29 64 BibTeX Instead of WYSIWYG editors typesetting systems like TEX 1 or IATEX 2 can be used Refere
308. lates the automatic text to polish so that chapter becomes rozdziat There are a few additional things one must remember about Connectives Polish has many single letter connectives a o w 1 etc grammar and typography rules don t allow for them to end a printed line To ensure that LaTeX won t set them as last letter in the line you have to use non breakable space Noc byta sierpniowa ciepta i stodka Ksiezyc o wiecat srebrnem Swiattem wgiebienie tak ze twarze matego rycerza i Basi byty skapane w blasku Poni ej na podw rzu zamkowem wida by o u pione kupy o nierzy a takze i ciata zabitych podczas dziennej strzelaniny bo nie znaleziono dotad czasu na ich pogrzebanie Numerals According to polish grammar rules you have to put dots after numerals in chapter section subsection etc headers This is achieved by redefining few LaTeX macros For books renewcommand thechapter arabic chapter renewcommand thesection arabic chapter arabic section r enewcommand thesubsection arabic chapter arabic section arabic subsection rene wcommand thesubsubsection arabic chapter arabic section arabic subsection arabic subsubsection 325 Internationalization For articles renewcommand thesection arabic section renewcommand thesubsection arabic section arabic subsection renewcomma nd thesubsubsection arabic section arabic subsection arabic subsubsec
309. latex to get a DVI that you want to convert to PDF using dvipdfm to see your document with any PDF viewer pdftex default if compiling with pdflatex if you are compiling with pdftex to get a PDF that you will see with any PDF viewer but again you don t need to pass any option to the package because the default settings are fine in most of the cases In many respects importing your images into your document using LaTeX is fairly simple once you have your images in the right format that is Therefore I fear for many people the biggest effort will be the process of converting their graphics files Now we will see which formats we can include and then we will see how to do it 22 1 1 Document Options The graphics and graphicx packages recognize the draft and final options given in the documentclass command at the start of the file Using draft as the op 1 Chapter 5 4 3 on page 30 2 Chapter 5 2 1 on page 22 183 Importing Graphics tion will suppress the inclusion of the image in the output file and will replace the contents with the name of the image file that would have been seen Using final will result in the image being placed in the output file The default is final 22 1 2 Supported image formats As explained before the image formats you can use depend on the driver that graphicx is using but since the driver is automatically chosen according to the compiler then the allowed image forma
310. laus 1 White gecko 1 Whiteknight 7 Wikieditoroftoday 1 Willy james 397 http en wikibooks org w index p 308 http en wikibooks org w index p 309 http en wikibooks org w index p 400 http en wikibooks org w index p 401 http en wikibooks org w index p 402 http en wikibooks org w index p 403 http en wikibooks org w index p 404 http en wikibooks org w index p 405 http en wikibooks org w index p 406 http en wikibooks org w index p 407 http en wikibooks org w index p 408 http en wikibooks org w index p 409 http en wikibooks org w index p 410 http en wikibooks org w index p 411 http en wikibooks org w index p 412 http en wikibooks org w index p 413 http en wikibooks org w index p 414 http en wikibooks org w index p 415 http en wikibooks org w index p 416 http en wikibooks org w index p 417 http en wikibooks org w index p 418 http en wikibooks org w index p 419 http en wikibooks org w index p 420 http en wikibooks org w index p 421 http en wikibooks org w index p hp hp hp hp hp hp hp hp hp hp hp t hp t hp t hp hp t hp t hp t hp hp hp t hp t hp hp hp hp tit tit tit tit tit cytl tit tit tit ct i et t p EF ett ZE ER cheek eto eke cb tit1 tit tit EPT le User Tosha le User Towsonu2003 Le User Tpr le User Tualha le User Tuetschek le User Tuka le
311. leblock This is an Example block 225 Presentations This is an example end exampleblock end frame 25 1 8 PDF options You can specify the default options of your PDF hypersetup pdfstartview FitH By default the pdf fit the width of the screen 25 2 The powerdot package The powerdot package is available from CTAN The documentation explains the features in great detail The powerdot package is loaded by calling the powerdot class documentclass powerdot The usual header information may then be specified Inside the usual document environment multiple s1ide environments specify the content to be put on each slide begin document begin slide This is the first slide Content goes here end slide begin slide This is the second slide More content goes here end slide etc end document 25 3 References 25 4 Links e Wikipedia Beamer LaTeX Beamer user guide pdf from CTAN 5 http www ctan org tex archive macros latex contrib powerdot 6 http www bitlib net mirror ctan macros latex contrib powerdot docs powerdot pdf 7 http en wikipedia org wiki Beamer 20 28LaTex 29 8 http www ctan org tex archive macros latex contrib beamer doc beameruserguide pdf 226 Links The powerdot class pdf from CTAN A tutorial for creating presentations using beamer Making LaTeX Beamer Presentations fr LaTeX Faire des pr sentations 10 11 2
312. ll users who have access to the file server can open the PDF file of a publication by simply clicking on JabRefs PDF icon If we send the LaTeX source code of a project to a journal publisher or somebody else who has no access to our common texmf tree we do not include our entire bibliographic data base but extract the relevant entries with the Perl script aux2bib http www ctan org tex archive biblio bibtex utils bibtools aux2bib 35 3 Conclusion This wikibook describes a possible way to efficiently organise the collaborative preparation of LaTeX documents The presented solution is based on the Subversion version control system and several other software tools and LaTeX packages However there are still a few issues that can be improved First we plan that all users install the same LaTeX distribution As the 7eX Live distribution http www tug org texlive is available both for Unix and MS Windows operating systems we might recommend our users to switch to this LaTeX distribution in the future Currently our users have different LaTeX distributions that provide a different selection of LaTeX packages and different 289 Collaborative Writing of LaTeX Documents versions of some packages We solve this problem by providing some packages on our common texmf tree Second we consider to simplify the solution for a common bibliographic data base Currently it is based on the version control system Subversion the graphi
313. lly makes the difference of this file to the native newline character of the author s operating system http svnbook red bean com en 1 4 svn advanced props file portability htmlHsvn advanced props special eol style 30 There is also another important reason for reducing the number of ineffective modifications if several authors work on the same file the probability that the same line is modified by two or more authors at the same time increases with the number of modified lines Hence ineffective modifications unnecessarily increase the risk of conflicts see section Interchanging Documents ma tmp lt gt tmp 2 KDiff3 Eile Edit Directory Movement Diffview Merge Window Settings Help x Cd ve cb 0 XX ns sss SE E Ze rr EE the version control system tries to merge all modifications automatically Only if two or more authors have modified the same line the modifications cannot be merged automatically which of the two changes should be kept Authors can also comment their modifications so that the co authors can easily understand the workflow of this file B tmp tmp 2 Top line 96 the version control system tries to merge all modifications automatically Only if two or more authors have modified the same line the modifications cannot be ie E SET P SUE DA resolve this EE which of the two changes should be Kent Authors can also comment their modifications so that the co authors can ea
314. ls GMT maps and a wide range of highly customisable plots e Gnumeric spreadsheets has SVG EPS PDF export e matplotlib plotting library written in python with PDF and EPS export There are some tricks to be able to import formats other than EPS into your DVI document but they re very complicated On the other hand converting any image to EPS is very simple so it s not worth considering them Compiling with pdflatex If you are compiling with pdflatex to produce a PDF you have a wider choice You can insert JPG widely used on Internet digital cameras etc They are the best choice if you want to insert photos PNG a very common format even if not as much as JPG it s a lossless format and it s the best choice for diagrams if you were not able to generate a vector version and screenshots PDF it is widely used for documents but can be used to store images as well It supports both vector and bit map images but it s not recommended for the latter as JPG or PNG will provide the same result using less disk space Vector formats can be used with the help of Inkscape There are instructions on how to save your vector images in a PDF format understood by LaTeX and have LaTeX manage the text styles and sizes in the image automatically 10 http www gimp org 11 http pts szit bme hu sam2p 12 http www imagemagick org 13 http www graphicsmagick org 14 http imgtops sourceforge net
315. ly because the system can do it you will end up with just another kind of complexity A further important difference is that using Ninclude will force a page break which makes it ideal for a book s chapters whereas the input command does not which in turn makes it ideal for say a long article with discrete sections which of course are not normally set on a new page Working on discrete parts of your documents has consequences for how the base file is compiled these will be dealt with below 37 2 1 Using different paths When the LaTeX compiler finds a reference to an external file in the base file it will look for it in the same directory However you can in principle refer to any file on your system using both absolute and relative paths An absolute path is a full path and filename with every element specified So filename tex might have the full path input home user texfiles filename tex If you had created the directory myfiles for your writing project in your texfiles directory its full path would be input home user texfiles myfiles filename tex Obviously using absolute paths is inefficient if you are referring to a file in the current directory If however you need to include a file which is always kept at a specific place in your system you may refer to it with an absolute path for example input home user documents useful foo tex 302 Getting LaTeX to process multiple files In practice
316. m LaTeXtemp does not work as well We must use the TeX primitive let instead let LaTeXtemp LaTeX renewcommand LaTeX rm LaTeXtemp 36 2 id est and exempli gratia i e and e g If you simply use the forms i e or e g LaTeX will treat the periods as end of sentence periods i e full stop since they are followed by a space and add more space before the next sentence To prevent LaTeX from adding space after the last period the correct syntax is either i e N or e g Depending on style e g The Chicago Manual of Style a comma can be used afterwards which is interpreted by LaTeX as part of a sentence since the period is not followed by any space In this case i e and eo do not need any special attention If the command frenchspacing is used in the preamble the space between sentences is always consistent 1 http en wikipedia org wiki Full 20stop 2 http en wikipedia org wiki The 20Chicago 20Manual 200f 20Style 291 Tips and Tricks 36 3 Grouping Figure Equation Numbering by Section For long documents the numbering can become cumbersome as the numbers reach into double and triple digits To reset the counters at the start of each section and prefix the numbers by the section number include the following in the preamble usepackage amsmath numberwithin equation section numberwithin figure section The same can be done with similar counter types and document uni
317. m RES 39 Internationalization 39 1 Hyphetiatilig i3 ias Re PR er ER hae Rc td RR e 39 2 Text encodimng ds Dar en ed doom Ceres rn Beg ia e 39 3 Output encoding i i dre Ber E exe o dex Vete Ede a es ul de Uus 39 4 Hyphenating languages 40 Appendices 41 Installation 41 1 TeX andEaleX a RR Re ee Aer RE eR e amet a 41 2 Editors cb T dede de pn eg neon ea deri S 41 3 Bibliography management 41 4 Graphicstool8 use 0 eh Sak exec UN EY S Aled See alSo qo au qoas x em vem EN AN NE UMS WE mq 41 6 ReferenceS i o suo ERR um dme eos De Rs Cer og EUR ed e e s 42 Useful Measurement Macros 42 p Bu gt co ent RUE etd CRUS np ed OE UE Dead obe t e Ps goats 42 2 bength macros ecu exu dos di sed a ae Ao ae cu De E ae P Ce e di A 42 3 Length manipulation macros e 42 4 Samples ge ete ovs Ave Pme RURSUM NEUES M E 42 5 References i us par rta qnse e eei a ee 42 6 Seealso 3 aaa dede he nop ede une IOS bee We NW Y Re 43 Useful Size Commands 44 Sample LaTeX documents 44 1 General examples fi og oe need Ee ae RR on REO EHE quee 44 2 Semantics of Programming Languages lees 45 Command Glossary LIU CPI VIII 301 301 301 306 306 308 308 309 309 311 311 311 312 313 315 315 316 317 318 331 333 333 334 335 335 336 336 337 337 338 339 339 340 340 341 343 343 343 Contents SE act Br e Sene da drew d RAT CR EU OI UR seg dps 347 AD Aw I II 348 4
318. man babel This enables German hyphenation if you have configured your LaTeX system accordingly It also changes all automatic text into German Eg Chapter becomes Kapitel A set of new commands also becomes available which allows you to write German input files more quickly even when you don t use the inputenc package Check out the table below for inspiration With inputenc all this becomes moot but your text also is locked in a particular encoding world German Special Characters a s B or glqq or grqq i lt or flag gt or Xfrag flg lt Nfrq gt dq k In German books you often find French quotation marks guillemets German typesetters however use them differently A quote in a German book would look like this In the German speaking part of Switzerland typesetters use guillemets the same way the French do A major problem arises from the use of commands like 1q If you use the OT1 font which is the default font the guillemets will look like the math symbol which turns a typesetter s stomach T1 encoded fonts on the other hand do contain the required symbols So if you are using this type of quote make sure you use the T1 encoding usepackage T1 fontenc 39 4 8 Greek This is the preamble you need to write in the Greek language Nusepackage english greek babel usepackage iso 8859 7 inputenc
319. mand You need to have Ghostscript installed For Windows gswin32 dNOPAUSE sDEVICE pdfwrite sOUTPUTFILE Merged pdf dBATCH 1 pdf 2 pdf 3 paf For Linux gs dNOPAUSE sDEVICE pdfwrite sOUTPUTFILE Merged pdf dBATCH 1 pdf 2 pdf 3 pdf Alternatively PDF Shuffler is a small python gtk application which helps the user to merge or split pdf documents and rotate crop and rearrange their pages using an interactive and intuitive graphical interface This program may be avaliable in your Linux distribution s repository Another option to check out is pdftk or PDF toolkit which is a command line tool that can manipulate PDFs in many ways To merge one or more files use pdftk 1 pdf 2 pdf 3 pdf cat output 123 pdf Note If you are merging external PDF documents into a Latex document which is compiled with pdflatex a much simpler option is to use the pdfpages package e g usepackage pdfpages includepdf pages Document1 pdf includepdf pages Document2 pdf Three simple shell scripts using the pdfpages package are provided in the pdfjam bundle by D Firth They include options for merge several pdf pdfjoin put several pages in one physical sheet pdfnup and rotate pages pdf90 38 1 4 XeTeX You can also use XeTeX or more precisely XeLaTeX which works in the same way as pdflatex it creates a PDF file directly from LaTeX source One advantage of XeTeX over standard LaTe
320. matical Society conventions Code Output Comment A 1 A 2 Ndotsc for dots with commas A kl i 2 4 d a H Figure 36 A_1 dotsb A_N A1 An Figure 37 for dots with binary opera tors relations A_1 dotsm A_N Ai An Figure 38 for multiplication dots Nint a b dotsi b for dots with integrals rom E Figure 39 A 1Ndotso A_N for other dots none of the A A above n A ur m E E A n N Figure 40 136 List of Mathematical Symbols 13 16 List of Mathematical Symbols All the pre defined mathematical symbols from the TeX package are listed below More symbols are available from extra packages 137 Mathematics lt lt gt gt AUSEP E USepA d ox3doxdx 30 UTJ0U El TUN UIN 5 UMOIF b 30p baxYesdnsbsy E boapsansbs 3 SOTTUS bou z qesdnsbs E yesansbs 3 buoowN bpeaesdns E beassgnsy gt ITIMOQN Da xoidde RS qesdns E qesqns D TPTTeTed duAse JN lt TIN gt pru bautsy zm beoonswN Z boosad dized T UISN oons lt 2 Id sTepow Atnbe beb lt bet gt yd as ID WH yd as ID WH yd as ID WH 1du3e Joqui s yd as joqwAs spoqw g uogepy 138 List of Mathematical Symbols
321. med after cities e g Barcelona Madrid Berlin etc Color themes typically with animal names can be specified with Nusecolortheme beaver This Theme Matrix contains the various theme and color combinations included with beamer For more customizing options have a look to the official documentation included in your distribution of beamer particularly the part Change the way it looks The list of all themes Antibes Bergen Berkeley Berlin Boadilla Copenhagen Darmstadt Dresden Frankfurt Goettingen Hannover Ilmenau JuanLesPins Luebeck Madrid Malmoe Marburg Montpellier PaloAlto Pittsburgh Rochester Singapore Szeged Warsaw boxes default The do it yourself solution First you can specify the outertheme The outertheme defines the head and the footline of each slide useoutertheme infolines Here is a list of all available outer themes infolines miniframes shadow sidebar smoothbars 4 http www hartwork org beamer theme matrix 220 The Beamer package smoothtree split tree Then you can add the innertheme useinnertheme rectangles Here is a list of all available inner themes rectangles circles e inmargin rounded You can define the color of every element setbeamercolor alerted text fg orange setbeamercolor background canvas bg white setbeamercolor block body alerted bg normal text bg 90 black setbeamercolor block body bg normal t
322. miliar to fancyhdr and titleps which takes a one stage approach without having to use leftmark or rightmark 12 4 Multi column pages It is common to see articles and conference proceedings formatted with two columns of text However such publishers will usually provide you with their own document class which automatically implements this format without you having to do anything It is very easy to format your page in this way If you are using a standard Latex document class then you can simply pass the optional argument twocolumn to the document class documentclass twocolumn article which will give the desired effect While this simple addition will do the job 9 out of 10 times it is widely acknowledged that there are many limitations of this approach and that the multicol package is much more useful for handling multiple columns It has several advantages Can support up to ten columns mplements a multicols environment therefore it is possible to mix the number of columns within a document 106 Manual page formatting Additionally the environment can be nested inside other environments such as figure Multicol outputs balanced columns whereby the columns on the final page will be of roughly equal length Vertical rules between columns can be customised Column environments can be easily customised locally or globally Floats are not fully supported by this environment It can only cope if you use
323. mode not to include some only commands by only lt 1 handout 0 gt includegraphics picl eps only lt 2 gt includegraphics pic2 eps The command can also be used to hide frames e g begin frame lt handout 0 gt or even if you have written a frame that you don t want anymore but maybe you will need it later you can write begin frame lt 0 handout 0 gt and this will hide your slide in both modes The order matters Don t put handout Olbeamer 0 or it won t work A last word about the handout mode is about the notes Actually the full syntax for a frame is begin frame end frame note note and you can write your notes about a frame in the field note many of them if needed Using this you can add an option to the class calling either documentclass 12pt handout notes only beamer or documentclass 12pt handout notes show beamer The first one is useful when you make a presentation to have only the notes you need while the second one could be given to those who have followed your presentation or those who missed it for them to have both the slides with what you said 224 The Beamer package Note that the handout option in the documentclass line suppress all the animations Important the notes only mode is literally doing only the notes This means there will be no output file but the DVI Thus it requires you to have run the compilation in another mode before If you
324. mp amp latex filename tex where xxxx should be replaced by the pad number something like z7rSrfrYcH e You could use more modern distributed version control systems like Mercurial or Git 35 2 Introduction The collaborative preparation of documents requires a considerable amount of coordination among the authors This coordination can be organised in many different ways where the best way depends on the specific circumstances In this Wikibook I describe how the collaborative writing of LaTeX documents is organised at our department Division of Agricultural Policy Department of Agricultural Economics University of Kiel Germany I present our software tools and describe how we use them Thus this Wikibook provides some ideas and hints that will be useful for other LaTeX users who prepare documents together with their co authors 35 3 Interchanging Documents There are many ways to interchange documents among authors One possibility is to compose documents by interchanging e mail messages This method has the advantage that common users generally do not have to install and learn the usage of any extra software because virtually all authors have an e mail account Furthermore the author who has modified the document can easily attach 10 http monkeytex bradcater webfactional com II http www getdropbox com 12 http en wikipedia org wiki Gobby 13 http docs google com 14 http docs latexlab org 15 http t
325. much cleaner Moreover all the info about your style will be within one file so when you will start another document you ll just have to copy that file and include it properly so you ll have exactly the same style you have used Creating your own style is very simple create a file called nystyle sty you could name it as you wish but it has to end with sty Write at the beginning ProvidesPackage mystyle Then add all the packages you want with the standard command usepackage as you would do normally change the value of all the variables you want etc It will work like the code you put here would be copied and pasted within your document For a list of several packages you can use see the List of Packages section 37 4 The main document document tex Then create a file called document tex this will be the main file the one you will compile even 1f you shouldn t need to edit it very often because you will be working on other files It should look like this 1t s the sample code for a report but you might easily change it for an article or whatever else Ndocumentclass 12pt a4paper report usepackage graphicx usepackage ifpdf ifpdf put here packages only for the PDF DeclareGraphicsExtensions pdf png jpg mps usepackage hyperref else put here packages only for the DVI fi put all the other packages here 4 Chapter 28 3 on page 249 306 The main document document tex
326. n You need it if you want to add some text within the code that will not be printed Note that by default comments of the language you are inserting will be printed the command escapeinside A B will define comments for listings only All the code between the string A and B will be ignored In the example above the comments for Octave start with and they are going to be printed in the document unless they start with but you have to remember to close the comment with another If you add the above paragraph the following can be used to alter the settings within the code lstset language C caption Descriptive Caption Text label Descriptivelabel A lot more detailed information can be found in a PDF by Carsten Heinz and Brooks Moses Details and documentation about the Listings package can be found at its CTAN website 3 http mirror hmc edu ctan macros latex contrib listings listings pdf 4 http www ctan org tex archive macros latex contrib listings 261 31 Rotating package The package rotating gives you the possibility to rotate any object of an arbitrary angle Once you have loaded it with the standard command in the preamble usepackage rotating you can use three new environments begin sideways it will rotate the whole argument by 90 degrees counterclockwise Moreover begin turn 30 it will turn the argument of 30 degrees You can give any a
327. n and chapter heading respectively The values of these two commands are overwritten whenever a chapter or section command is processed For ultimate flexibility the chapter command and its friends do not redefine rightmark and leftmark 2 http www ctan org tex archive macros latex contrib fancyhdr fancyhdr pdf 101 Page Layout themselves They call yet another command Nchaptermark sectionmark Or subsectionmark that is responsible for redefining rightmark and leftmark except if they are starred in such a case chaptermark etc must be used after the sectioning command if header and footer lines are to be updated If you want to change the look of the chapter name in the header line you need only renew the chaptermark command To begin add the following lines to your preamble usepackage fancyhdr setlength headheight 15 2pt pagestyle fancy The second line will prevent LaTeX from giving a warning Both the header and footer comprise three elements each according to its horizontal position left centre or right To set their values the following commands are available lhead lt lh even gt lt lh odd gt chead lt ch even gt lt ch odd gt rhead lt rh even gt lt rh odd gt lfoot lt 1f even gt lt lf odd gt cfoot lt cf even gt lt cf odd gt rfoot lt rf even gt lt rf odd gt Hopefully the behaviour of the above comman
328. n commands use the newcommand name num definition command Basically the command requires two arguments the name of the command you want to create and the definition of the command The num argument in square brackets is optional and specifies the number of arguments the new command takes up to 9 are possible If missing it defaults to 0 i e no argument allowed The following two examples should help you to get the idea The first example defines a new command called wbal that will print The Wikibook about LaTeX Such a command could come in handy if you had to write the title of this book over and over again This is The Wikibook about LaTeX m The Wikibook about LaTeX newcommand wbal The Wikibook about LaTex This is wbal ldots wbal The next example illustrates how to define a new command that takes one argument The 1 tag gets replaced by the argument you specify If you wanted to use more than one argument use 2 and so on these arguments are added in an extra set of brackets 273 Customizing LaTeX This is the Wikibook about LaTeX sup newcommand wbalsup 1 This is the Wikibook about LaTeX ported by Wikimedia supported by 1 This is the Wikibook about LaTeX sup newcommand wbalTwo 2 1 This is the Wikibook about LaTeX ported by lots of users supported by 1 2 This is the Wikibook about LaTeX sup in the document body begin itemize
329. n earlier or later point in the text or by adjusting some of the parameters which control automatic floating Authors sometimes have many floats occurring in rapid succession which raises the problem of how they are supposed to fit on the page and still leave room for text In this case LaTeX stacks them all up and prints them together if possible or leaves them to the end of the chapter in protest The skill is to space them out within your text so that they intrude neither on the thread of your argument or discussion nor on the visual balance of the typeset pages 24 1 1 Figures To create a figure that floats use the figure environment begin figure placement specifier figure contents end figure 1 Chapter 22 on page 183 2 Chapter 24 2 8 on page 212 203 Floats Figures and Captions The previous section mentioned how floats are used to allow LaTeX to handle figures while maintaining the best possible presentation However there may be times when you disagree and a typical example is with its positioning of figures The placement specifier parameter exists as a compromise and its purpose is to give the author a greater degree of control over where certain floats are placed Specifier Permission h Place the float here i e approximately at the same point it occurs in the source text however not exactly at the spot Position at the top of the page Position at the bottom of the page Put on a spe
330. n include commands that influence the style of the whole document or you can load packages that add new features to the LaTeX system To load such a package you use the command usepackage When all the setup work is done you start the body of the text with the command begin document Now you enter the text mixed with some useful LaTeX commands At the end of the document you add the end document command which tells LaTeX to call it a day Anything that follows this command will be ignored by LaTeX The area between documentclass and begin document is called the preamble 5 2 1 Document Classes The first information LaTeX needs to know when processing an input file is the type of document the author wants to create This is specified with the documentclass command documentclass options class Here class specifies the type of document to be created The LaTeX distribution provides additional classes for other documents including letters and slides The options parameter customizes the behavior of the document class The options have to be separated by commas Example an input file for a LaTeX document could start with the line documentclass 11pt twoside a4paper article 4 Chapter 12 on page 95 22 Input File Structure which instructs LaTeX to typeset the document as an article with a base font size of 11 points and to produce a layout suitable for double sided printing on A4 paper Here
331. n the SVN server on a GNU Linux system because most Linux distributions include it In this sense installing configuring and maintaining SVN is a very simple task Most MS Windows users access the SVN server by the TortoiseSVN client because it provides the most usual interface for common users Linux users usually use SVN utilities from the command line or eSvn a GUI frontend with KDiff37 for showing complex differences 35 5 Hosting LaTeX files in Subversion Repository Browser a t O branches agrarpol bib 808 Jul 25 17 24 i C3tags Strunk latex zj URL svn svnAgrarkiel dyndns org tex Checkout View Close Figure 70 Figure 1 Common texmf tree shown in eSvns Repository Browser On our Subversion server we have one repository for a common texmf tree Its structure complies with the TeX Directory Structure guidelines TDS http www tug org tds tds html see figure 1 This repository provides LaTeX classes LaTeX styles and BibTeX styles that are not available in 22 http www dyndns com 23 http subversion tigris org links html 24 http tortoisesvn tigris org 25 http zoneit free fr esvn 26 http kdiff3 sourceforge net 282 Hosting LaTeX files in Subversion the LaTeX distributions of the users e g because they were bought or developed for the internal use at our department All users have a working copy of this repository and have configured LaTeX to use this as their
332. n wikibooks org wiki User 3ADirk 20H FCnniger 451 http en wikibooks org wiki User 3ADirk 20H FCnniger 452 http en wikibooks org wiki User 3ADirk 20H FCnniger 453 http en wikibooks org wiki User 3ADirk 20H FCnniger 454 http en wikibooks org wiki User 3ADirk 20H FCnniger 455 http en wikibooks org wiki User 3ADirk 20H FCnniger 456 http en wikibooks org wiki User 3ADirk 20H FCnniger 457 http en wikibooks org wiki User 3ADirk 20H FCnniger 458 http en wikibooks org wiki User 3ADirk 20H FCnniger 459 http en wikibooks org wiki User 3ADirk 20H FCnniger 460 http en wikibooks org wiki User 3ADirk 20H FCnniger 461 http en wikibooks org wiki User 3ADirk 20H FCnniger 462 http en wikibooks org wiki User 3ADirk 20H FCnniger 463 http en wikibooks org wiki User 3ADirk 20H FCnniger 464 http en wikibooks org wiki User 3ADirk 20H FCnniger 465 http en wikibooks org wiki User 3ADirk 20H FCnniger 466 http en wikibooks org wiki User 3ADirk 20H FCnniger 467 http en wikibooks org wiki User 3ADirk 20H FCnniger 468 http en wikibooks org wiki User 3ADirk 20H FCnniger 387 List of Figures 28 Dirk H nniger cc by sa 3 0 29 Dirk H nniger cc by sa 3 0 30 Alessio Damato GFDL 31 Tomato86 GFDL 32 Alessio Damato 3 GFDL 33 ChrisHodgesUK 34 Winfree gt PD 35 Tomato867
333. naldo and G raldine Henningsen for comments and sugges tions that helped him to improve and clarify this paper Karsten Heymann for many hints and advices regarding LaTeX BibTeX and Subversion and Christian Henning as well as his colleagues for supporting his intention to establish LaTeX and Subversion at their department 35 10 References Fenn Jiirgen 2006 Managing citations and your bibliography with BibTeX The PracTEX Journal 4 http www tug org pracjourn 2006 4 fenn Markey Nicolas 2005 Tame the BeaST The B to X of BibTeX http www ctan org tex archive info bibtex tamethebeast ttb en pdf Version 1 3 Oren Patashnik Designing BibTeX styles http www ctan org tex archive info biblio bibtex contrib doc btxhak pdf Tools for collaborative paper writing 37 http www ctan org tex archive info bibtex tamethebeast ttb en pdf 38 http mathoverflow net questions 3044 tools for collaborative paper writing 290 36 Tips and Tricks 36 1 Always writing LaTeX in roman If you insert the A LaTeX command in an area with a non default font it will be formatted accordingly If you want to keep LaTeX written in Computer Modern roman shape you must redefine the function However the naive renewcommand LaTeX rm LaTeX will output TeX capacity exceeded sorry grouping levels 255 So you need to create a temporary variable Sadly newcommand LaTeXtemp LaTeX Nrenewcommand NLaTeX Nr
334. nces 1 P W Abrahams K A Hargreaves and K Berry TgXfor the Impatient 2003 2 L Lamport ATEX A Document Preparation System Addison Wesley second Edition 1994 Figure4 abbrv Instead of WYSIWYG editors typesetting systems like TEX AHBO03 or KIEX Lam94 can be used References AHB03 Paul W Abrahams Kathryn A Hargreaves and Karl Berry TEXfor the Impatient 2003 Lam94 Leslie Lamport ATpX A Document Preparation System Addison Wesley second Edition 1994 Figure5 alpha To number the references in order of appearance rather than alphabetical order use ieeetr bibliographystyle ieeetr Style Name Author Name For Reference Format Sorting mat plain Homer Jay Simpson ID by author unsrt Homer Jay Simpson ID as referenced abbrv H J Simpson ID by author alpha Homer Jay Simpson Sim95 by author abstract Homer Jay Simpson Simpson 1995a acn Simpson H J FIDA authordatel Simpson Homer Jay Simpson 1995 apa Simpson H J Simpson1995 1995 named Homer Jay Simpson Simpson 1995 65 Bibliography Management Web page http www cs stir ac uk kjt software latex showbst htm1 contains more examples Examples given in PDF format http amath colorado edu documentation LaTeX reference faq bibstyles pdf More info can also be found on http amath colorado edu documentation LaTeX reference faq bibstyles html 9 3 9 Including URLs in bibl
335. nd LaTeX A document preparation system by L Lamport 2 3 Other terms regarding TeX When searching for information on LaTeX you might also stumble upon XeTeX ConTeXt LuaTeX gt or other names with a TeX suffix XeTeX is a TeX engine which uses Unicode and 10 http en wikipedia org wiki WYSIWYM ll http en wikipedia org wiki DVI 20file 20format 12 http www ctan org 13 http en wikipedia org wiki XeTeX 14 http en wikipedia org wiki ConTeXt 15 http en wikipedia org wiki LuaTeX Introduction supports widely popular tt f and ot f fonts LuaTeX is another engine with Lua scripting engine embedded aiming at making TeX internals more flexible ConTeXt is a TeX based document preparation system as LaTeX is with a very consistent and easy syntax and support for pdf TeX XeTeX and LuaTeX engines It does not have the same objective as LaTeX however Therefore code written for TeX LaTeX or ConTeXt are mostly not compatible Additionnaly engine specific code like font for XeTeX may not be compiled by every engine 2 4 Prerequisites At a minimum you ll need a TeX distribution a good text editor and a DVI or PDF viewer But if this is the first time you are trying out LaTeX you don t even need to install anything Just create an user account at ScribTeX com and continue this tutorial in the next chapter ScribTeX is a web based online editor for LaTeX documents with collaboration capabilities
336. nd LaTeX will take care of numbering updating it whenever necessary The commands to be used do not depend on what you are referencing and they are Mlabel marker you give the object you want to reference a marker you can see it like a name ref marker you can reference the object you have marked before This prints the number that was assigned to the object pageref marker It will print the number of the page where the object is LaTeX will calculate the right numbering for the objects in the document the marker you have used to label the object will not be shown anywhere in the document Then LaTeX will replace the string ref marker with the right number that was assigned to the object If you reference a marker that does not exist the compilation of the document will be successful but LaTeX will return a warning LaTeX Warning There were undefined references and it will replace ref unknown marker with so it will be easy to find in the docu ment As you may have noticed reading how it works it is a two step process first the compiler has to store the labels with the right number to be used for referencing then it has to replace the ref with the right number That is why when you use references you have to compile your document twice to see the proper output If you compile it only once LaTeX will use the older information it collected in previous compilations that might be outdated
337. nd tabular end minipage end table 12 3 Page styles Page styles in Latex terms refers not to page dimensions but to the running headers and footers of a document These headers typically contain document titles chapter or section numbers names and page numbers 12 3 1 Standard page styles The possibilities of changing the headers in plain Latex are actually quite limited There are two commands available pagestyle style will apply the specified style to the current and all subsequent pages and thispagestyle style will only affect the current page The possible styles are empty Both header and footer are clear plain Header is clear but the footer contains the page number in the center 100 Page styles headings Footer is blank header displays information according to document class e g section name and page number top right myheadings Page number is top right and it is possible to control the rest of the header With myheadings the commands markright in the standard document classes book report and article and narkboth only in the book class are used to control the headings The following commands placed at the beginning of an article document will set the header of all pages to contain John Smith top left On page styles centered and the page number top right pagestyle myheadings markright John Smith hfill On page styles hfill An issue to look out for is that the major sectionin
338. nd the tool dvipng may be used to generate png output for small amounts of LaTeX code for example to render equations for use in presentations See LaTeX T ips and Tricks amp Generate png screenshots for more details 38 5 1 PNG To convert from PDF open your file with GIMPP It will ask you which page you want to convert whether you want to use anti aliasing choose strong if you want to get something similar to what you see on the screen Try different resolutions to fit your needs but 100 dpi should be enough Once you have the image within GIMP you can post process it as you like and save it to any format supported by GIMP as PNG for example A method for DVI files is dvipng usage is the same as 10 http hevea inria fr ll http www cse ohio state edu gurari TeX4ht 12 Chapter 36 5 3 on page 297 13 http en wikibooks org wiki GIMP 14 http savannah nongnu org projects dvipng 312 Convert to plain text dvipdfm Also the convert command from the ImageMagick suite can convert both DVI and PDF files to PNG You can optimize the resulting image using optipng so that it will take up less space 38 5 2 SVG Direct conversion from PDF to SVG can be done using the command line tool pdf2svg If you are using Linux or FreeBSD or MacPorts pdf2svg might also be installable via the package installer pdf2svg file pdf file svg Alternatively DVI or PDF can be converted to PS as described
339. ner user or installer has chosen not to follow the recommended TDS directory structure or is unable to do so for political or security reasons such as a shared system where she cannot write to a protected directory The reason for having the texmf local directory called texm 10cal on some systems is to provide a place for local modifications or personal updates especially if you are a user on a shared or managed system Unix Linux VMS Windows NT 2000 XP etc where you may not have write access to the main TeX installation directory tree You can also have a personal texmf subdirectory in your own login directory Your installation must be configured to look in these directories first however so that any updates to standard packages will be found there before the superseded copies in the main texmf tree All modern TeX installations should do this anyway but if not you can edit texmf web2c texmf cnf yourself 258 30 Listings package Using the package listings you can add non formatted text as you would do with begin verbatim but its main aim is to include the source code of any programming lan guage within your document If you wish to include pseudocode or algorithms you may find LaTeX Algorithms_and_Pseudocode useful also To use the package you need usepackage listings The listings package supports highlighting of all the most common languages and it is highly customizable If you just want to write code within y
340. nfortunately it is partially incompatible with the dcolumn package One needs to either use dots in columns with numerical data in the source file and make dcolumn switch them to commas for display or define the column as follows begin tabular D mathord mathcomma 2 The alternative is to use the numprint package but it is much less convenient Further information Refer the Stownik Ortograficzny in Polish for additional information on polish grammar and typography rules Good extract is available at Zasady Typograficzne Sktadania Tekstu in Polish 39 4 14 Portuguese Add the following code to your preamble usepackage portuguese babel usepackage latinl inputenc usepackage T1 fontenc if you are in Brazil you can substitute the language for brazilian portuguese by choosing brazilian The first line is to get everything translated properly the second is for being able to input text correctly and the third one to get the hyphenation of words with diacritics right Note that we are using the latin input encoding here so this will not work on a Mac or on DOS Just use the appropriate encoding for your system If you are using Linux use usepackage ut f8 inputenc 39 4 15 Slovak Basic settings are fine when left the same as Czech but Slovak needs special signs for d CT To be able to type them from keyboard use the following settings 15 http so pwn pl zasady php 16 http dtp msstudio
341. ngle as an argument whether it is positive or negative It will leave the necessary space to avoid any overlapping of text begin rotate 30 like turn but it will not add any extra space If you want to make a float sideways so that the caption is also rotated you can use begin sidewaysfigure or begin sidewaystable Note though they will be placed on a separate page If you would like to rotate a tikz picture you could use sideways minipage begin figure htbp begin sideways begin minipage 17 5cm input path to picture end minipage end sideways 263 Rotating package Ncentering caption Caption Caption label pic picture end figure 31 1 Options The rotating package takes the following options counterclockwise anticlockwise in single sided documents turn sidewaysfigures sidewaystables counterclockwise clockwise default in single sided documents turn sidewaysfigures sidewaystables clockwise figuresright in two sided documents all sidewaysfigures sidewaystables are same orientation left of figure table now bottom of page This is the style preferred by the Chicago Manual of Style broadside figuresleft in two sided documents all sidewaysfigures sidewaystables are same orientation left of figure table now at top of page default in two sided documents sidewaysfigures sidewaystables are oriented depen
342. nkscape cannot open EPS figures directly however with the epstopdf utility one can convert EPS into PDF and Inkscape can import PDF From version 0 48 Inkscape has a special PDF LaTeX output option and for EPS PS too See Inkscape website e Dia is a cross platform diagramming utility which can export eps images or generate tex drawn using the tikz package Creating and converting raster only graphics to EPS Commercial product Adobe Photoshop can save to EPS http en wikipedia org wiki Encapsulated 20PostScript http en wikipedia org wiki Vector 20graphics http sourceforge net projects pdfcreator http www inkscape org http www ctan org tex archive support epstopdf http wiki inkscape org wiki index php LaTeX http live gnome org Dia VD GO JA Ch LE L 184 The graphicx package e GIMP has a graphical user interface and it is multi platform For command line Sam2p convert or ImageMagick convert or e GraphicsMagick gm convert These three programs operate much the same way and can convert between most graphics formats Sam2p however is the most recent of the three and seems to offer both the best quality and to result in the smallest files e imgtops A lightweight graphics utility Creating publication quality vector based plots and charts e Gnuplot gt producing scientific graphics since 1986 e R 6 statistical and scientific figures e Generic Mapping Too
343. nned If there is no data for a cell just don t type anything but you still need the amp separating it from the next column s data The astute reader will already have deduced that for a table of n columns there must always be n 1 ampersands in each row The exception to this is when nulticolumn and multirow are used to create cells which span multiple columns or rows 10 3 3 Spanning in both directions simultaneously Here is a nontrivial example of how to use spanning in both directions simultaneously and have the borders of the cells drawn correctly Primes Nusepackage multirow begin tabular cclclclclcll cline 3 6 amp amp multicolumn amp amp 2 amp 365 7 multicolumn 1 multicolumn 1 multicolumn 1 multicolumn 1 multicolumn 1 multicolumn 1 multicolumn 1 multicolumn 1 end tabular cel Primes NN cline 3 6 cline 1 6 cd min ZC 504 6 3828 0616 clinetfkem 3 max amp 540 2 amp 38 1 amp 0 amp Figure 18 56 1 6 multirow 2 Powers amp gcd amp 2 amp 2 amp O0 amp O amp min NN cline 2 6 amp lem amp 3 amp 3 amp 1 amp 1 amp max NN cline 1 6 gt 2 3 2 2 gt a Do oo po oo oO EE EE The command multicolumn 1 88 Resize tables Here is another example exploiting the same ideas to make the familiar and popu The command 89 Tables 17 18
344. nnumbered equation array and remove the now unnecessary nonumber 236 Problems with Bookmarks commands If your url s are too long and running off of the page try using the breakurl package to split the url over multiple lines This is especially important in a multicolumn environment where the line width is greatly shortened 26 6 Problems with Bookmarks The text displayed by bookmarks does not always look like you expect it to look Because bookmarks are just text much fewer characters are available for bookmarks than for normal LaTeX text Hyperref will normally notice such problems and put up a warning Package hyperref Warning Token not allowed in a PDFDocEncoded string You can now work around this problem by providing a text string for the bookmarks which replaces the offending text Ntexorpdfstring TEX text Bookmark Text Math expressions are a prime candidate for this kind of problem section texorpdfstring E mc 2 E mc2 which turns section E mc 2 to E mc2 in the bookmark area Color changes also do not travel well into bookmarks section textcolor red Red produces the string redRed The command textcolor gets ignored but its argument red gets printed If you use section texorpdfstring textcolor red Red Red the result will be much more legible If you write your document in unicode and use the unicode option for the hyperref p
345. notation differently than normal text Therefore special environments have been declared for this purpose They can be distinguished into two categories depending on how they are presented fext text formulas are displayed in line that is within the body of text where it is declared e g I can say that a a 2a within this sentence displayed displayed formulas are separate from the main text As maths require special environments there are naturally the appropriate environment names you can use in the standard way Unlike most other environments however there are some handy shorthands to declaring your formulas The following table summarizes them 1 http www ams org publications authors tex amslatex 2 http www tex ac uk ctan macros latex contrib mh mathtools pdf 111 Mathematics Type Environment LaTeX TeX short shorthand hand Text begin math end math NC es NX Su S Displayed begin displaymath end displ dym th SS or begin fequation end equationk 3 Note Using the S should be avoided as it may cause problems particularly with the AMS LaTeX macros Furthermore should a problem occur the error messages may not be helpful Additionally there is a second possible environment for the displayed type of formulas equation The difference between this and displaymath isthat equation also adds sequential equation numbers by the side If you are typing t
346. ns and probably no clue The following list explains the most common file types you might encounter when working with TeX Common file extensions in LaTeX aux A file that transports information from one compiler run to the next Among other things the aux file is used to store information associated with cross references bbl Bibliography file output by BiBTeX and used by LaTeX bib Bibliography database file blg BiBTeX log file bst BiBTeX style file Le Class files define what your document looks like They are selected with the documentclass command edt x Documented TeX This is the main distribu tion format for LaTeX style files If you pro cess a dtx file you get documented macro code of the LaTeX package contained in the dtx file ins The installer for the files contained in the matching dtx file If you download a La TeX package from the net you will normally geta dtxanda ins file Run LaTeX on the ins file to unpack the dt x file fd Font description file telling LaTeX about new fonts dvi Device Independent File This is the main result of a LaTeX compile run with atex You can look at its content with a DVI previewer program or you can send it to a printer with dvips or a similar application pdf Portable Document Format This is the main result of a LaTeX compile run with pdflatex You can look at its content or print it with any PDF viewer
347. ns are described in the algorithmicx manual http mirror ctan org macros latex contrib algorithmicx algorithmicx pdf 168 The algorithm environment 19 3 The algorithm environment It is often useful for the algorithm produced by algorithmic to be floated to the optimal point in the document to avoid it being split across pages The algorithm environment provides this and a few other useful features Include it by adding the usepackage algorithm to your document s preamble It is entered into by begin algorithm caption lt your caption for this algorithm gt label lt your label for references later in your document gt begin algorithmic lt algorithmic environment gt end algorithmic end algorithm 19 3 1 Algorithm numbering The default numbering system for the algorithm package is to number algorithms sequentially This is often not desirable particularly in large documents where numbering according to chapter is more appropriate The numbering of algorithms can be influenced by providing the name of the document component within which numbering should be recommenced The legal values for this option are part chapter section subsection subsubsection or nothing default For example usepackage chapter algorithm 19 3 2 List of algorithms When you use figures or tables you can add a list of them close to the table of contents the algorithm package provides a similar command Just put listof
348. nt preamble The List of Figures LoF and List of Tables LoT names can be changed by replacing the Ncontentsname with listfigurename for LoF and listtablename for LoT Depth The default ToC will list headings of level 3 and above To change how deep the table of contents displays automatically the following command can be used in the preamble setcounter tocdepth 4 This will make the table of contents include everything down to paragraphs The levels are defined above on this page Note that this solution does not permit changing the depth dynamically You can change the depth of specific section type which could be useful for PDF bookmarks if you are using the hyperref package makeatletter Nrenewcommand Ntoclevel chapter 1 Put chapter depth at the same level as part chapter Epilog Nrenewcommand Ntoclevel chapter 0 Put chapter depth back to its default value makeatother In order to further tune the display or the numbering of the table of contents for instance if the appendix should be less detailed you can make use of the tocvsec2 package CTAN doch 4 Chapter 15 6 on page 156 5 http www ctan org pkg tocvsec2 6 http mirror ctan org macros latex contrib tocvsec2 tocvsec2 pdf 37 Document Structure 6 1 8 The Bibliography Any good research paper will have a whole list of references There are two ways to insert your references into LaTeX you can embed them w
349. o work 17 2 Defining glossary entries To use an entry from glossary you first need to define it There are few ways to define an entry depending on what you define and how it is going to be used Note that a defined entry won t be included in the printed glossary unless it is used in the document This enables you to create a glossary of general terms and just include it in all your documents 1 Chapter on page 161 Glossary 17 3 Defining terms To define a term in glossary you use newglossaryentry macro newglossaryentry is a unique label used to identify an entry in glossary settings are comma separated pairs used to define an entry For example to define a computer entry The above example defines an entry that has the same label and entry name This is not always the case as the next entry will show When you define terms you need to remember that they will be sorted by or While is a bit more LaTeX aware it does it by ommiting latex macros thus incorrectly sorting the above example as won t fare much better because it doesn t understand TeX macros it will interpret the word exactly as it was defined putting it inside symbol class before words beginning with Therefore it s needed to extend our example and specify how to sort the word You can also specify plural forms if they are not formed by adding s we will learn how to use them in next section Defined entries can also be symbols
350. of Contents with proper numbering The tocbibind package can also handle including the List of Figures List of Tables and the Table of Contents itself in the Table of Contents It has many options for numbering document structure etc to fit almost any scenario See the tocbibind CTAN page for detailed documentation 9 4 2 Other methods As unnumbered item If you want your bibliography to be in the table of contents just add the following two lines just before the thebibliography environment clearpage addcontentsline toc chapter Bibliography 42 http www ctan org tex archive macros latex contrib tocbibind 72 Bibliography in the table of contents OR Naddcontentsline toc section Bibliography if you re writing an article The first line just terminates the current paragraph and page If you are writing a book use Ncleardoublepage to match the style used The second line will add a line in the Table of Contents first option toc it will be like the ones created by chapters second option chapter and the third argument will be printed on the corresponding line in the Table of Contents here Bibli ography was chosen because it s the same text the thebibliography environment will automatically write when you use it but you are free to write whatever you like If you are using separate bib file add these lines between Nbibliographystyle and bibliography If you use hyperref package you should also use
351. of SVN and use diff tools that are local on their workstations they can put to use such tools that are more tailored to text documents The diff tool that comes with SVN was designed with source code in mind As such it is built to be more useful for files of short lines Other tools such as Compare It allows to conveniently compare text files where each line can span hundreds of characters such as when each line represents a paragraph When using a diff tool that allows convenient views of files with long lines the users can author the TeX files without a strict line breaking policy 35 6 1 Visualizing diffs in LaTeX latexdiff and changebar The tools latexdiff and changebar can visualize differences of two LaTeX files inside a generated document This makes it easier to see impact of certain changes or discuss changes with people not custom to LaTeX Changebar comes with a script chbar sh which inserts a bar in the margin indicating parts that have changed Latexdiff allows different styles of visualization The default is that discarded text is marked as red and added text is marked as blue It also supports a mode similar to Changebar which adds a bar in the margin Latexdiff comes with a script latexrevise which can be used to accept or decline changes It also has a wrapper script to support version control systems such as the discussed Subversion 33 http www ctan org tex archive support latexdiff 34 http www ctan org tex arc
352. of a library and the shelf mark This 288 Conclusion field can be added in JabRef by selecting Options Set up general fields and adding the word location using the semicolon as delimiter somewhere in the line that starts with General see figure 4 XX JabRef preferences D General PDF and PS links Groups S S home suapmo95 Net BibTeX BODEN HE Main PDF directory fhome suapmoss Net BibTeX Main PS directory home suapmO95 Net BibTex Entry table Entry table columns Kev pattern Entry preview External programs Name formatter Path to PDF viewer kpdf XMP metadata Advanced C Use Regular Expression Search bibtexkey AX extension Path to PS viewer gv Path to HTML viewer mozilla Import preferences Expor preferences j Path to LyX pipe home suapmo095 lyx lyxpipe l OK J Cancel Figure 74 Figure 5 Specify Mam PDF directory in JabRef Third we put all PDF files of publications in a specific subdirectory in our file server where we use the BibTeX key as file name We inform JabRef about this subdirectory by selecting Options gt Preferences External programs and adding the path of the this subdirectory in the field Main PDF directory see figure 5 If a PDF file of a publication is available the user can push the Auto button left of JabRefs Pdf field to automatically add the file name of the PDF file Now a
353. of the work with that Major Component or to implement a Standard Interface for which an implementation is available 10 the public in source code form A Major Component in this context means a major essential component kernel window system and so on of the specific operating system if any on which the executable work runs or a compiler used to produce the work or an object code interpreter used to run it The Corresponding Source for a work in object code form means all the source code needed to generate install and for an executable work run the object code and to modify the work including scripts to control those activities However it does not include the work s System Libraries or general purpose tools or generally available free programs which are used unmodified in performing those activities but which are not part of the work For example Corresponding Source includes interface definition files asso ciated with source files for the work and the source code for shared libraries and dynamically linked subprograms that the work is specifically designed to require such as by intimate data communication or control flow between those subprograms and other parts of the work The Corresponding Source need not include anything that users can regener ate automatically from other parts of the Corresponding Source The Corresponding Source for a work in source code form is that same work 2 Basic Permissions All ri
354. ollection of suggestions about writing a LaTeX document in a language other than English If you have experience in a language not listed below please add some notes about it 39 4 Hyphenating languages 39 4 1 Arabic script For languages which use the Arabic script including Arabic Persian Urdu Pashto Kurdish Uyghur etc add the following code to your preamble usepackage arabtex You can input text in either romanized characters or native Arabic script encodings Use any of the following commands environment to enter in text NS ie E KEE ste 4 begin arabtext end arabtext See the ArabTeX Wikipedia article for further details You may also use the Arabi package within babel to typeset Arabic and Persian usepackage LAE LFE fontenc Nusepackage utf8 inputenc usepackage farsi arabic babel You may use Arabi with Lyx or with tex4ht to produce HTML You may also copy and paste from PDF files produced with Arabi thanks to the support of the cmap package See Arabi page on CTAN 39 4 2 Persian script For Persian language there is a dedicated package called XePersian which uses XeLaTeX as the typesetting engine Just add the following code to your preamble usepackage xepersian See XePersian page on CTAN Moreover Arabic script can be used to type Persian as illustrated in the previous subsection 4 http en wikipedia org wiki ArabTeX 5 http tug ctan org tex archive language arabic ar
355. om the Babel package and not from LaTeX this error is very common and can give some strange hyphenation word breaking problems in your document Wrong hyphenation rules can decrease the neatness of your document Package babel Warning No hyphenation patterns were loaded for babel the language Latin babel I will use the patterns loaded for Mlanguage 0 instead This can happen after the usage of see LaTeX Internationalization Nusepackage latin babel The solution is not difficult just install the used language in your LaTeX distribution 7 3 9 Package babel Error You haven t loaded the option X yet If you previously set the X language and then decided to switch to Y you will get this error This may seem awkward as there is obviously no error in your code if you did not change anything The answer lies in the aux file where babel defined your language If you try the compilation a second time it should work If not delete the aux file then everything will work as usual 7 3 10 Software that can check your tex Code There are several programs capable of checking LaTeX source with the aim of finding errors or highlighting bad practice and providing more help to particularly novice users than the built in error messages e nag www ctan org tex archive macros latex contrib nag is a LaTeX package designed to indicate the use of obsolete commands lacheck www ctan org tex archive support lacheck
356. omsection label the_label 7 Chapter 15 2 2 on page 153 156 References 15 7 References 157 16 Indexing Especially useful in printed books an index is an alphabetical list of words and expressions with the pages of the book upon which they are to be found LaTeX supports the creation of indices with its package makeidx and its support program makeindex called on some systems makeidx 16 1 Using makeidx To enable the indexing feature of LaTeX the makeidx package must be loaded in the preamble with Nusepackage makeidx and the special indexing commands must be enabled by putting the makeindex command into the input file preamble This should be done within the preamble since it tells LaTeX to create the files needed for indexing To tell LaTeX what to index use index key where key is the index entry and does not appear in the final layout You enter the index commands at the points in the text that you want to be referenced in the index likely near the reason for the key For example the text To solve various problems in physics it can be advantageous to express any arbitrary piecewise smooth function as a Fourier Series composed of multiples of sine and cosine functions can be re written as To solve various problems in physics it can be advantageous to express any arbitrary piecewise smooth function as a Fourier Series index Fourier Series composed of multiples of sine and cosine functi
357. on 1 x 2 frac 5 sqrt 25 4 times 6 2 2 end equation Figure 43 and so we have solved equation ref eq solve As you can see the label is placed soon after the beginning of the math mode In order to reference a formula you have to use an environment that adds numbers Most of the times you will be using the equation environment that is the best choice for one line formulas whether you are using amsmath or not Note also the eq prefix in the label eqref The amsmath package adds a new command for referencing formulas it is eqref It works exactly like ref but it adds brackets so that instead of printing a plain number as 5 it will print 5 This can be useful to help the reader distinguish between formulas and other things without the need to repeat the word formula before any reference Its output can be changed as desired for more information see the amsmath documentation numberwithin The amsmath package adds the numberwithin countera counterb command which replaces the simple countera by a more sophisticated counterb countera For example 4 http www ctan org tex archive macros latex contrib hyperref README 154 The varioref package numberwithin equation section in the preamble will prepend the section number to all equation numbers cases The cases package adds the numcases and the subnumcases commands which produce multi case equations with a separa
358. on is not required although you can include it if you wish 2 Various bits of info about LaTeX and its progress will be displayed If all went well the last two lines displayed in the console will be Output written on hello dvi 1 page 232 bytes Transcript written on hello log This means that your source file has been processed and the resulting document is called hello dvi which takes up 1 page and 232 bytes of space Now you may view the DVI file On Unix with X11 you cantype xdvi foo dvi on Windows you can use a program called yap yet another previewer Now evince and okular the standard document viewers for many Linux distributions are able to view DVI files This way you created the DVI file but with the same source file you can create a PDF document The steps are exactly the same as before but you have to replace the command latex with pdflatex 1 Type the command pdflatex hello as before the tex extension is not required 2 Various bits of info about LaTeX and its progress will be displayed If all went well the last two lines displayed in the console will be 26 Our first document Output written on hello pdf 1 page 5548 bytes Transcript written on hello log you can notice that the PDF document is bigger than the DVI even if it contains exactly the same information The main differences between the DVI and PDF formats are DVI needs less disk space and it is faster to c
359. on problems with a small square in the right hand margin of the problem line so they can be located quickly by a human It also suppresses the inclusion of images and shows only a frame where they would normally oc cur For example if you want a report to be in 12pt type on A4 but printed one sided in draft mode you would use documentclass 12pt a4paper oneside draft report 5 2 2 Packages While writing your document you will probably find that there are some areas where basic LaTeX cannot solve your problem If you want to include graphics colored text or source code from a file into your document you need to enhance the capabilities of LaTeX Such enhancements are called packages Packages are activated with the usepackage options package 24 Our first document command where package is the name of the package and options is a list of keywords that trigger special features in the package Some packages come with the LaTeX base distribution Others are provided separately Modern TeX distributions come with a large number of packages pre installed If you are working on a Unix system use the command texdoc for accessing package documentation For more information see the Packages section 5 3 Our first document Now we can create our first document We will produce the absolute bare minimum that is needed in order to get some output the well known Hello World approach will be suitable here
360. ons to create an entry called Fourier Series with a reference to the target page Multiple uses of index with the same key on different pages will add those target pages to the same index entry To show the index within the document merely use the command printindex It is common to place it atthe end ofthe document The default index format is two columns The showidx package that comes with LaTeX prints out all index entries in the left margin of the text This is quite useful for proofreading a document and verifying the index 159 Indexing 16 1 1 Compiling indices When the input file is processed with LaTeX each index command writes an appropriate index entry together with the current page number to a special file The file has the same name as the LaTeX input file but a different extension idx This idx file can then be processed with the makeindex program Type in the command line makeindex filename Note that filename is without extension the program will look for filename idx and use that You can optionally pass filename idx directly to the program as an argument The makeindex program generates a sorted index with the same base file name but this time with the extension ind If now the LaTeX input file is processed again this sorted index gets included into the document at the point where LaTeX finds printindex The index created by latex with the default options may not look as nice or
361. onveyed under the terms of this License b Give prominent notice with the combined library that part of it is a work based on the Library and explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work 6 Revised Versions of the GNU Lesser General Public License The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and or new versions of the GNU Lesser General Public License from time to time Such new ver sions will be similar in spirit to the present version but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns Each version is given a distinguishing version number If the Library as you received it specifies that a certain numbered version of the GNU Lesser Gen eral Public License or any later version applies to it you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that published version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation If the Library as you received it does not specify a version number of the GNU Lesser Gen eral Public License you may choose any version of the GNU Lesser General Public License ever published by the Free Software Foundation If the Library as you received it specifies that a proxy can decide whether future versions of the GNU Lesser General Public License shall apply that proxy s public statement of acceptance of any version is permanent autho rization for you to choose that version for the Library
362. or coun terclaim in a lawsuit alleging that any patent claim is infringed by making using selling offering for sale or importing the Program or any portion of it 11 Patents A contributor is a copyright holder who authorizes use under this License of the Program or a work on which the Program is based The work thus licensed is called the contributor s contributor version A contributor s essential patent claims are all patent claims owned or con trolled by the contributor whether already acquired or hereafter acquired that would be infringed by some manner permitted by this License of mak ing using or selling its contributor version but do not include claims that would be infringed only as a consequence of further modification of the con tributor version For purposes of this definition control includes the right to grant patent sublicenses in a manner consistent with the requirements of this License Each contributor grants you a non exclusive worldwide royalty free patent license under the contributor s essential patent claims to make use sell of fer for sale import and otherwise run modify and propagate the contents of its contributor version In the following three paragraphs a patent license is any express agree ment or commitment however denominated not to enforce a patent such as an express permission to practice a patent or covenant not to sue for patent infringement To gr
363. or you by setting the red to the maximum the green to one half 0 5 and the blue to the minimum definecolor orange rgb 1 0 5 0 You can use small letters rgb and choose a value between 0 and 1 or use capital letters RGB and choose a value between 0 and 255 The following code should give a similar results to the last code chunk definecolor orange RGB 255 127 0 Trick When surfing on the web you can get hexadecimal code for each color on a web page using the colorzilla extension to Firefox If you loaded the xcolor package you can define colors upon previously defined ones colorlet notgreen blue 50 yellow In the abstract the colors are defined following this scheme definecolor name model color spec where name is the name of the color you can call it as you like model is the way you describe the color and is one of gray rgb and cmyk color spec is the description of the color 27 6 3 Color Models Among the models you can use to describe the color are the following several more are described in the xcolor manual Color Models Model Descrip Color Specification Example tion 1 Chapter 30 on page 259 2 http mirror ctan org macros latex contrib xcolor xcolor pdf 244 Advanced color settings Color Models Model Descrip Color Specification Example tion gray Shades of just one number between
364. ork in any medium that con tains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it can be distributed un der the terms of this License Such a notice grants a world wide royalty free license unlimited in duration to use that work under the conditions stated herein The Document below refers to any such manual or work Any member of the public is a licensee and is addressed as you You accept the license if you copy modify or distribute the work in a way requiring permission under copyright law A Modified Version of the Document means any work containing the Doc ument or a portion of it either copied verbatim or with modifications and or translated into another language A Secondary Section is a named appendix or a front matter section of the Document that deals exclusively with the relationship of the publishers or authors of the Document to the Document s overall subject or to related matters and contains nothing that could fall directly within that overall sub ject Thus if the Document is in part a textbook of mathematics a Sec ondary Section may not explain any mathematics The relationship could be a matter of historical connection with the subject or with related matters or of legal commercial philosophical ethical or political position regarding them The Invariant Sections are certain Secondary Sections whose titles are des ignated as being those of Invariant Sections in the notice that says that the
365. oss referencing or addtocounter NameOfTheNewCounter number here the number can also be negative For automatic reseting you need to use stepcounter To set the counter value explicitly use setcounter NameOfTheNewCounter number There is several way to get access to a counter theNameOfTheNewCounter will print the formatted string related to the counter value NameOfTheNewCounter will return the counter value which can be used by other counter or for calculus It is not a formatted string so it cannot be used in text Narabic NameOfTheNewCounter will print the formatted counter using arabic numbers Instead of Narabic you could also use alph Alph roman or Roman Note that arabic NameOfTheNewCounter may be used as a value too but not the others 265 Advanced Topics Here follows an example where we want to use parts and sections but no chapters in the book class renewcommand thesection thepart arabic section part My Part section My Section subsection My Subsection Here is an example for recreating something similar to a section and subsection counter that already exist in LaTeX newcounter mysection newcounter mysubsection mysection p addtocounter mysection 2 set them to some other numbers than 0 9 addtocounter mysubsection 10 same 2 arabic mysection arabic mysubsection bla bla stepcounter mysection arabic mysection
366. otation mathrm ABCDEFabcdef123456 this is the default or normal units of measurement one font unitalicised word functions mathit ABCDEFabcdef123456 italicised font mathbf ABCDEFabcdef123456 bold font vectors mathsf ABCDEFabcdef123456 Sans serif mathtt ABCDEFabcdef123456 Monospace fixed width font 4 http en wikibooks org wiki LaTeX 2FText 20Formatting 23Font 20Styles 42 http en wikipedia org wiki sans serif 43 http en wikipedia org wiki Monospace 20font 129 Mathematics LaTeX com Sample Description Common use mand Wnathcal IBEDESA oesAy Calligraphy uppercase only often used for sheaves schemes and cat egories used to denote eryptological concepts like an alphabet of definition 4 message space M ciphertext space 6 and key space X Kleene s 0 naming convention in description logic mathfrak 99 abcocj123456 Fraktur Almost canonical font for Lie algebras with superscript used to denote New Testa ment papyri ideals in ring theory Wmathbb Y ABCDEFOOKAEZE LA Blackboard bold Used to denote special sets e g real numbers mathscr gt 4 Script An alternative font for cate gories and sheaves The maths formatting commands can be wrapped around the entire equation and not just on the textual elements they only format letters numbers and uppercase Greek and the rest of t
367. ou can put other commands and nested environments The internal mechanism of environments defines a group which makes its usage safe no influence on the other parts of the document In general environments can accept arguments as well but this feature is not commonly used and so it will be discussed in more advanced parts of the document Anything in LaTeX can be expressed in terms of commands and environments 5 1 6 Comments When LaTeX encounters a character while processing an input file it ignores the rest of the current line the line break and all whitespace at the beginning of the next line This can be used to write notes into the input file which will not show up in the printed version p This is an stupid Better instructive example Supercal ifragilist icexpialidocious 21 Basics This is an example Supercalifragilisticexpialidocious Note that the character can be used to split long input lines that do not allow whitespace or line breaks as with Supercali cious above The core LaTeX language does not have a predefined syntax for commenting out regions spanning multiple lines Refer to multi line comments for simple workarounds 5 2 Input File Structure When LaTeX processes an input file it expects it to follow a certain structure Thus every input file must start with the command documentclass This specifies what sort of document you intend to write After that you ca
368. ou can usually automatically open any installed package documentation with the texdoc command texdoc lt package name gt 248 Packages list 28 3 Packages list Here is a not complete list of useful packages that can be used for a wide range of different kind of documents Each package has a short description next to it and when available there is a link to a section describing such package in detail All of them unless stated should be included in your LaTeX distribution as package_name sty For more information refer to the documentation of the single packages as described in the previous section The list is in alphabetical order amsmath 1t contains the advanced math extensions for LaTeX The complete documentation should be in your LaTeX distribution the file is called amsdoc and can be dvi or pdf For more information see the chapter about Mathematics amssymb it adds new symbols in to be used in math mode amsthm it introduces the proof environment and the cheoremstyle command For more information see the Theorems section array it extends the possibility of LaTeX to han dle tables fixing some bugs and adding new features Using it you can create very com plicated and customized tables For more information see the Tables section babel 1t provides the internationalization of LaTeX It has to be loaded in any document and you have to give as an option the main language
369. our document In this case see the first line the font size is set to 12pt and the paper size is an A4 The package graphicx is included to insert an image in the title Then a command is defined called HRule it will just insert a horizontal line whose length is like the size of the paper and whose thickness is 0 5 mm If you want you can change its settings in the definition Finally the document starts and it simply includes the title tex file that must be placed in the same directory of our dummy file test_title tex Now create the title tex and write in it begin titlepage end titlepage all the things you want to put in the title must be inside the tit lepage environment Now if you compile test_title tex you will see a preview of your title in the test_title paf file Here is what you need to know to write your title 46 Custom Title Pages Alignment if you want to center some text just use begin center end center If you want to align it differently you can use the environment flushright for right alignment and flushleft for left alignment Images the command for including images is the following the example is for a small logo but you can intro duce any image of any size includegraphics width 0 15 textwidth logo There is no begin figure as you usually do because you don t want it to be floating you just want it there where you placed it When handling it remember that it is considered
370. our document the package provides the Istlisting environment begin lstlisting put your code here end lstlisting Another possibility that is very useful if you created a program on several files and you are still editing it is to import the code from the source itself This way if you modify the source you just have to recompile the LaTeX code and your document will be updated The command is lstinputlisting source_filename py in the example there is a Python source but it doesn t matter you can include any file but you have to write the full file name It will be considered plain text and it will be highlighted according to your settings that means it doesn t recognize the programming language by itself You can specify the language while including the file with the following command lstinputlisting language Python source_filename py It supports the following programming languages ABAP IDL PL I ACSL inform Plasm Ada Java POV Algol JVMIS Prolog Ant ksh Promela Assembler Lisp Python Awk Logo R bash make Reduce Basic Mathematica Rexx ct Matlab RSL C Mercury Ruby 1 Chapter 18 on page 163 259 Listings package Caml MetaPost S Clean Miranda SAS Cobol Mizar Scilab Comal ML sh csh Modelica SHELXL Delphi Modula 2 Simula Eiffel MuPAD SQL Elan NASTRAN tcl erlang Oberon 2 TeX Euphoria OCL VBScript Fortran Octave Verilog GCL Oz VHDL Gnuplot Pascal VRML Haskell Perl XML HTML PHP XSLT
371. out your references is stored in a structured format but nothing about style This is a common theme in LaTeX in general where it tries as much as possible to keep content and presentation separate A bibliography style file st will tell LaTeX how to format each attribute what order to put them in what punctuation to use in between particular attributes etc Unfortunately creating such a style by hand is not a trivial task Which is why Makebst also known as custom bib is the tool we need 17 http www cs stir ac uk kjt software latex showbst html 18 Chapter 12 on page 95 19 http purl org nxg dist urlbst 20 http www tex ac uk cgi bin texfaq2html label citeURL 66 BibTeX Makebst can be used to automatically generate a bst file based on your needs It is very simple and actually asks you a series of questions about your preferences Once complete it will then output the appropriate style file for you to use It should be installed with the LaTeX distribution otherwise you can download it and it s very simple to initiate At the command line type latex makebst LaTeX will find the relevant file and the questioning process will begin You will have to answer quite a few although note that the default answers are pretty sensible which means 1t would be impractical to go through an example in this tutorial However it is fairly straight forward And if you require further guidance then there is
372. over and Back Cover Texts on the back cover Both covers must also clearly and legibly identify you as the publisher of these copies The front cover must present the full title with all words of the title equally prominent and visible You may add other material on the covers in addition Copying with changes limited to the covers as long as they preserve the title of the Document and satisfy these conditioi an be treated as verbatim copying in other respects If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit legibly you should put the first ones listed as many as fit reasonably on the actual cover and continue the rest onto adjacent pages If you publish or distribute Opaque copies of the Document numbering more than 100 you must either include a machine readable Transparent copy along with each Opaque copy or state in or with each Opaque copy a computer network location from which the general network using public has access to download using public standard network protocols a complete Transparent copy of the Document free of added material If you use the latter option you must take reasonably prudent steps when you begin dis tribution of Opaque copies in quantity to ensure that this Transparent copy will remain thus accessible at the stated location until at least one year after the last time you distribute an Opaque copy directly or through your agents or retailers of that edition to the public It is requested
373. owever it is very large so I won t display it here So let s scale it down includegraphics scale 0 5 chick Figure 50 This has now reduced it by half If you wish to be more specific and give actual lengths of the image dimensions this is how to go about it 188 The graphicx package includegraphics width 2 5cm chick Figure 51 One can also specify the scale with respect to the width of a line in the local environment linewidth the width of the text on a page textwidth or the height of the text on a page textheight pictures not shown includegraphics width linewidth chick includegraphics width textwidth chick includegraphics height textheight chick To rotate I also scaled the image down 189 Importing Graphics includegraphics scale 0 5 angle 180 chick Figure 52 And finally an example of how to crop an image should you wish to focus on one particular area of interest trim option s parameter order left bottom includegraphics trim 10mm 80mm 20mm 5mm c K Figure 53 Note the presence of clip as the trim operation will not work without it Trick You can also use negative trim values to add blank space to your graphics in cases where you need some manual alignment As you may have noticed the file name of the picture is always without the extension LaTeX will t
374. ox boxname instead of unhbox boxname This same trick done with raisebox instead of underline can force all lines in a table to have equal height instead of the natural varying height that can occur when e g math terms or superscripts occur in the text Here is an example showing the use of both p and gt centering begin tabular gt centering p 3 5cm lt centering p 3 5cm Geometry amp Algebra tabularnewline hline Points amp Addition tabularnewline 81 Tables Spheres amp Multiplication end tabular Note the use of tabularnewline instead of NN to avoid a Misplaced noalign error 10 2 3 Text wrapping in tables LaTeX s algorithms for formatting tables have a few shortcomings One is that it will not automati cally wrap text in cells even if it overruns the width of the page For columns that you know will contain a certain amount of text then it is recommended that you use the p attribute and specify the desired width of the column although it may take some trial and error to get the result you want Use the m attribute to have the lines aligned toward the middle of the box and the b attribute to align along the bottom of the box Here is a practical example The following code creates two tables with the same code the only difference is that the last column of the second one has a defined width of 5 centimeters while in the first one we didn t specify any width Compiling this code
375. p 217 http en wikibooks org w index p 218 http en wikibooks org w index p 219 http en wikibooks org w index p 220 http en wikibooks org w index p 22 http en wikibooks org w index p hp hp hp hp hp hp hp hp hp hp hp hp hp hp hp hp hp hp t hp t hp t hp t hp t hp t hp t hp t title User Joeyboi title User John1923 title User Jomegat title User Jonathan Webley title User Jotomicron title User Jraregris title User Jtwdog title User Juliabackhausen title User Juliusross title User Justin_W_Smith title User Jwchong title User Karcih title User Karper title User Karthicknainar title User Kazkaskazkasako title User Kejia title User Kenyon title User Keplerspeed title User Kernigh title User Kevang title User Kevinfiesta title User KlausFoehl title User Klusinyan title User Konteki title User Kovianyo 375 Contributors 1 Kpym 2 7 Kn Krischik 4 1 Krishnavedala 3 Krisrose 2 2 Kroolik 2 Kit Kubieziel 2 Kwetal 1 LQST 6 LR 22 1 LaTeX 2 Latexing 4 1 Lavaka 1 Lbailey452 1 Listdata 1 Literaturgenerator 1 Lnkbuildingservices4u 3 Lotus noir 1 Louabill 4 3 Louisix 3 Lucasreddinger 1 MER C 1 MaBoehm2 3 Maartenweyn 222 http en wikibooks org w index php title User Kpym 223 http en wikibooks org w index php title User Kri 224 ht
376. penultimate and last authors but within the bib file it needs the ands so that it can keep track of the individual authors 9 3 2 Standard templates Be careful if you copy the following templates the sign is not valid to comment out lines in bibtex files If you want to comment out a line you have to put it outside the entry G article An article from a magazine or a journal Required fields author title journal year Optional fields volume number pages month note article Xarticle author nn title journal volume Snumber Spages year Smonth Snote r ww ww ww ww r XXXX uU gw wg Ww III ww r book 57 Bibliography Management A published book Required fields author editor title publisher year Optional fields volume number series address edition month note book Xbook author title publisher volume Snumber series Saddress Sedition ww ww ww ww ww ww ww r ww year month Snote XXXX ww un H booklet A bound work without a named publisher or sponsor Required fields title Optional fields author howpublished address month year note booklet Xbooklet author title Showpublished Saddress year XXXX Smonth crm Snote E un H un nn conference Equal to inproceedings Required fields autho
377. personal texmf tree For instance teTeX http www tug org tetex users can edit their TeX configuration file e g etc texmf web2c texmf ocnf and set the variable TEXMF HOME to the path of the working copy of the common texmf tree e g by TEXMFHOME SHOME texmf MiKTeX http www miktex org users can add the path of the working copy of the common texnf tree in the Roots tab of the MiKTeX Options If a new class or style file has been added but not if these files have been modified the users have to update their file name data base FNDB before they can use these classes and styles For instance teTeX users have to execute texhash MiKTeX users have to click on the button Refresh FNDB in the General tab of the MiKTeX Options Furthermore the repository contains manuals explaining the specific LaTeX software solution at our department e g this document The Subversion server hosts a separate repository for each project of our department Although branching merging and tagging is less important for writing text documents than for writing source code for software our repository layouts follow the recommendations of the Subversion book http svnbook red bean com In this sense each repository has the three directories trunk branches and tags The most important directory is trunk If a single text document belongs to the project all files and subdirectories of this text document are in t runk
378. phics thus allowing to add TeX annotations to imported graphics It defines a convenient interface to put TeX over included graphics and allows for drawing a white background under the typeset material to overshadow the graphics It is a better alternative for labels inside of graphics you do not have to change text size when rescaling pictures and all LaTeX power is available for labels A very similar package with somewhat different syntax is pinlabel the packages psfrag and overpic The link given also points to A much more complicated package which can be used in the same way is tikz tikz is a front end to a drawing library called pgf which is used to make beamer It can be used to label figures by adding text nodes on top of an image node 16 http mirror ctan org macros latex contrib caption caption eng pdf 17 http www komascript de 18 http en wikibooks org wiki LaTeX 2FList Structures 23Customizing Lists 19 http www math uni leipzig de matveyev lpic 20 http www ctan org tex archive help Catalogue entries pinlabel html 2 http www ctan org pkg pgf 214 References 24 3 1 Summary That concludes all the fundamentals of floats You will hopefully see how much easier it is to let Latex do all the hard work and tweak the page layouts in order to get your figures in the best place As always the fact that LaTeX takes care of all caption and reference numbering is a great time saver 24 4 Reference
379. piling with pdflatex place after else the code you want to insert if you are compiling with latex For example you can use this syntax to load different packages or different graphic file formats according to the compiler 36 5 Graphics and Graph editors 36 5 1 Vector image editors with LaTeX support It is often preferable to use the same font and font size in your images as in the document Moreover for scientific images you may need mathematical formulae or special characters such as Greek letters Both things can be achieved easily if the image editor allows you to use LaTeX code in your image Most vector image editors do not offer this option There are however a few exceptions In early days LaTeX users used Xfig for their drawings The editor is still used by quite a few people nowadays because it has special export to LaTeX features It also gives you some very basic ways of encapsulating LaTeX text and math in the image setting the text s special flag to special instead of normal When exporting all LaTeX text will be put in a tex file separately from the rest of the image which is put in a ps file A newer and easier to use vector image editor specially tailored to LaTeX use is IPE It allows any LaTeX command including but not limited to mathematical formulae in the image The program saves its files as editable eps or pdf files which eliminates the need of exporting your image each time you have edited it
380. preview begin document begin preview NE pi sqrt 12 sum infty_ k 0 frac 3 k 2k 1 end preview end document Run LaTeX as usual to generate the dvi file foo dvi Note the active option in the package declaration and the preview environment around the equation s code Without any of these two you won t get an dvi output Now we want an X font size formula where X is measure in pixels You need to convert this to dots per inch dpi The formula is dpi font px 72 27 10 If you want for instance X 32 then the size in dpi corresponds to 231 26 This value will be passed to dvipng using the flag D To generate the desired png file run the command as follows dvipng T tight D 231 26 o foo png foo dvi The flag T sets the size of the image The option tight will only include all ink put on the page The option o sends the output to the file name foo png 10 http cars9 uchicago edu ravel software gnuplot mode html 297 Tips and Tricks 36 6 Spell checking and Word Counting If you want to spell check your document you can use command line aspell hunspell preferably or ispell programs ispell yourfile tex aspell c yourfile tex hunspell 1 t i utf 8 yourfile tex Both understand LaTeX and will skip LaTeX commands You can also use a LaTeX editor with built in spell checking such as LyX Kile or Emacs Last another option is to convert LaTeX
381. produce quality output such as postscript or PDF 5 1 The LaTeX source LaTeX uses a markup language in order to describe document structure and presentation LaTeX converts your source text combined with the markup into a high quality document For the purpose of analogy web pages work in a similar way the HTML is used to describe the document but it is your browser that presents it in its full glory with different colours fonts sizes etc The input for LaTeX is a plain ASCII text file You can create it with any text editor It contains the text of the document as well as the commands that tell LaTeX how to typeset the text For the truly impatient a minimal example looks something like the following the commands will be explained later documentclass article begin document Hello world end document 5 1 1 Spaces Whitespace characters such as blank or tab are treated uniformly as space by LaTeX Several consecutive whitespace characters are treated as one space Whitespace at the start of a line is generally ignored and a single line break is treated as whitespace An empty line between two lines of text defines the end of a paragraph Several empty lines are treated the same as one empty line The text below is an example On the left hand side is the text from the input file and on the right hand side is the formatted output 1 Chapter 2 on page 5 2 Chapter 41 on page 333 19 Basics
382. pstopdf i done If epstopdf produces whole page with your small graphics somewhere on it use epstopdf gsopt dEPSCrop foo eps f or try using ps2pdf utility ps2pdf dEPSCrop foo eps to crop final PDF Images can be saved in multiple formats for different purposes For example a directory can have diagram pdf for high resolution printing while diagram png can be used for previewing on the monitor You can specify which image file is to be used by pdflatex through the preamble command NDeclareGraphicsExtensions pdf png jpg which specifies the files to include in the document if files with the same basename exist but with different extensions Acrobat Reader sometimes has problems with displaying colors correctly if you include graphics in PNG format with alpha channel You can solve this problem by dropping the alpha channel On Linux it can be achieved with convert from the ImageMagick program 24 http dirkraffel com 2007 11 19 includ ps files in latex 25 http www inkscape org 26 http www gnuplot info 27 http www ctan org tex archive support epstopdf 28 http www ctan org tex archive help Catalogue entries epstopdf pkg html 29 http en wikipedia org wiki Batch 20file 30 http www ctan org tex archive support epstopdf 31 http svn ghostscript com ghostscript trunk gs doc Ps2pdf htm 32 http en wikipedia org wiki ImageMagick 186 The graphicx package convert alp
383. quite clever with names of authors It can accept names in forename surname or surname forename I personally use the former but remember that the order you input them or any data within an entry for that matter is customizable and so you can get BibTeX to manipulate the input and then output it however you like If you use the forename surname method then you must be careful with a few special names where there are compound surnames for example John von Neumann In this form BibTeX assumes that the last word is the surname and everything before is the forename plus any middle names You must therefore manually tell BibTeX to keep the von and Neumann together This is achieved easily using curly braces So the final result would be John von Neumann This is easily avoided with the surname forename since you have a comma to separate the surname from the forename Secondly there is the issue of how to tell BibTeX when a reference has more than one author This is very simply done by putting the keyword and in between every author As we can see from another example book goossens93 author Michel Goossens and Frank Mittelbach and Alexander Samarin title The LaTeX Companion year 1993 publisher Addison Wesley address Reading Massachusetts This book has three authors and each is separated as described Of course when BibTeX processes and outputs this there will only be an and between the
384. r Starts a new chapter See Document Structure circle cite Used to make citations from the provided bibliography cleardoublepage clearpage Ends the current page and causes any floats to be printed See Page Layout cline Adds horizontal line in a table that spans only to a range of cells See hline and Tables chapter closing Inserts a closing phrase e g closing yours sincerely leaves space for a handwritten signature and inserts a signature specified by signature Used in the Letter class color Specifies color of the text Colors copyright makes sign See Formatting 8 Chapter 6 1 4 on page 34 9 Chapter 9 2 on page 52 10 Chapter 12 5 on page 107 11 Chapter 45 9 on page 350 12 Chapter 10 on page 77 13 Chapter 27 on page 241 14 Chapter 12 on page 95 348 45 5 D dashbox date ddots Inserts a diagonal ellipsis 3 diagonal dots in math mode documentclass options style Used to begin a latex document dotfill 45 6 E em Toggles italics on off for the text inside curly braces with the command Such as em This is in italics em but this isn t em and this is again This command allows nesting emph Toggles italics on off for the text in curly braces following the command e g emph This is in italics emph but this isn t and this is again ensuremath LaTeX2e euro Prints euro symbol Requires eurosym package 45 7 F fbox flushbo
385. r title booktitle year Optional fields editor volume number series pages address month organization publisher note Qconference Xconference author ses Un title booktitle editor volume Snumber series pages Saddress year XXXX Smonth Emmy Spublisher Snote ww ww ww ww ww nn ww H ww r ww inbook A section of a book without its own title 58 BibTeX Required fields author editor title chapter and or pages publisher year Optional fields volume number series type address edition month note incollection A section of a book having its own title Required fields author title booktitle publisher year Optional fields editor volume number series type chapter pages address edition month note inproceedings An article in a conference proceedings Required fields author title booktitle year Optional fields editor volume number series pages address month organization publisher note manual Technical manual Required fields title Optional fields author organization address edition month year note mastersthesis Master s thesis Required fields author title school year Optional fields type eg diploma thesis address month note Qmastersthesis Xthesis author nn title School Stype Saddress year Smonth Snote diploma thesis ww
386. r lines in length you do both of the following a Give prominent notice with each copy of the object code that the Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by this License b Accompany the object code with a copy of the GNU GPL and this license document 4 Combined Works You may convey a Combined Work under terms of your choice that taken to gether effectively do not restrict modification of the portions of the Library contained in the Combined Work and reverse engineering for debugging such modifications if you also do each of the following a Give prominent notice with each copy of the Combined Work that the Li brary is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by this License b Accompany the Combined Work with a copy of the GNU GPL and this license document c For a Combined Work that displays copyright notices during execution include the copyright notice for the Library among these notices as well as a reference directing the user to the copies of the GNU GPL and this license document d Do one of the following o 0 Con vey the Minimal Corresponding Source under the terms of this License and the Corresponding Application Code in a form suitable for and under terms that permit the user to recombine or relink the Application with a modified version of the Linked Version to produce a modified Combined Work in the manner specified by section 6 of the GNU GPL for convey
387. re is an example headspec thmname 1 thmnumber 2 thmnote 3 which would look something like 8 Requires the amst hm package 9 Requires the amsthm package 149 Theorems Definition 2 Topology for the following begin definition Topology The note argument which in this case is Topology is always optional but will not appear by default unless you specify it as above in the head spec 14 5 Conflicts The theorem environment conflicts with other environments for example wrapfigure A work around is to redefine theorem for example the following way o Fix latex def smallskip vskip smallskipamount def medskip vskip medskipamount def bigskip vskip bigskipamount Hand made theorem newcounter thm section renewcommand thethm thesection arabic thm def claim 1 par medskip noindent refstepcounter thm hbox bf arabic chapter arabic section arabic thm 1 it ignorespaces def endclaim par medskip newenvironment thm claim endclaim In this case theorem looks like begin thm Claim label lyt prob Let it be Then you know end thm 14 6 Notes 14 7 External links e ftp ftp ams org pub tex doc amscls amsthdoc pdf amst hm documentation 150 15 Labels and Cross referencing 15 1 Introduction Another good point of LaTeX is that you can easily reference almost anything that is numbered sections figures formulas a
388. reate It does not include the fonts within the document so if you want the document to be viewed properly on another computer there must be all the necessary fonts installed It does not support any interactivity such as hyperlinks or animated images DVI viewers are not very common so you can consider using it for previewing your document while typesetting PDF needs more disk space and it is slower to create but it includes all the necessary fonts within the document so you will not have any problem of portability It supports internal and external hyperlinks It also supports advanced typographic features hanging punctuation font expansion and margin kerning resulting in more flexibility available to the TeX engine and better looking output Nowadays it is the de facto standard for sharing and publishing documents so you can consider using it for the final version of your document About now you saw you can create both DVI and PDF document from the same source This is true but it gets a bit more complicated if you want to introduce images or links This will be explained in detail in the next chapters but for now assume you can compile in both DVI and PDF without any problem Note in this instance due to the simplicity of the file you only need to run the LaTeX command once However if you begin to create complex documents including bibliographies and cross references etc LaTeX needs to be executed multiple times to resolve t
389. riminatory if it does not include within the scope of its coverage prohibits the exercise of or is conditioned on the non exercise of one or more of the rights that are specifically granted under this License You may not convey a covered work if you are a party to an arrangement with a third party that is in the business of distributing software under which you make payment to the third party based on the extent of your activity of conveying the work and under which the third party grants to any of the par ties who would receive the covered work from you a discriminatory patent license a in connection with copies of the covered work conveyed by you or copies made from those copies or b primarily for and in connection with specific products or compilations that contain the covered work unless you entered into that arrangement or that patent license was granted prior to 28 March 2007 Nothing in this License shall be construed as excluding or limiting any im plied license or other defenses to infringement that may otherwise be avail able to you under applicable patent law 12 No Surrender of Others Free dom If conditions are imposed on you whether by court order agreement or oth erwise that contradict the conditions of this License they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License If you cannot convey a covered work 50 as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent oblig
390. rmatting Page Layout Mathematics Theorems Labels and Cross referencing Indexing Glossary Algorithms and pseudocode Letters Importing Graphics Creating Graphics Floats Figures and Captions oo JA Ch LN P L HA Ro N e be e ben ken ben Fe Feat Feat Fe AO CO vw GJ Ch Lu E GA ra CO Chapter 2 on page 5 Chapter 2 on page 5 Chapter 2 on page 5 Chapter 2 on page 5 Chapter 2 on page 5 Chapter 2 on page 5 Chapter 2 on page 5 Chapter 2 on page 5 Chapter 2 on page 5 Chapter 2 on page 5 Chapter 2 on page 5 Chapter 2 on page 5 Chapter 2 on page 5 Chapter 2 on page 5 Chapter 2 on page 5 Chapter 2 on page 5 Chapter 2 on page 5 Chapter 2 on page 5 Chapter 2 on page 5 Chapter 2 on page 5 Contents 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 Presentations Hyperlinks Colors Packages a Installing Extra Packages b Listings package c Rotating package Advanced Topics Fonts Customizing LaTeX Collaborative Writing of LaTeX Documents Tips and Tricks General Guidelines Export To Other Formats Internationalization Appendices e Installation Useful Measurement Macros 37 Useful Size Commands Sample LaTeX documents e Command Glossary e Links Authors GNU Free Documentation License 43 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42
391. rmining whether a product is a consumer product doubt ful cases shall be resolved in favor of coverage For a particular product received by a particular user normally used refers to a typical or common use of that class of product regardless of the status of the particular user or of the way in which the particular user actually uses or expects or is expected to use the product A product is a consumer product regardless of whether the product has substantial commercial industrial or non consumer uses unless such uses represent the only significant mode of use of the product Installation Information for a User Product means any methods proce dures authorization keys or other information required to install and execute modified versions of a covered work in that User Product from a modified version of its Corresponding Source The information must suffice to en sure that the continued functioning of the modified object code is in no case prevented or interfered with solely because modification has been made If you convey an object code work under this section in or with or specifi cally for use in a User Product and the conveying occurs as part of a trans action in which the right of possession and use of the User Product is trans ferred to the recipient in perpetuity or for a fixed term regardless of how the transaction is characterized the Corresponding Source conveyed under this section must be accompanied by the Installa
392. rnals IEEEtranN TeX Catalogue entry natbib compatible style for IEEE publications achemso TeX Catalogue entry natbib compatible style for American Chemical Society journals rsc TeX Catalogue entry natbib compatible style for Royal Society of Chemistry journals Natbib options Option Meaning round Parentheses default square Square brackets curly Curly braces angle Angle brackets lt gt colon multiple citations are separated by semi colons default comma multiple citations are separated by commas authoryear author year style citations default numbers numeric citations super superscripted numeric citations sort multiple citations are sorted into the order in which they appear in the references section sort amp compress as sort compressing multiple numeric cita tions where possible longnamesfirst the first citation of any reference will use the starred variant full author list subsequent citations will use the abbreviated et al style Du bu wn 54 http authors aps org revtex4 http authors aps org revtex4 http www ctan org tex archive help Catalogue entries i http www ctan org tex archive help Catalogue entries achemso html http www ctan org tex archive help Catalogue entries rsc html tran html BibTeX Natbib options Option Meaning sectionbib for use with the chapterbib package rede fines Xhebibliography to issue section in stead of chapter nonamebreak k
393. ronment and greatly strengthen the graphical power of LaTeX Chapter 22 on page 183 http en wikibooks org wiki LaTeX 2FPicture http en wikibooks org wiki LaTeX 2FXy pic http en wikibooks org wiki LaTeX 2FPGF22FTikZ http en wikipedia org wiki catenary Nun 199 Creating Graphics While the former two packages just enhance the picture environment the pstricks package has its own drawing environment pspicture The power of pst ricks stems from the fact that this package makes extensive use of PostScript possibilities Unfortunately it has one big shortcoming it doesn t work together with pdfLaTeX as such to generate a PDF document form TeX source you have to go TeX DVI PDE losing hyperlinks metadata and microtypographic features of pdflatex In addition numerous packages have been written for specific purposes One of them is XY pic described at the end of this chapter A wide variety of these packages are described in detail in The LaTeX Graphics Companion not to be confused with The LaTeX Companion Perhaps the most powerful graphical tool related with LaTeX is MetaPost the twin of Donald E Knuth s METAFONT MetaPost has the very powerful and mathematically sophisticated pro gramming language of METAFONT Contrary to METAFONT which generates bitmaps MetaPost generates encapsulated PostScript files which can be imported in LaTeX For an introduction see A User s Manual for MetaPost A very thorough dis
394. rrhodes Pmlineditor Polytropos Technikos 1 Ppadmapriya 1 Prawojazdy 1 Prispartlow 2 Pstar PsyberS 2 QUBo 1 Qeny 8 1 Quaristice 6 QuiteUnusual 3 Qwertyus 297 http en wikibooks org w index p 298 http en wikibooks org w index p 299 http en wikibooks org w index p 300 http en wikibooks org w index p 301 http en wikibooks org w index p 302 http en wikibooks org w index p 303 http en wikibooks org w index p 304 http en wikibooks org w index p 305 http en wikibooks org w index p 306 http en wikibooks org w index p 307 http en wikibooks org w index p 308 http en wikibooks org w index p 309 http en wikibooks org w index p 310 http en wikibooks org w index p 311 http en wikibooks org w index p 312 http en wikibooks org w index p 313 http en wikibooks org w index p 314 http en wikibooks org w index p 315 http en wikibooks org w index p 316 http en wikibooks org w index p 317 http en wikibooks org w index p 318 http en wikibooks org w index p 319 http en wikibooks org w index p 320 http en wikibooks org w index p 321 http en wikibooks org w index p 311 hp titl hp titl hp titl hp titl hp titl hp titl hp titl hp titl hp titl hp ti hp ti hp ti hp ti hp ti hp ti hp ti hp ti hp ti hp ti hp ti hp ti hp titl hp titl hp titl t p et EF ett ZE ER cheek eto eke cb hp titl l
395. s 13 15 2 Dots LaTeX gives you several commands to insert dots in your formulae This can be particularly useful if you have to type big matrices omitting elements First of all here are the main dots related commands LaTeX provides Code Output Comment dots xis generic dots to be used in text outside formulae as well It automatically man ages whitespaces before and after itself according to the context it s a higher level command ldots ia the output is similar to the previous one but there is no automatic whitespace management it works at a lower level cdots es These dots are centered rel ative to the height of a letter There is also the binary mul tiplication operator cdot mentioned below Nvdots vertical dots 62 http en wikipedia org wiki American 20Mathematical 20Society 135 Mathematics Code Output Comment ddots Ws diagonal dots iddots inverse diagonal dots re quires the mathdots package hdotsfor n le to be used in matrices it cre ates a row of dots spanning n columns Instead of using ldots and cdots you should use the semantically oriented commands It makes it possible to adapt your document to different conventions on the fly in case for example you have to submit it to a publisher who insists on following house tradition in this respect The default treatment for the various kinds follows American Mathe
396. s 215 25 Presentations LaTeX can be used for creating presentations There are several packages for the task including the Beamer package 25 1 The Beamer package The beamer package is provided with most LaTeX distributions but is also available from CTAN If you use MikTeX all you have to do is to include the beamer package and let LaTeX download all wanted packages automatically The documentation explains the features in great detail You can also have a look at the PracTex article Beamer by example 25 1 1 Introductory example The beamer package is loaded by calling the beamer class documentclass beamer The usual header information may then be specified Note that if you are compiling with XeTeX then you should use documentclass xetex mathserif serif beamer Inside the usual document environment multiple rame environments specify the content to be put on each slide The framet it le command specifies the title for each slide See image begin document begin frame frametitle This is the first slide Content goes here end frame begin frame frametitle This is the second slide framesubtitle A bit more information about this More content goes here end frame etc end document 1 http www ctan org tex archive macros latex contrib beamer http www ctan org tex archive macros latex contrib beamer doc beameruserguide pdf 3 Andrew Mertz and William Slough Beamer by Example
397. s More localizations are in the making The other commands modify the spanish layout after loading babel Two particularly useful com mands are Spanishoperators and Nspanishdeactivate The macro Nspanishoperators list of operators contains a list of spanish math ematical operators and may be redefined at will For instance the command def spanishoperators sen only defines sen overriding all other definitions the com mand let spanishoperators relax disables them all This command supports accented or spaced operators the Nacute letter command puts an accent and the A command adds a small space For instance the following operators are defined by default lNacute i m l acute i m sup l acute i m inf m acute a x acute i nf m acute i n sen tg arc sen arc cos arc tg cotg cosec senh tgh Finally the macro spanishdeactivate list ofcharacters disables some active characters to keep you out of trouble if they are redefined by other packages The candidates for deactivation are the set lt gt Please beware that some option preempty the availability of some active characters In particular you should not combine the es noquoting option with spanishdeactivate lt gt or the es noshorthands with spanishdeactivate lt gt 328 Hyphenating languages Please check the documentation for Babel or spanish dtx for further details Spanish with inputenc package However by using latinl or UTF8 encoding it
398. s as a Front Cover Text and a pas sage of up to 25 words as a Back Cover Text to the end of the list of Cover Texts in the Modified Version Only one passage of Front Cover Text and one of Back Cover Text may be added by or through arrangements made by any one entity If the Document already includes a cover text for the same cover previously added by you or by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on behalf of you may not add another but you may replace the old one on explicit permission from the previous publisher that added the old one The author s and publisher s of the Document do not by this License give permission to use their names for publicity for or to assert or imply endorse ment of any Modified Version 5 COMBINING DOCUMENTS You may combine the Document with other documents released under this License under the terms defined in section 4 above for modified versions provided that you include in the combination all of the Invariant Sections of all of the original documents unmodified and list them all as Invariant Sec tions of your combined work in its license notice and that you preserve all their Warranty Disclaimers The combined work need only contain one copy of this License and multiple identical Invariant Sections may be replaced with a single copy If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name but different contents make the title of each such section unique by adding at the end of
399. s in the public domain do not require attribution You may click on the image numbers in the following table to open the webpage of the images in your webbrower 444 Chapter 49 on page 391 386 List of Figures 1 Alessio Damato GFDL 2 Dirk H nniger cc by sa 3 0 3 Dirk H nniger cc by sa 3 0 4 Dirk Hinniger cc by sa 3 0 5 Dirk H nniger cc by sa 3 0 6 Literaturgenerator GFDL 7 GFDL 8 Mij PD 9 Dirk H nniger cc by sa 3 0 10 Dirk H nniger cc by sa 3 0 11 Dirk H nniger cc by sa 3 0 12 Dirk H nniger cc by sa 3 0 13 Dirk H nniger cc by sa 3 0 14 Dirk Hiinniger gt cc by sa 3 0 15 Dirk H nniger cc by sa 3 0 16 Dirk Hinniger cc by sa 3 0 17 Dirk H nniger cc by sa 3 0 18 Dirk H nniger cc by sa 3 0 19 Dirk Hiinniger cc by sa 3 0 20 Dirk Hinniger cc by sa 3 0 21 Dirk H nniger cc by sa 3 0 22 Dirk H nniger cc by sa 3 0 23 Dirk H nniger cc by sa 3 0 24 Dirk Hiinniger cc by sa 3 0 25 Dirk Hiinniger cc by sa 3 0 26 Dirk H nniger 7 cc by sa 3 0 27 Dirk H nniger cc by sa 3 0 445 http en wikibooks org wiki User 3ADirk 20H FCnniger 446 http en wikibooks org wiki User 3ADirk 20H FCnniger 447 http en wikibooks org wiki User 3ADirk 20H FCnniger 448 http en wikibooks org wiki User 3ADirk 20H FCnniger 449 http en wikibooks org wiki User 3ALiteraturgenerator 450 http e
400. s no problem in having even a couple of dozen packages active 28 1 Using an existing package To use a package already installed on your system insert a usepackage command in your document preamble with the package name in curly braces Nusepackage package name For example to use the color package which lets you typeset in colors you would type Ndocumentclass 11pt a4paper oneside report usepackage color begin document vend dorum You can include several package names in one usepackage command by separating the names with commas like this usepackage packagel package2 package3 1 http tug ctan org search html 2 Chapter 29 on page 255 247 Packages and you can have more than one usepackage command Some packages allow optional settings in square brackets If you use these you must give the package its own separate usepackage command like geometry shown below Xdocumentclass 11pt alpaper oneside report usepackage pslatex palatino avant graphicx color usepackage margin 2cm geometry begin document title color red Practical Typesetting author color blue Name Work date color green December 2005 maketitle end document Many packages can have additional formatting specifications in optional arguments in square brackets in the same way as geomet ry does Read the documentation for the package concerned to find out what can be done You can pass several option
401. s or tables side by side providing they can fit otherwise it will automatically shift subfloats below This effect can be added manually by putting the newline command 11 before the figure you wish to move to a newline Horizontal spaces between figures are controlled by one of several commands which are placed in between begin subfigure and end subfigure A non breaking space specified by as in the example above can be used to insert a space in between the subfigs e Math spaces qquad quad V and Y e Generic space hspace length e Automatically expanding contracting space Ahf111 24 2 7 Wide figures in two column documents If you are writing a document using two columns i e you started your document with something like documentclass twocolumn article you might have noticed that you can t use floating elements that are wider than the width of a column using a LaTeX notation wider than 0 5Ntextwidth otherwise you will see the image overlapping with text If you really have to use such wide elements the only solution is to use the starred variants of the floating environments 12 Chapter 13 14 on page 132 211 Floats Figures and Captions that are figurex and tablex Those starred versions work exactly like the standard ones but they will be as wide as the page so you will get no overlapping A bad point of those environments is that they can be placed only at the top of the page
402. s the object code and or source code for the Application including any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the Combined Work from the Appli cation but excluding the System Libraries of the Combined Work 1 Excep tion to Section 3 of the GNU GPL You may convey a covered work under sections 3 and 4 of this License with out being bound by section 3 of the GNU GPL 2 Conveying Modified Versions If you modify a copy of the Library and in your modifications a facility refers to a function or data to be supplied by an Application that uses the facility other than as an argument passed when the facility is invoked then you may convey a copy of the modified version a under this License provided that you make a good faith effort to en sure that in the event an Application does not supply the function or data the facility still operates and performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful or b under the GNU GPL with none of the additional permis sions of this License applicable to that copy 3 Object Code Incorporating Material from Library Header Files The object code form of an Application may incorporate material from a header file that is part of the Library You may convey such object code under terms of your choice provided that if the incorporated material is not limited to numerical parameters data structure layouts and accessors or small macros inline functions and templates ten or fewe
403. s together separated by a comma Nusepackage optionl option2 option3 package name 28 2 Package documentation To find out what commands a package provides and thus how to use it you need to read the documentation In the texmf doc subdirectory of your installation there should be directories full of dvi files one for every package installed This location is distribution specific but is typically found in Distribution Path MiKTeX C Program Files MiKTeX 2 7 doc latex teTeX usr share texmf tetex doc latex Generally most of the packages are in the 1at ex subdirectory although other packages such as BibTeX and font packages are found in other subdirectories in doc The documentation directories have the same name of the package e g amsmath which generally have one or more relevant documents in a variety of formats dvi txt pdf etc The documents generally have the same name as the package but there are exceptions for example the documentation for amsmath is found at latex amsmath amsdoc dvi If your installation procedure has not installed the documentation the DVI files can all be downloaded from CTAN Before using a package you should read the documentation carefully especially the subsection usually called User Interface which describes the commands the package makes available You cannot just guess and hope it will work you have to read it and find out On most Linux machines y
404. s well which you almost certainly don t want LaTeX allows you to give an optional extra version of the heading text which only gets used in the Table of Contents and any running heads if they are in effect This optional alternative heading goes in square brackets before the curly braces section Effect on staff turnover An analysis of the effect of the revised recruitment policies on staff turnover at divisional headquarters Section numbering Numbering of the sections is performed automatically by LaTeX so don t bother adding them explicitly just insert the heading you want between the curly braces Parts get roman numerals Part I Part II etc chapters and sections get decimal numbering like this document and appendices which are just a special case of chapters and share the same structure are lettered A B C etc You can change the depth to which section numbering occurs so you can turn it off selectively By default it is set to 2 If you only want parts chapters and sections numbered not subsections or subsubsections 34 The document environment etc you can change the value of the secnumdepth counter using the setcounter command glving the depth level from the previous table For example if you want to change it to 1 setcounter secnumdepth 1 A related counter is tocdepth which specifies what depth to take the Table of Contents to It can be reset in exactly the same way as secnumdepth For example
405. sed directly from the keyboard 3 requires the amsmath package 4 Chapter 13 11 on page 128 112 Operators Ren E AN E Beyond those listed above distinct commands must be issued in order to display the desired symbols And there are a lot of Greek letters set and relations symbols arrows binary operators etc For example NE forall x Vin X quad exists y Meg epsilon VxeX dy lt e Fortunately there s a tool that can greatly simplify the search for the command for a specific symbol Look for Detexify in the external links section below Another option would be to look in the The Comprehensive LaTeX Symbol List in the external links section below 13 3 Greek letters Greek letters are commonly used in mathematics and they are very easy to type in math mode You just have to type the name of the letter after a backslash if the first letter is lowercase you will get a lowercase Greek letter 1f the first letter is uppercase and only the first letter then you will get an uppercase letter Note that some uppercase Greek letters look like Latin ones so they are not provided by LaTeX e g uppercase Alpha and Beta are just A and B respectively Lowercase epsilon theta phi pi rho and sigma are provided in two different versions The alternate or variant version is created by adding var before the name of the letter NE alpha Alpha beta Beta Ngamma Gamma pi Pi phi varphi
406. setts 2nd Edition 1994 end thebibliography OK so what is going on here The first thing to notice is the establishment of the environment thebibliography isa keyword that LaTeX recognizes as everything between the begin and end 1 http www bibtex org 51 Bibliography Management tags as being data for the bibliography The mandatory argument which I supplied after the begin statement 1s telling LaTeX how wide the item label will be when printed Note however that the number itself is not the parameter but the number of digits is Therefore I am effectively telling LaTeX that I will only need reference labels of one character in length which ultimately means no more than nine references in total If you want more than nine then input any two digit number such as 56 which allows up to 99 references Next is the actual reference entry itself This is prefixed with the bibitem cite_key com mand The cite key should be a unique identifier for that particular reference and is often some sort of mnemonic consisting of any sequence of letters numbers and punctuation symbols although not a comma I often use the surname of the first author followed by the last two digits of the year hence lamport94 If that author has produced more than one reference for a given year then I add letters after a b etc But you should do whatever works for you Everything after the key is the reference itself You need to type i
407. signed to be graphically interactive in the adjustment of layout The process is similar to working with raw HTML with the added step that each time you want to see how your changes look you have to re compile the source While this may seem like a major inconvenience the benefit is that once the customized title format has been written it serves as a template for all other documents that would use the title format you have just made In other words once you have a layout you like you can use it for any other documents where you would like the same layout without any additional fiddling with layout First step since you ll be working only on the first page of your document and you ll have to compile very often you don t have to compile the whole document each time you only need to take a look at the first page That is why we ll first create a dummy document for preparing the title and then well simply include it within the existing big document we are writing Call the dummy document test title tex and put the following code in it documentclass pdftex 12pt a4paper report usepackage pdftex graphicx newcommand HRule rule linewidth 0 5mm begin document input title tex end document It is meant to be compiled with pdflatex to create a PDF in output It is a very basic document but take care that it has the same settings of the document you are writing so the output won t change when you include the title in y
408. sily understand the workflow of this file 4 Number of remaining unsolved conflicts 9 of which O are whitespace Figure 71 Figure 2 Reviewing modifications in KDiff3 Furthermore version control systems allow a very effective quality assurance measure all authors should critically review their own modifications before they commit them to the repository see figure 2 The differences between the user s working copy and the repository can be easily inspected with a single Subversion command or with one or two clicks in a graphical Subversion client Furthermore authors should verify that their code can be compiled flawlessly before they commit their modifications to the repository Otherwise the co authors have to pay for these mistakes when they want to compile the document However this directive is not only reasonable for version control systems but also for all other ways to interchange documents among authors Subversion has a feature called Keyword Substitution that includes dynamic version in formation about a file e g the revision number or the last author into the con tents of the file itself see e g http svnbook red bean com chapter 3 Sometimes 30 http svnbook red bean com en 1 4 svn advanced props file portability html svn advanced props special eol style 31 Chapter 35 3 on page 280 32 http svnbook red bean com 285 Collaborative Writing of LaTeX Documents it is useful to incl
409. sion of TeX Live but luckily there is a good repository here that you can use to directly install the latest version yum install texlive plus yum install texlive latex and any of the texlive scheme packages Gentoo provides an ebuild to install texlive using the command emerge texlive http www gentoo org proj en tex texlive migration guide xml doc_chap2 This is a meta ebuild that pulls in many other packages depending on its USE flags If your distribution does not have the TeX Live packages you should report a wish to the bug tracking system In the worst case you will need to download TeX Live yourself and run the installer by hand It is not hard but requires that you know how to use a console and make multiple choices during the installation Mac OS e Download MacTeX mpkg zip on the MacTeX pose unzip it and follow the instructions 2 4 2 Getting a text editor You will also need a text editor to write LaTeX code You should use a text editor e g Notepad not a word processor Word Openoffice Dedicated LaTeX editors are more useful than plain text editors because they usually have autocompletion of commands spell and error checking and handy macros TeX works TeX works is a dedicated TeX editor that is included in MiKTeX and TeX Live It was developed with the idea that a simple interface is better than a cluttered one and thus to make it easier for people in their early days with LaTeX to get to
410. source there are no limitations as in the old algorithmic package 19 2 11 Renaming things algorithm to procedure require ensure to input output floatname algorithm Procedure renewcommand algorithmicrequire textbf Input renewcommand algorithmicensure textbf Output 19 2 12 Custom algorithmic blocks The algorithmicx package allows you to define your own environments To define blocks beginning with a starting command and ending with an ending command use algblock lt block gt lt start gt lt end gt This defines two commands lt start gt and lt end gt which have no parameters The text displayed by them is textbf lt start gt and textbf lt end gt With algblockdefx you can give the text to be output by the starting and ending command and the number of parameters for these commands In the text the n th parameter is referenced by n algblockdefx lt block gt lt start gt lt end gt lt startparamcount gt lt default value gt lt start text gt lt endparamcount gt lt default value gt lt end text gt Example algblock Name Start End algblockdefx NAME START END 2 Unknown Start 1 2 Ending algblockdefx NAME OTHEREND 1 Until 41 beginfalgorithmic Start Start START One x END START 0 OTHEREND texttt True End Start End End end algorithmic More advanced customization and other constructio
411. st as with the newcommand command there is acommand to create your own environments The newenvironment command uses the following syntax newenvironment name num before after 274 New Environments Again Nnewenvironment can have an optional argument The material specified in the before argument is processed before the text in the environment gets processed The material in the after argument gets processed when the end name command is encountered The num argument is used the same way as in the newcommand command LaTeX makes sure that you do not define an environment that already exists If you ever want to change an existing command you can use the renewenvironment command It uses the same syntax as the newenvironment command The example below illustrates the usage of the newenvironment command newenvironment king My humble subjects a rule lex lex hspace stretch 1 hspace stretch 1 rule lex lex Figure 69 begin king My humble subjects ldots end king 34 2 1 Extra space When creating a new environment you may easily get bitten by extra spaces creeping in which can potentially have fatal effects For example when you want to create a title environment which suppresses its own indentation as well as the one on the following paragraph The ignorespaces command in the begin block of the environment will make it ignore any space after executing the begin block The
412. t kern4pt def fs post kern4pt hrule height 8pt depth0pt kern4pt relax def fs mid kern8pt let fs iftopcapt iftrue this code block defines the new and custom floatbox float environment floatstyle simplerule newfloat floatbox thp lob section floatname floatbox Text Box 15 Chapter 30 on page 259 213 Floats Figures and Captions begin document begin floatbox r textit Bootstrapping is a resampling technique used for robustly estimating statistical quantities such as the model fit R 2 It offers some protection against the sampling bias caption Bootstrapping end floatbox end document 24 2 9 Caption Styles To change the appearance of captions use the caption http mirror ctan org macros latex contrib caption caption eng pdf package For example to make all caption labels small and bold usepackage font small labelfont bf caption The KOMA script packages http www komascript de have their own caption customizing fea tures with e g captionabove captionformat and setcapwidth However these definitions have limited effect on newly created float environments with the wrapfig package Alternatively you can redefine the thefigure command renewcommand thefigure arabic section arabic figure See this page for more information on counters 24 3 Labels in the figures There is a LaTeX package lpic to put LaTeX on top of included gra
413. t as you want it to be presented I have put the different parts of the reference such as author title etc on different lines for readability These linebreaks are ignored by LaTeX I wanted the title to be in italics so I used the emph command to achieve this 9 2 Citations To actually cite a given document is very easy Go to the point where you want the citation to appear and use the following NCite cite key where the cite key is that of the bibitem you wish to cite When LaTeX processes the document the citation will be cross referenced with the bibitems and replaced with the appropriate number citation The advantage here once again is that LaTeX looks after the numbering for you If it were totally manual then adding or removing a reference would be a real chore as you would have to re number all the citations by hand Instead of WYSIWYG editors typesetting systems like TeX or LaTeX cite lamport94 can be used 9 2 1 Referring More Specific Sometimes you want to refer to a certain page figure or theorem in a text book For that you can use the arguments to the cite command cite p 215 citation01 The argument p 215 will show up inside the same brackets Note the tilde in p 215 which replaces the end of sentence spacing with a non breakable inter word space There are two reasons end of sentence spacing is too wide and p should not be separated from the page number 9 2 2 Multiple Citations
414. t code with such an offer in accord with subsection 6b d Convey the object code by offering access from a designated place gratis or for a charge and of fer equivalent access to the Corresponding Source in the same way through the same place at no further charge You need not require recipients to copy the Corresponding Source along with the object code If the place to copy the object code is a network server the Corresponding Source may be on a different server operated by you or a third party that supports equivalent copying facilities provided you maintain clear directions next to the object code saying where to find the Corresponding Source Regardless of what server hosts the Corresponding Source you remain obligated to ensure that it is available for as long as needed to satisfy these requirements e Convey the object code using peer to peer transmission provided you inform other peers where the object code and Corresponding Source of the work are being offered to the general public at no charge under subsection 6d A separable portion of the object code whose source code is excluded from the Corresponding Source as a System Library need not be included in con veying the object code work A User Product is either 1 a consumer product which means any tangible personal property which is normally used for personal family or household purposes or 2 anything designed or sold for incorporation into a dwelling In dete
415. t ct ct ct ct le User Fsart le User Ftravers le User Gallen01 le User Garoth le User GavinMcGimpsey le User Gelbukh le User Geminatea le User Germanzs le User Gkc le User Glad le User Glosser ca le User Gms le User Go pbam le User Goodgerster le User Graemeg le User Greenbreen le User Grenouill le User Grj23 le User Gronau le User Guyrobbie le User Gwpl le User Gyro Copter le User G C3 B6tz le User HJMills le User Hagindaz Wiki users t1 tl tl tl ch UA UN et cheek eto eke rd tl tl 1 Hankwang 2 Hansfn 48 2 Harrikoo 1 Harrywt gt 1 Helder wiki gt 5 Helptry 3 HenrikMidtiby 4 Henry Tallboys 4 1 Herbythyme gt 2 Hermine potter 1 Hippasus 1 Hokiehead 7 Hosszuka 3 Hroobjartr 1 ILubeMyCucumbers20 5 1 Iamunknown 1 Icc97 24 Igjimh 9 1 Immae 1 Infenwe 2 Insaneinside 9 4 InverseHypercube 65 1 IrfanAli 4 Ish ishwar 1 da 147 http en wikibooks org w index php tit l 148 http en wikibooks org w index php ti 149 http en wikibooks org w index php tit l 150 http en wikibooks org w index php ti 151 http en wikibooks org w index php ti 152 http en wikibooks org w index php ti 153 http en wikibooks org w index php tit 154 http en wikibooks org w index php tit 155 http en wikibooks org w index php tit 156 http en wikibooks org w index php ti 157 http en wikibooks org w inde
416. t is by textcolor declared color text where declared color is a color that was defined before by definecolor Another possible way is by color declared color text that will switch the standard text color to the color you want It will work until the end of the current TeX group For example 241 Colors emph some black text color red followed by a red fragment going black again some black text followed by a red fragment going black again Figure 63 The difference between Ntextcolor and Ncolor is the same as that between texttt and ttfamily you can use the one you prefer You can change the background color of the whole page by pagecolor declared color 27 3 Entering colored background for the text colorbox declared color text If the background color and the text color is changed then colorbox declared colorl color declared color2 text There is also fcolorbox to make framed background color in yet another color fcolorbox declared color frame declared color background text 27 4 Predefined colors The predefined color names are white black red green blue cyan magenta yellow There may be other pre defined colors on your system but these should be available on all systems If you would like a color not pre defined you can use one of the 68 dvips colors or define your own These options are discussed in the following sections 242 Defining n
417. t with some editors the PuTTY terminal and TeXmaker You may choose whichever encoding you like but you must say so in the preamble so for example if you prefer to use the ISO 8859 1 write instead usepackage latinl inputenc The encoding is important and makes sure you can simply write the kk set 0 A as such which is less cumbersome than having to write http www ctan org tex archive info lshort english lshort pdf http en wikipedia org wiki Operating 20system http en wikipedia org wiki PuTTY http en wikipedia org wiki Texmaker Noo N o 319 Internationalization V a to get the letter Actually letters like 6 6 6 O fi work as well so the same idea applies also to other European languages like Spanish If you want to use European Computer Modern fonts you should use Nusepackage T1 fontenc For creating scalable vector Typel fonts instead of bitmapped fonts you can substitute the line above with usepackage ae The ae package changes encoding to T1 and also loads the scalable version of Almost European Computer Modern fonts 39 4 6 French Some hints for those creating French documents with LaTeX you can load French language support with the following command usepackage french babel Nusepackage latinl inputenc Nusepackage T1 fontenc There are multiple options for typesetting French documents depending on the flavor of French french frenchb an
418. te algorithm pseudocode begin algorithmic end algorithmic You might want to use the algorithm environment usepackage algorithm to wrap your algorithmic code in an algorithm environment begin algorithm end algorithm to produce a floating environment with numbered algorithms The command begin algorithmic can be given the optional argument of a positive integer which if given will cause line numbering to occur at multiples of that integer E g begin algorithmic 5 will enter the algorithmic environment and number every fifth line Below is an example of typesetting a basic algorithm using the algorithmicx package remember to add the usepackage algpseudocode statement to your document preamble 1 http www tug org texlive Contents live texmf dist doc latex algorithms algorithms pdf 165 Typesetting Algorithms begin algorithmic NIf Silgeq maxval State ilgets 0 NElse NIf Sitk leq maxval State i gets i k EndIf NEndIf end algorithmic The LaTeX source can be written to a format familiar to programmers so that it is easy to read This will not however affect the final layout in the document if 2 gt maxval then i 0 else if i k lt maxval then i i k end if end if Figure 44 There are several constructs provided by algorithmicx detailed below 19 2 1 If statements There are three forms of this construct If lt condition gt text EndIf
419. te a dvi file of documentation explaining what the package is for and how to use it If you prefer to create PDF then run pdfLaTeX instead If you created a idx as well it means that the document contains an 1 http www ctan org 255 Packages Installing Extra Packages index too If you want the index to be created properly follow the steps in the indexing section Sometimes you will see that a glo glossary file has been produced Run the following command instead makeindex s gglo ist o name gls name glo 3 Install the files While the documentation is printing move or copy the package files from your temporary directory to the right place s in your TeX local installation directory tree Packages installed by hand should always be placed in your local directory tree not in the directory tree containing all the pre installed packages This is done to a prevent your new package accidentally overwriting files in the main TeX directories and b avoid your newly installed files being overwritten when you next update your version of TeX For a TDS conformant system your local installation directory tree is a folder and its subfolders The outermost folder should probably be called texm 10cal or texm Its location depends on your system MacTeX Users username Library texmf e Unix type systems Usually texmf MikTeX Your local directory tree can be any folder you like as long as you th
420. te equation number and a separate equation number plus a letter respectively for each case 15 3 The varioref package The varioref package introduces a new command called vref This command is used exactly like the basic ref but it has a different output according to the context If the object to be referenced is in the same page it works just like ref if the object is far away it will print something like 5 on page 25 i e it adds the page number automatically If the object is close it can use more refined sentences like on the next page or on the facing page automatically according to the context and the document class This command has to be used very carefully It outputs more than one word so it may happen its output falls on two different pages In this case the algorithm can get confused and cause a loop Let s make an example You label an object on page 23 and the vref output happens to stay between page 23 and 24 If it were on page 23 it would print like the basic ref if it were on page 24 it would print on the previous page but it is on both and this may cause some strange errors at compiling time that are very hard to be fixed You could think that this happens very rarely unfortunately if you write a long document it is not uncommon to have hundreds of references so situations like these are likely to happen One way to avoid problems during development is to use the standard ref all the time and convert
421. tead of this License But first please read lt http www gnu org philosophy why not Igpl html gt If a section in the Document is Entitled Acknowledgements Dedications or History the requirement section 4 to Preserve its Title section 1 will typically require changing the actual title 9 TERMINATION You may not copy modify sublicense or distribute the Document except as expressly provided under this License Any attempt otherwise to copy mod ify sublicense or distribute it is void and will automatically terminate your rights under this License However if you cease all violation of this License then your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated a provisionally unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and finally terminates your license and b permanently if the copyright holder fails to notify you of the violation by some reasonable means prior to 60 days after the cessation Moreover your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated per manently if the copyright holder notifies you of the violation by some reason able means this is the first time you have received notice of violation of this License for any work from that copyright holder and you cure the violation prior to 30 days after your receipt of the notice Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate the licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License If
422. ter you should not have any problem If you are writing your document using different programs if could start getting some strange errors from the compiler The reason could be that the accented letters were not included properly within your source file and LaTeX can t recognize them The reason is that an editor modified your document with a different encoding from the one that was used when creating it Most of the operating systems use UTF 8 as default but this could create problems if are using programs based on different libraries or different operating systems The best way to solve this problem is to change the encoding to ISO 8859 1 that includes all the letters you need Some text editors let you change the encoding in the settings 39 4 12 Korean To use LaTeX for typesetting Korean we need to solve three problems 1 We must be able to edit Korean input files Korean input files must be in plain text format a Korean using Unicode These days all three major operating systems Mac OS Unix Windows come equipped with pretty decent multilingual support and internationalization features so that editing Korean text file is not so much of a problem anymore even on non Korean operating systems In your text editor not your word processor go to Settings and choose UTF 8 Set the preamble in latex to UTF 8 as well usepackage with values ucs and utfSx Open your Korean keyboard from the keyboard menu and start writing b Korean usin
423. ter 24 2 3 on page 207 50 Chapter 12 3 1 on page 100 51 Chapter 6 1 4 on page 34 52 Chapter 32 2 on page 266 53 Chapter 42 on page 337 54 Chapter 6 1 4 on page 34 55 Chapter 34 1 on page 273 355 Command Glossary raggedleft Command used for right justified within other environments raggedright Command used for left justified within other environments raisebox Creates a box and raises its content See LaTeX Advanced Topics Boxes ref Used to reference to number of previously declared label See Labels and Cross referencing renewcommand right rm roman rule Creates a line of specified width and height See LaTeX Advanced Topics Rules and Struts gt 45 18 S savebox Makes a box and saves it in a named storage bin sbox The short form of savebox with no optional arguments sc scriptsize Sets font size See Formatting section Starts a new section See Document Structure setcounter setlength settowidth 56 Chapter 32 2 on page 266 57 Chapter 15 on page 151 58 Chapter 32 3 on page 268 59 Chapter 12 on page 95 60 Chapter 6 1 4 on page 34 356 Mf shortstack signature In the Letter class specifies a signature for later insertion by closing sl slash See slash marks small Sets font size See Formatting smallskip sout Strikes out text Requires ulem package See Formatting space force ordinary space sqrt Creates a root default squ
424. ter opening the t able environment More informations about floating environments captions etc can be found in Floats Figures and Captions 10 2 The tabular environment The tabular environment can be used to typeset tables with optional horizontal and vertical lines LaTeX determines the width of the columns automatically The first line of the environment has the form begin tabular pos table spec The table spec argument tells LaTeX the alignment to be used in each column and the vertical lines to insert The number of columns does not need to be specified as it is inferred by looking at the number of arguments provided It is also possible to add vertical lines between the columns here The following symbols are available to describe the table columns some of them require that the package array has been loaded 1 left justified column amp centered column r right justified column p width paragraph column with text vertically aligned at the top 10 Chapter 24 on page 203 78 The tabular environment m width paragraph column with text vertically aligned in the middle requires array package b width paragraph column with text vertically aligned at the bottom requires array package vertical line double vertical line By default if the text in a column is too wide for the page LaTeX won t automatically wrap it Using p width you can defin
425. terial by anyone who conveys the material or modified versions of it with con tractual assumptions of liability to the recipient for any liability that these contractual assumptions directly impose on those licensors and authors All other non permissive additional terms are considered further restric tions within the meaning of section 10 If the Program as you received it or any part of it contains a notice stating that it is governed by this Li cense along with a term that is a further restriction you may remove that term If a license document contains a further restriction but permits reli censing or conveying under this License you may add to a covered work material governed by the terms of that license document provided that the further restriction does not survive such relicensing or conveying If you add terms to a covered work in accord with this section you must place in the relevant source files a statement of the additional terms that apply to those files or a notice indicating where to find the applicable terms Additional terms permissive or non permissive may be stated in the form of a separately written license or stated as exceptions the above requirements apply either way 8 Termination You may not propagate or modify a covered work except as expressly pro vided under this License Any attempt otherwise to propagate or modify it is void and will automatically terminate your rights under this
426. th A4 document size with smaller margins Use the geomet ry package This package allows you to specify the 4 margins without needing to remember the particular page dimensions commands You can enter the measures in centimeters and inches as well Use cm for centimeters and in for inches after each value e g 1 0in or 97 Page Layout 2 54cm Note that by default i e without any options this package already reduces the margins so for a standard layout you may not need to specify anything These values are relative to the edge of paper Oin and go inward it It may be implemented as follows usepackage top tlength bottom blength left llength right rlength geometry Edit individual page dimension variables described above using the addtolength and setlength commands For instance Voddsidemargin 1cm setlength textwidth 6 5in addtolength voffset 5pt Additionally there are several packages designed to solve the problem of varying pages sizes which override any defaults setup by the document class One of the most versatile packages for page layout is the geomet ry package For instance to set the page size add the following to your preamble usepackage a4paper geometry The geomet ry package has many pre defined page sizes like a4paper built in Others include a0paper alpaper a6paper bOpaper blpaper b6paper letterpaper legalpaper executivepaper To explicitly change the pap
427. that widows and orphans appear in LaTeX documents You can try to deal with them using manual page formatting but there s also an automatic solution LaTeX has a parameter for penalty for widows and orphans club lines in LaTeX terminology With the greater penalty LaTeX will try more to avoid widows and orphans You can try to increase these penalties by putting following commands in your document preamble Nwidowpenalty 300 Nclubpenalty 300 If this does not help you can try increasing these values even more to a maximum of 10000 However it is not recommended to set this value too high as setting it to 10000 forbids LaTeX from doing this altogether which might result in strange behavior It also helps to have rubber band values for the space between paragraphs setlength parskip 3ex plus 2ex minus 2ex Alternatively you can use the needspace package to reserve some lines and thus to prevent page breaking for those lines needspace 5 baselineskip Some 4 http en wikipedia org wiki Widows 20and 20orphans 108 Summary text on lines 12 7 Summary This tutorial is relatively short largely due to the fact that the whole LaTeX ethos is to concentrate on the content and let LaTeX and or other typographers who have developed suitable document classes decide on the best presentation The next step to achieve greater control of page layout is to set about designing your own class Unfortunately that
428. the date is excluded from the title page by using date It defaults to today if not in the source file To form a title page use maketitle This should go after the preceding commands For most document styles this will form a separate page while the article document style will place the title on the top of the first page Note that the abstract environment should precede the maket it le command in AMS documents Footnotes within the title page can be specified with the thanks command For example one may add author John Doe thanks Funded by NASA Grant 42 The thanks command can also be used in the NC itle It is dependent on the document class which commands are used in the title page generated by maketitle For example the amsart uses commands such as Naddress Ndedicatory email and more in the title page while other classes may only use title 1 Chapter 6 1 2 on page 32 2 Chapter 12 on page 95 45 Title Creation 8 2 Custom Title Pages 8 2 1 Create the title Normally the benefit of using LaTeX instead of traditional word processing programs is that LaTeX frees you to concentrate on content by handling margins justification and other typesetting concerns On the other hand if you want to write your own title format it is exactly the opposite you have to take care of everything this time LaTeX will do nothing to help you It can be challenging to create your own title format since LaTeX was not de
429. the spacing but the actual printing is between you and your printer One user reports that printing envelopes created with envlab is relatively painless If you use the geomet ry package you may find the following commands useful for printing the envelope pdflatex envelope tex pdf2ps envelope pdf 1 http mirror hmc edu ctan macros latex contrib envlab elguide pdf 179 Letters lpr o landscape envelope ps Alternatively you can use the latex dvi output driver In the first line dvips command converts the dvi file produced by latex into a ps PostScript file In the second line the PostScript file is sent to the printer latex envelope tex amp amp dvips t unknown T 9 5in 4 125in envelope dvi lpr o landscape envelope ps It is reported that pdf latex creates the right page size but not dvips despite what it says in the geometry manual It will never work though unless your printer settings are adjusted to the correct page style These settings depend on the printer filter you are using and in CUPS might be available on the 1pr command line if you are masochistic 21 3 Windowed envelopes An alternative to separately printing addresses on envelopes is to use the letter class from the KOMA package It supports additional features like folding marks and the correct address placement for windowed envelopes Using the scrlttr2 document class from the KOMA package the example letter code is o koma env t
430. the starred forms of the float commands e g begin figurex which makes the float span all columns This is not hugely problematic since floats of the same width as a column may be too small and you would probably want to span them anyway See this section for a more detailed discussion To create a typical two column layout begin multicols 2 lots of text end multicols The parameter columnseprule holds the width of the vertical rules By default the lines are omitted as this parameter is set to a length of Opt Do the following before the beginning of the environment setlength columnseprule lpt This will draw a thin line of Ipt in width A thick line would not look very pleasing however you are free to put in any length of your choosing Also to change the horizontal space in between columns the default is set at 10pt which is quite narrow then you need to change the columnsep parameter setlength columnsep 20pt To force a break in a column the command columnbreak isusedinamulticols environment 12 5 Manual page formatting There may be instances especially in very long documents such as books that LaTeX will not get all page breaks looking as good as it could It may therefore be necessary to manually tweak the page formatting Of course you should only do this at the very final stage of producing your document once all the content is complete LaTeX offers the following newline Breaks the
431. these conditions a The work must carry prominent notices stating that you modified it and giving a relevant date b The work must carry prominent notices stating that it is released under this License and any conditions added under section 7 This requirement modifies the requirement in section 4 to keep intact all notices c You must license the entire work as a whole under this License to anyone who comes into possession of a copy This License will therefore apply along with any applicable section 7 additional terms to the whole of the work and all its parts regardless of how they are packaged This License gives no permission to license the work in any other way but it does not invalidate such permission if you have separately received it d If the work has interactive user interfaces each must display Appropriate Legal Notices however if the Program has interactive interfaces that do not display Appropriate Legal Notices your work need not make them do so A compilation of a covered work with other separate and independent works which are not by their nature extensions of the covered work and which are not combined with it such as to form a larger program in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium is called an aggregate if the compilation and its resulting copyright are not used to limit the access or legal rights of the compilation s users beyond what the individual works permit Inclusion of a cover
432. ths elements 40 requires the amsmath package 128 Formatting mathematics symbols but for the sake of simplicity you may literally add the space character in the affected text s itself just before the text NE 50 text apples times 100 text apples Ntext lots of apples 2 50 apples x 100 apples lots of apples 13 11 1 Formatted text Using the text is fine and gets the basic result Yet there is an alternative that offers a lit tle more flexibility You may recall the introduction of font formatting commands such as textrm textit textbf etc These commands format the argument accordingly e g textbf bold text gives bold text These commands are equally valid within a maths en vironment to include text The added benefit here is that you can have better control over the font formatting rather than the standard text achieved with text NE 50 Ntextrm apples Ntimes 100 Ntextbf apples textit lots of apples 2 50 apples x 100 apples lots of apples 13 12 Formatting mathematics symbols We can now format text what about formatting mathematical expressions There are a set of formatting commands very similar to the font formatting ones just used except that they are specifically aimed at text in math mode requires amsfonts LaTeX com Sample Description Common use mand mathnormal ABCDEFabcde f 123456 the default math font most mathematical n
433. tion mwcls Alternatively you can use the mwart class instead of article mwbk instead of book and mwrep instead of report those classes have much more European typography settings but do not require the use of polish babel settings or character encoding Simple usage documentclass mwart usepackage polish babel usepackage polski begin document P jd kinze te chmurno w gtab flaszy end document Full documentation for those classes is available at http www ci pwr wroc pl pmazur LaTeX mw clsdoc pdf polish Indentation It may be customary depending on publisher to indent the first paragraph in sections and chapters usepackage indentfirst Hyphenation and typography It s much more frowned upon to set pages with hyphenation between pages than it is customary in American typesetting To adjust penalties for hyphenation spanning pages use this command brokenpenalty 1000 To adjust penalties for leaving widows and orphans clubs in TeX nomenclature use those commands clubpenalty 1000 widowpenalty 1000 14 http www ci pwr wroc pl pmazur LaTeX mwclsdoc pdf 326 Hyphenating languages Commas in math According to Polish typography rules fractional parts of numbers should be delimited by a comma not a dot To make LaTeX not insert additional space in math mode after a comma unless there is a space after the comma use the icomma package usepackage icomma U
434. tion Information But this re quirement does not apply if neither you nor any third party retains the ability to install modified object code on the User Product for example the work has been installed in ROM The requirement to provide Installation Information does not include a re quirement to continue to provide support service warranty or updates for a work that has been modified or installed by the recipient or for the User Product in which it has been modified or installed Access to a network may be denied when the modification itself materially and adversely affects the operation of the network or violates the rules and protocols for communica tion across the network Corresponding Source conveyed and Installation Information provided in accord with this section must be in a format that is publicly documented and with an implementation available to the public in source code form and must require no special password or key for unpacking reading or copy ing 7 Additional Terms Additional permissions are terms that supplement the terms of this License by making exceptions from one or more of its conditions Additional permis sions that are applicable to the entire Program shall be treated as though they were included in this License to the extent that they are valid under applica ble law If additional permissions apply only to part of the Program that part may be used separately under those permissions but the entire
435. tit tit tit cytl tit tit tit tit tit tit tit tit Et titl tit tit tit1 tit tit tit titl tit EPT le User Mabdul le User Madskaddie le User MarSraM le User Maratonda le User Marozols le User Marra le User Martin scharrer le User Martin von Wittich le User MartinSpacek le User Martinkunev le User Mathieu Perrin le User Matthias M le User Mckay le User Mcld le User Mecanismo le User Merciadriluca le User Mhue le User MichaelBueker le User Mietchen le User Mijikenda le User Mike lifeguard le User Mikhail Ryazanov le User Mimo le User MoMaT le User Modest_Genius 377 Contributors 6 N N a na ha a ke ke ke ke be ke LA be ke 3 1 1 7 Lu ra Morelight Mrt doulaty 3 Ms2ger Mwtoews Naught101 76 NavarroJ Nbrouard Neet Nemoniac Nemti Neoptolemus Neoriddle 283 Netheril96 94 Niel Bowerman Nigels 8 Nixphoeni Nkour288 Norbert beckers 9 Nothing1212290 NqpZ2 Nsuwan Nux2 Oderbolz Orderud2 Otec Stochastik 280 282 285 87 272 http en wikibooks org w index php title User Morelight 273 http en wikibooks org w index php title User Mrt doulaty 274 http en wikibooks org w index php title User Ms2ger 275 http en wikibooks org w index php title User Mwtoews 276 http en wikibooks org w index php
436. title User Naught101 27 http en wikibooks org w index php title User NavarroJ 278 http en wikibooks org w index php title User Nbrouard 279 http en wikibooks org w index php title User Neet 280 http en wikibooks org w index php title User Nemoniac 281 http en wikibooks org w index php title User Nemti 282 http en wikibooks org w index php tit User Neoptolemus 283 http en wikibooks org w index php title User Neoriddl 284 http en wikibooks org w index php title User Netheril96 285 http en wikibooks org w index php title User Niel Bowerman 286 http en wikibooks org w index php title User Nigels 287 http en wikibooks org w index php title User Nixphoeni 288 http en wikibooks org w index php title User Nkour 289 http en wikibooks org w index php title User Norbert beckers 290 http en wikibooks org w index php title User Nothingl212 291 http en wikibooks org w index php title User NqpZ 202 http en wikibooks org w index php title User Nsuwan 203 http en wikibooks org w index php title User Nux 294 http en wikibooks org w index php title User Oderbolz 295 http en wikibooks org w index php title User Orderud 296 http en wikibooks org w index php title User Otec Stochastik 378 Wiki users 27 PAC 11 PAC22 8 Pamputt 1 Pandora853 2 Panic2k4 0 1 PatrickGalyon 4 Paxinum 2 Pdelong PeterAllen 2 Petter Strandmark3 6 64 Pi zero 11 Piksi 0 13 Pmille
437. tle How to Structure a LaTeX Document author Andrew Roberts date December 2004 maketitle end document The title author and date commands are self explanatory You put the title author name and date in curly braces after the relevant command The title and author are usually compulsory at least if you want LaTeX to write the title automatically if you omit the date command LaTeX uses today s date by default You always finish the top matter with the maket itle command which tells LaTeX that it S complete and it can typeset the title according to the information you have provided and the class style you are using If you omit Nmaket itle the titling will never be typeset unless you write your own Here is a more complicated example title How to Structure a LaTeX Document Nauthor Andrew Roberts NN School of Computing 32 The document environment University of Leeds Leeds United Kingdom LS2 1HE texttt andyr comp leeds ac uk lt gt date today maketitle as you can see you can use commands as arguments of title and the others The double backslash AM is the LaTeX command for forced linebreak LaTeX normally decides by itself where to break lines and it s usually right but sometimes you need to cut a line short like here and start a new one If there are two authors separate them with the and command title Our Fun Document author Jane Doe and John
438. tle User Jmcdon10 194 http en wikibooks org w index php title User Joaospam 195 http en wikibooks org w index php title User Jodi a schneider 196 http en wikibooks org w index php title User Joe Schmedley 374 Wiki users 1 Joeyboi 1 John1923198 13 Jomegat 9 Jonathan Webley2 1 Jotomicron 1 Jraregris 26 Jtwdog 2 Juliabackhausen 5 Juliusross 1 Justin W Smith 1 Jwchong 2 Karcih 8 2 Karper 1 Karthicknainar 7 Kazkaskazkasako 2 Kejia 1 Kenyon 6 Keplerspeed 1 Kernigh 5 2 Kevang 1 Kevinfiesta 1 KlausFoehl Klusinyan Konteki220 12 Kovianyo 197 http en wikibooks org w index p 198 http en wikibooks org w index p 199 http en wikibooks org w index p 200 http en wikibooks org w index p 201 http en wikibooks org w index p 202 http en wikibooks org w index p 203 http en wikibooks org w index p 204 http en wikibooks org w index p 205 http en wikibooks org w index p 206 http en wikibooks org w index p 207 http en wikibooks org w index p 208 http en wikibooks org w index p 209 http en wikibooks org w index p 210 http en wikibooks org w index p 211 http en wikibooks org w index p 212 http en wikibooks org w index p 213 http en wikibooks org w index p 214 http en wikibooks org w index p 215 http en wikibooks org w index p 216 http en wikibooks org w index
439. tle and your complicated code will be i title tex 48 will get more confused but you can do it solated from all the rest within its own file Custom Title Pages 8 2 3 Integrating the title page Assuming that your title page is now contained in a file named title tex it must be placed in the same directory as the main document In order to integrate it the in put command must be used by placing input title tex at the top of the doc ument Don t forget to add the commands usepackage pdftex graphicx and newcommand HRule rule linewidth 0 5mm in the preamble section as well For example the top section of your document would look like usepackage pdftex graphicx newcommand HRule rule linewidth 0 5mm begin document input title tex tableofcontents 8 2 4 Additional documentation and packages The titlepages package presents many styles of designs for title pages Italian users may also want to use the frontespizio package 49 9 Bibliography Management For any academic research writing incorporating references into a document is an important task Fortunately LaTeX has a variety of features that make dealing with references much simpler including built in support for citing references However a much more powerful and flexible solution is achieved thanks to an auxiliary tool called BibTeX which comes bundled as standard with LaTeX BibTeX provides for the storage of all ref
440. to mean or look like Newcomers should remember to check the list of special characters a very large number of errors when you are learning LaTeX are due to accidentally typing a special character when you didn t mean to This disappears after a few days as you get used to them 7 3 1 Too many s Too many s 1 6 date December 2004 The reason LaTeX thinks there are too many s here is that the opening curly brace is missing after the Ndate control sequence and before the word December so the closing curly brace is seen as one too many which it is In fact there are other things which can follow the date command 40 Examples apart from a date in curly braces so LaTeX cannot possibly guess that you ve missed out the opening curly brace until it finds a closing one 7 3 2 Undefined control sequence Undefined control sequence 1 6 dtae December 2004 In this example LaTeX is complaining that it has no such command control sequence as dtae Obviously it s been mistyped but only a human can detect that fact all LaTeX knows is that dtae is not a command it knows about it s undefined Mistypings are the most common source of errors Some editors allow common commands and environments to be inserted using drop down menus or icons which may be used to avoid these errors 7 3 3 Not in Mathematics Mode Missing inserted A character that can only be used in the mathematics was inserted in normal text
441. tory bibtex bib see figure 1 Hence all users can specify this bibliography by only using the file name without the full path no matter where the user s working copy of the common texmf tree is located All users edit our bibliographic data base with the graphical BibTeX editor JabRef http jabref sourceforge net As JabRef is written in Java it runs on all major operating sys tems As different versions of JabRef generally save files in a slightly different way e g by introducing line breaks at different positions all users should use the same e g last stable version of JabRef Otherwise there would be many differences between different versions of bib files that solely originate from using different version of JabRef Hence it would be hard to find the real differences between the compared documents Furthermore the probability of conflicts would be much higher see section Subversion really makes the difference As JabRef saves the BibTeX data base with the native newline character of the author s operating system it is recommended to add the Subversion property svn eol style and set it to native see section Subversion really makes the difference 35 http www qtrac eu diffpdf html 36 http www qtrac eu comparepdf html 287 Collaborative Writing of LaTeX Documents R JabRef preferences 2 General Entry type Key pattern Groups External programs Entry table Entry preview Name formatter XMP
442. tp en wikibooks org w index php title User Krischik 225 http en wikibooks org w index php title User Krishnavedala 226 http en wikibooks org w index php title User Krisrose 227 http en wikibooks org w index php title User Kroolik 228 http en wikibooks org w index php title User Krst 229 http en wikibooks org w index php title User Kubieziel 230 http en wikibooks org w index php title User Kwetal 231 http en wikibooks org w index php title User LOST 232 http en wikibooks org w index php title User LR 233 http en wikibooks org w index php title User LaTeX 234 http en wikibooks org w index php title User Latexing 235 http en wikibooks org w index php title User Lavaka 236 http en wikibooks org w index php title User Lbailey45 237 http en wikibooks org w index php title User Listdata 238 http en wikibooks org w index php title User Literaturgenerator 239 http en wikibooks org w index php title User Lnkbuildingservices4u 240 http en wikibooks org w index php title User Lotus noir 24 http en wikibooks org w index php title User Louabill 242 http en wikibooks org w index php title User Louisix 243 http en wikibooks org w index php title User Lucasreddinger 244 http en wikibooks org w index php title User MER C 245 http en wikibooks org w index php title User MaBoehm 246 http en wikibooks org w index php title User Maartenweyn 376 Wiki users 1 Mabdul 1 Madskadd
443. tp ftp dante de tex archive help Catalogue bytopic html pgftikzsection 22 2 2 Xfig Vector graphics can be created using the vector painting program Xfig see Installation and exported for LaTeX In Xfig once your graphic is saved as a file test fig you need to export it using the File gt Export drop down menu from the main Xfig window and then select the Combined PS Latex both parts in the language drop down list If you don t change any other settings two files will be created in the same directory as the test fig file such as test pstex t and test pstex The figure can then be placed in a LaTeX document 39 http www ctan org tex archive macros latex contrib pdfpages pdfpages pdf 40 http en wikibooks org wiki LaTeX 2FPGF 2FTikZ 41 Chapter 41 4 1 on page 335 195 Importing Graphics begin figure centering input xfig test pstex_t caption This is the caption of my figure label fig test end figure 22 2 3 Ipe The Ipe extensible drawing editor is a free vector graphics editor for creating figures in PDF or EPS format Unlike Xfig Ipe represents LaTeX fonts in their correct size on the screen which makes it easier to place text labels at the right spot Ipe also has various snapping modes for example snapping to points lines or intersections that can be used for geometric constructions 22 2 4 Inkscape Another program for creating vector graphics is Inkscape It works with Scalable
444. trait but you have some contents like a large diagram or table that would be displayed better on a landscape page However you still want the consistency of your headers and footers appearing the same place as the other pages The 1scape package is for this very purpose It supplies a landscape environment and anything inside is basically rotated No actual page dimensions are changed This approach is more applicable 99 Page Layout to books or reports than to typical academic publications Using pdf1scape instead of 1scape when generating a PDF document will make the page appear right side up when viewed the single page that is in landscape format will be rotated while the rest will be left in portrait orientation Also to get a table to appear correctly on a landscaped page one must place the tabular envi ronment inside a table environment which is itself inside the landscape environment e g it should look like this begin landscape begin table centering optional probably makes it look better to have it centered on the page begin tabular end tabular end table end landscape 12 2 2 Change orientation of floating environment If you use the above code you will see that the table is inserted where it is in the code It will not be floated To fix this you need the package rotating begin table p centering rotatebox 90 begin minipage textheight begin tabular 1l 1 1 e
445. tructure is visible to the user and can be easily copied to another document In WYSIWYG applications it is often not obvious how a certain formatting was produced and it might be impossible to copy it directly for use in another document The layout fonts tables and so on are consistent throughout the document Mathematical formulae can be easily typeset ndexes footnotes citations and references are generated easily Since the document source is plain text tables figures equations etc can be generated program matically with any language You are forced to structure your documents correctly http en wikipedia org wiki Leslie 20Lamport http www ctan org http en wikibooks org wiki TeX http en wikipedia org wiki WYSIWYG http en wikipedia org wiki Openoffice org http en wikipedia org wiki Microsoft 20Word http en wikipedia org wiki XML VD GO JA Ch LE L Other terms regarding TeX The LaTeX like approach can be called WYSIWYM i e What You See Is What You Mean you can t see what the final version will look like while typing Instead you see the logical structure of the document LaTeX takes care of the formatting for you The LaTeX document is a plain text file containing the content of the document with additional markup When the source file is processed by the macro package it can produce documents in several formats LaTeX natively supports DVI and PDF but by using other software you
446. ts such as subsection 36 4 Generic header As explained in the previous sections a LaTeX source can be used to generate both a DVI and a PDF file For very basic documents the source is the same but if the documents gets more complicated it could be necessary to make some changes in the source so that it will work for a format but it will not for the other For example all that is related to graphics has to be adapted according to the final format As discussed in the section about floating objects even if you should use different pictures according to the final format you can override this limit putting in the same folder pictures in different formats e g EPS and PNG with the same name and link them without writing the extension There is a simple way to solve this problem usepackage ifpdf or if you don t have this package you can add the following text just after documentclass f newif ifpdf ifx pdfoutput undefined pdffalse else ifnum pdfoutput 1 pdftrue else pdffalse fi fi this is plain TeX code The ifpdf package and this code both define a new if else you can use to change your code according to the compiler you are using After you have used this code you can use whenever you want in your document the following syntax ifpdf we are running pdflatex else we are running latex fi 292 Graphics and Graph editors place after Nifpdf the code you want to insert if you are com
447. ts will depend on the compiler you are using Compiling with latex The only format you can include while compiling with latex is Encapsulated PostScript EPS The EPS format was defined by Adobe Systems for making it easy for applications to import postscript based graphics into documents Because an EPS file declares the size of the image it makes it easy for systems like LaTeX to arrange the text and the graphics in the best way EPS is a vector format this means that it can have very high quality if it is created properly with programs that are able to manage vector graphics It is also possible to store bit map pictures within EPS but they will need a lot of disk space Many graphics software packages have the ability to save images in the EPS format extension is normally eps Here are some examples of software that can output EPS formats Printing in an EPS file Under Windows PDFCreator is an open source software that can create PDF as well as EPS files It installs a virtual printer that can be accessed from other software having a print entry in their menu virtually any program Creating and converting vector graphics Commercial vector graphics software such as Adobe Illustrator CorelDRAW and FreeHand are commonly used and can read and write EPS figures However these products are limited to Windows and Mac OS platforms Inkscape can save in vector EPS format and it can run on multiple platforms I
448. ttom fnsymbol footnote Creates a footnote gt Mootnotemark Mootnotesize Sets font size See Formatting 15 Chapter 12 on page 95 16 Chapter 12 on page 95 349 Command Glossary Mootnotetext Mrac inserts a fraction in mathematics mode The usage is frac numerator denominator Mrame framebox Like makebox but creates a frame around the box See LaTeX Advanced Topics Boxes Mrenchspacing Instructs LaTex to abstain from inserting more space after a period than is the case for an ordi nary character In order to untoggle this functionality resort to the command Wonfrenchspacing 45 8 G 45 9 H hfill Abbreviation for hspace fill hline adds a horizontal line in a tabular environment See also cline Tables chapter href Add a link or an anchor See Hyperlinks hrulefill hspace Produces horizontal space huge Sets font size See Formatting Huge Sets font size See Formatting hyphenation word list 17 Chapter 32 2 on page 266 18 Chapter 45 14 on page 353 19 Chapter 45 4 on page 348 20 Chapter 10 on page 77 2 Chapter 26 on page 229 22 Chapter 12 on page 95 23 Chapter 12 on page 95 350 Overrides default hyphenation algorithm for specified words See Hyphenation 45 10 I include This command is different from input in that it s the output that is added instead of the commands from the other files For more see LaTex Basics inclu
449. ttp en wikibooks org wiki User 3AAlejo2083 500 http en wikibooks org wiki User 3AMwtoews 501 http en wikibooks org wiki User 3AMwtoews 502 http en wikibooks org wiki User 3AAlejo2083 503 http en wikibooks org wiki User 3AAlejo2083 504 http en wikibooks org wiki User 3AAlejo2083 505 http en wikibooks org wiki User 3ANeoriddl 506 http en wikibooks org wiki User 3AChrisHodgesUK 507 http en wikibooks org wiki User 3AAlejo2083 508 http en wikibooks org wiki User 3AAlejo2083 509 http en wikibooks org wiki User 3AAlejo2083 510 http en wikibooks org wiki User 3AChrisHodgesUK 511 http en wikibooks org wiki User 3AAlejo2083 512 http en wikibooks org wiki 3Awikibooks 3Aen 3AUser 3AArnehe 513 http en wikibooks org 514 http en wikibooks org wiki 3Awikibooks 3Aen 3AUser 3AArnehe 515 http en wikibooks org 516 http en wikibooks org wiki 3Awikibooks 3Aen 3AUser 3AArnehe 517 http en wikibooks org 518 http en wikibooks org wiki 3Awikibooks 3Aen 3AUser 3AArnehe 519 http en wikibooks org 520 http en wikibooks org wiki 3Awikibooks 3Aen 3AUser 3AArnehe 521 http en wikibooks org 522 http en wikibooks org wiki User 3AAlejo2083 389 49 Licenses 49 1 GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 3 29 June 2007 Copyright 2007 Free Software Foundation Inc lt http fsf org gt Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document but changing it is not allowed
450. ttribution 2 0 License http creativecommons org licenses by 2 0 cc by 2 0 Creative Commons Attribution 2 0 License http creativecommons org licenses by 2 0 deed en cc by 2 5 Creative Commons Attribution 2 5 License http creativecommons org licenses by 2 5 deed en cc by 3 0 Creative Commons Attribution 3 0 License http creativecommons org licenses by 3 0 deed en GPL GNU General Public License http www gnu org licenses gpl 2 0 txt LGPL GNU Lesser General Public License http www gnu org licenses lgpl html PD This image is in the public domain ATTR The copyright holder of this file allows anyone to use it for any purpose provided that the copyright holder is properly attributed Redistribution derivative work commercial use and all other use is permitted EURO This is the common reverse face of a euro coin The copyright on the design of the common face of the euro coins belongs to the European Commission Authorised is reproduction in a format without relief drawings paintings films provided they are not detrimental to the image of the euro LFK Lizenz Freie Kunst http artlibre org licence lal de CFR Copyright free use 385 List of Figures EPL Eclipse Public License http www eclipse org org documents epl vi10 php Copies of the GPL the LGPL as well as a GFDL are included in chapter Licenses Please note that image
451. twidth logo 1cm textsc LARGE University of Beer 1 5cm textsc Large Final year project 0 5cm Title HRule 0 4cm m UNIVERSITY OF BEER FINAL YEAR PROJECT Lager brewing techniques Author Supervisor John SMITH Dr Mark BROWN huge bfseries Lager brewing techniques NN 0 4cm HRule 1 5cm Author and supervisor begin minipage 0 4 textwidth begin flushleft large emph Author JAM John textsc Smith end flushleft end minipage begin minipage 0 4 textwidth begin flushright large emph Supervisor MN Dr Mark textsc Brown April 17 2012 end flushright Figure 2 end minipage vfill Bottom of the page large today end center end titlepage The picture is from a file called Logo png that is in the same directory of both title tex and test_title tex Since I wanted to insert both the author and supervisor names properly aligned I used a trick I created two small minipages one on left and one on the right Their width is a bit less than half of page width as you can see they are exactly 40 of the text width Within the minipages I have used different alignments Using Vu bottom of the page fill I could write the date exactly at the As you can see the code looks dirtier than standard LaTeX source because you have to take care of the output as well If you start changing font s output it it s only for the ti
452. u do so you can use the command fancyplain inside lhead etc When LaTeX wants to create a page with an empty style it will insert the first argument of fancyplain in all the other cases it will use the second argument So an improved version of the previous code would be pagestyle fancyplain fancyhf lhead fancyplain Andrew Roberts rhead fancyplain today rfoot fancyplain thepage It has the same behavior of the previous code but you will get empty header and footer in the title and at the beginning of chapters For two sided it s common to mirror the style of opposite pages you tend to think in terms of inner and outer So the same example as above for two sided is lhead Andrew Roberts rhead Andrew Roberts lhead today rhead today lfoot thepage rfoot thepage This is effectively saying my name is top outer todays date is top inner and current page number is bottom outer You can use the fancyplain command within them for two sided documents too As an example here is the complete code of a basic configuration you could use for a real document usepackage fancyhdr setlength headheight 15pt pagestyle fancyplain renewcommand chaptermark 1 markboth 1 lhead fancyplain thepage 104 Page styles chead rhead fancyplain textit leftmark lfoot cfoot rfoot NB If you want to make
453. u must make sure that they too receive or can get the source code And you must show them these terms so they know their rights Developers that use the GNU GPL protect your rights with two steps 1 assert copyright on the software and 2 offer you this License giving you legal permission to copy distribute and or modify it For the developers and authors protection the GPL clearly explains that there is no warranty for this free software For both users and authors sake the GPL requires that modified versions be marked as changed so that their problems will not be attributed erroneously to authors of previous versions Some devices are designed to deny users access to install or run modified versions of the software inside them although the manufacturer can do so This is fundamentally incompatible with the aim of protecting users free dom to change the software The systematic pattern of such abuse occurs in the area of products for individuals to use which is precisely where it is most unacceptable Therefore we have designed this version of the GPL to prohibit the practice for those products If such problems arise substantially in other domains we stand ready to extend this provision to those domains in future versions of the GPL as needed to protect the freedom of users Finally every program is threatened constantly by software patents States should not allow patents to restrict development and use of software
454. uad and qquad A Nquad is a space equal to the current font size So if you are using an 11pt font then the space provided by quad will also be 11pt horizontally of course The qquad gives twice that amount As you can see from the code from the above example quads were used to add some separation between the maths and the text OK so back to the fine tuning as mentioned at the beginning of the document A good example would be displaying the simple equation for the indefinite integral of y with respect to x fyd If you were to try this you may write 6l http en wikibooks org wiki LaTeX 2FAdvanced_Mathematics 23The_cases_ environment 132 Controlling horizontal spacing Nint y mathrm d x Jydx However this doesn t give the correct result LaTeX doesn t respect the white space left in the code to signify that the y and the dx are independent entities Instead it lumps them altogether A quad would clearly be overkill in this situation what is needed are some small spaces to be utilized in this type of instance and that s what LaTeX provides Command Description Size du small space 3 18 of a quad V medium space 4 18 of a quad VW large space 5 18 of a quad negative space 3 18 of a quad NB you can use more than one command in a sequence to achieve a greater space if necessary So to rectify the current problem N Nint y Jydx N Nint y Jydx N
455. uality that he saw affecting his own books and articles TeX is a programming language in the sense that it supports the if else construct you can make calculations with it that are performed while compiling the document etc but you would find it very hard to do anything else but typesetting with it The fine control TeX offers makes it very powerful but also difficult and time consuming to use TeX is renowned for being extremely stable for running on many different kinds of computers and for being virtually bug free As powerful as TeX might be effective use requires a fairly high level of learning and investment of time to build custom macros for text formatting For those searching for a more straightforward solution document preparation systems based on TeX consisting of collections of pre built macros exist LaTeX is one of the more popular of these It is appreciated for being time saving automating certain tasks and reducing user introduced errors This is what makes it so popular However this comes at the cost of a sacrifice of flexibility TeX remains the language of choice for those wishing a dedicated formatting language and almost unlimited functionality 1 http en wikibooks org wiki TeX 2 http en wikipedia org wiki Donald 20Knuth Introduction 2 2 What is LaTeX LaTeX pronounced either Lah tech or Lay tech is a macro package based on TeX created by Leslie Lamport Its purpose is to simplify TeX typ
456. uch as PSTricks exploit the process of conversion to DVI and therefore will not work with pdflatex Some of those packages embed information in the DVI that doesn t appear when the DVI is viewed but reemerges when the DVI is converted to another newer format You would write your document slightly differently depending on the compiler you are using latex or pdflatex But as we will see later it is possible to add a sort of abstraction layer to hide the details of which compiler you re using while the compiler can handle the translation itself The following diagram shows the relationships between the LaTeX source code and the formats you can create from it 12 Prerequisites pdflatex Source formats Output formats dvi2ps PostScript Figure 1 The boxed red text represents the file formats the blue text on the arrows represents the commands you have to use the small dark green text under the boxes represents the image formats that are supported Any time you pass through an arrow you lose some information which might decrease the quality of your document Therefore in order to achieve the highest quality in your output file you should choose the shortest route to reach your target format This is probably the most convenient way to obtain an output in your desired format anyway Starting from a LaTeX source the best way is to use only latex for a DVI output or pdflatex for a PDF output converting to PostScript
457. ude these information not only as a comment in the LaTeX source code but also in the compiled DVI PS or PDF document This can be achieved with the LaTeX packages svn http www ctan org tex archive macros latex contrib svn svn info http www ctan org tex archive macros latex contrib svninfo or preferably svn multi http www ctan org tex archive macros latex contrib svn multi The most important directives for collaborative writing of LaTeX documents with version control systems are summarised in the following box Directives for using LaTeX with version control systems Avoid ineffective modifications Do not change line breaks without good reason Turn off automatic line wrapping of your LaTeX editor Start each new sentence in a new line Split long sentences into several lines so that each line has at most 80 characters Put only those files under version control that are directly modified by the user Verify that your code can be compiled flawlessly before committing your modifications to the repository 8 Use Subversions diff feature to critically review your modifications before committing them to the repository 9 Add a meaningful and descriptive comment when committing your modifications to the repository 10 Use the Subversion client for copying moving or renaming files and folders that are under revision control NYDN P Lo H m If the users are willing to let go of the built in diff utility
458. units are set like dB rad ulem 1t allows to underline text either with straight or wavy line Few examples of usage are added to the Formatting chapter 16 Chapter 16 on page 159 17 http en wikibooks org wiki LaTeX 2FMultiple files 23Subfiles package 18 Chapter 14 on page 147 19 http ctan org tex archive macros latex contrib siunitx 20 Chapter 11 on page 93 252 Creating packages url it defines the url command URLs often contain special character such as _ and amp in order to write them you should escape them inserting a backslash but if you write them as an argument of url you don t need to escape any special character and it will take care of proper formatting for you If you are using the hyperref you don t need to load ur1 because it already provides the url command verbatim it improves the verbat im environment fix ing some bugs Moreover it provides the comment environment that lets you add multiple line comments or easily comment out big parts of the code wrapfig to insert images surrounded by text It was discussed in section Floats Figures and Cap tions xypic is used to create trees graphs commutative diagrams and similar things 28 4 Creating packages See LaTeX Customizing LaTeX Creating your own package 28 5 External resources The best way to look for LaTeX packages is the already mentioned CTA
459. urce you are compiling must be in the same directory It will be as though all you have written within your package is within the document itself Alternatively it is possible to place the package within 7texmf tex latex mypack mypack sty where is your home directory On Windows this is often C Users username and where mypack is the name of your package Running texhash or equivalent will allow you to use your package as detailed above but without it needing to be in the same directory as your document 34 5 Creating your own style It is also possible to create your own style file The process is similar to the creation of your own package you can call your own style file in the preamble of any document by the command documentclass mystyle The name of the style file is then mystyle cls and can be opened with any text editor At the beginning of this file the following line has to be provided ProvidesClass mystyle again within the style files other files or packages are imported by the requirepackage command 277 35 Collaborative Writing of LaTeX Documents Note This Wikibook is based on the article Tools for Collaborative Writing of Scientific LaTeX Documents by Arne Henningsen that is published in The PracTeX Journal 2007 number 3 http www tug org pracjourn 35 1 Abstract Collaborative writing of documents requires a strong synchronisation among authors This Wikibook describes a possible way to organise the
460. use separate files for a better distinction between the modes you may need to copy the aux file from the handout compilation with the slides w o the notes 25 1 7 Columns and Blocks There are two handy environments for structuring a slide blocks which divide the slide horizon tally into headed sections and columns which divides a slide vertically into columns Columns Example begin frame begin columns c the c option specifies center vertical alignment column 5 textwidth column designated by a command Contents of the first column column 5 textwidth Contents split into two lines end columns end frame begin frame begin columns t contents are top vertically aligned begin column T 5cm each column can also be its own environment Contents of first column split into two lines end column begin column T 5cm alternative top align that s better for graphics includegraphics height 3cm graphic png end column end columns end frame Blocks Enclosing text in the block environment creates a distinct headed block of text This allows to visually distinguish parts of a slide easily There are three basic types of block Their formating depends on the theme being used Simple begin frame begin block This is a Block This is important information end block begin alertblock This is an Alert block This is an important alert end alertblock begin examp
461. ve repository if some external co authors do not have access to the common t exmf tree On the other hand all files that are automatically created or modified during the compilation process e g aut aux bbl bix blg dvi x glo gls idx ilg ind ist lof log lot nav x nlo out pdf ps x snm and x toc files or by the LaTeX or BibTeX editor e g x bak x bib x kilepr prj sav x tcp x tmp tps and x tex files generally should be not under version control because these files are not 27 http www tug org tetex 28 http www miktex org 283 Collaborative Writing of LaTeX Documents necessary for compilation and generally do not include additional information Furthermore these files are regularly modified so that conflicts are very likely 35 6 Subversion really makes the difference A great feature of a version control system is that all authors can easily trace the workflow of a project by viewing the differences between arbitrary versions of the files Authors are primarily interested in effective modifications of the source code that change the compiled document but not in ineffective modifications that have no impact on the compiled document e g the position of line breaks Software tools for comparing text documents diff tools generally cannot differen tiate between effective and ineffective modifications they highlight both types of mo
462. w index php title User BiT kibooks org w index php title User Bianbum kibooks org w index php title User Bilbo1507 kibooks org w index php title User Blacktrumpeter kibooks org w index php title User Blaisorblade kibooks org w index php title User Bonuama kibooks org w index php title User Borgg kibooks org w index php title User Bpsullivan kibooks org w index php title User Braindrain0000 kibooks org w index php title User Brendanarnold Wiki users 1 BrettMontgomery 1 Brevity 1 Bsander 8 Bumbulski 1 Bunyk 1 Byassine52 1 Bytecrook 1 CD Stevens 1 Caesura 1 Calimo 3 Cameronc 1 Canageek 1 CarsracBot 1 Cdecoro 3 Cengique 1 Chfailde 1 Chafe669 1 Chazz 2 Chisophugis 57 ChrisHodgesUK 1 ChristianGruen 1 Chuaprap 1 Chuckhoffmann 1 Clebell 1 Collinpark 47 http en wikibooks org w index 48 http en wikibooks org w index 49 http en wikibooks org w index 50 nhttp en wikibooks org w index 5 http en wikibooks org w index 52 http en wikibooks org w index 53 http en wikibooks org w index 54 http en wikibooks org w index 55 http en wikibooks org w index 56 http en wikibooks org w index 57 http en wikibooks org w index 58 http en wikibooks org w index 59 http en wikibooks org w index 60 nhttp en wikibooks org w index 61 http en wikibooks org w index 62 http en wikibooks org w index 63 http en wikibooks org w index 64
463. what they want to do write their documents TeX works originally came about precisely because a math professor wanted his students to have a better initial experience with LaTeX You can install TeX works with the package manager of your Linux distribution or choose it as an install option in the Windows or Mac installer 22 http alexkrispin wordpress com 2010 10 12 a script to automate the installation of texlive 23 http fedoraproject org wiki Features TeXLiv 24 http www gentoo org proj en tex texlive migration guide xml doc_chap2 25 http www tug org texlive acquire html 26 http www tug org mactex 27 http www tug org texworks Introduction LyX LyX is a popular LaTeX editor for Windows Linux and Mac OS It contains formula and table editors and shows visual clues of the final document on the screen enabling users to write LaTeX documents without worrying about the actual syntax Kile Kile is a LaTeX editor for KDE cross platform providing a powerful GUI for editing multiple documents and compiling them with many different TeX compilers Kile is based on Kate editor has a quick access toolbar for symbols document structure viewer a console and customizable build options Kile can be run in all operating systems that can run KDE TeXmaker TeXmaker is a cross platform editor very similar to Kile in features and user interface In addition it has its own PDF viewer TeXstudio TeXstudio
464. www 7 zip org The IATEX source itself was generated by a program written by Dirk H nniger which is freely available under an open source license from http de wikibooks org wiki Benutzer Dirk Huenniger wb2pdf This distribution also contains a configured version of the pdflatex compiler with all necessary packages and fonts needed to compile the IATEX source included in this PDF file Contents 10 Contents Introduction Dei AE CR Ru o boe Pee des usd tal ae de as 2 2 MW Date LaleX sod bor e sow deg m Rode bo RAV Bu bo a eos 2 3 Other terms regarding TeX 2 4 Prerequisites AEN a en ROC IR Us ee somos EN 2 5 IWAL Mext A 4a sce le REM Rum audi ime us Chapters Absolute Beginners Basics 5 T The LaTeX source ii e Cte re RT a 3 2 Input File Structute ues ado era e xe qe aee aD oy des 5 3 Our first document A a nr A A ADI RE od IN 5 4 And What HOw 2 2 2422 Dabo eve E i wa Document Structure 6 1 The document environment nm men Errors and Warnings eel Ertord e ssages c wee A a A OA S 4 2 Warnings 6 xg ee A A ote a RR USURPATUR E e Ta 2EXamiples La ae he Re Be we tede eh ee aut Title Creation 8 1 Standard Title Pages 2 oaoa ee 8 2 Custom Title Pages 2 2 2 ee Bibliography Management 9 1 Embedded system Como on aopa a aa en 92 e Ent 9 32 BID LS A Cr EE Eee Pa eye 9 4 Bibliography in the table of contents 9 5 Multiple Bibliographies o o e o 9 67 Re
465. x allows to specify alignment of columns in optional param eter Bmatrix centers columns by default Bmatrix B allows to specify alignment of columns in optional param eter vmatrix centers columns by default vmatrixx gt allows to specify alignment of columns in optional param eter Vmatrix centers columns by default 27 Chapter 13 9 1 on page 123 28 requires the ansmath package 29 requires the mathtools package 30 requires the amsmath package 31 requires the mathtools package 32 requires the amsmath package 33 requires the mathtools package 34 requires the amsmath package 35 requires the mathtools package 36 requires the amsmath package 125 Mathematics Environment name Surrounding delimiter Notes Vmatrix In allows to specify alignment of colums in optional parame ter When writing down arbitrary sized matrices it is common to use horizontal vertical and diagonal triplets of dots known as ellipses to fill in certain columns and rows These can be specified using the Ncdots vdots and Nddot s respectively NE A m n begin pmatrix a 1 1 amp a 1 2 Ncdots amp a 1 n NN a 2 1 amp a 2 2 amp Ncdots amp a 2 n NN Nvdots amp Nvdots amp Nddots amp Nvdots a m 1 a m 2 amp Ncdots amp a_ m n end pmatrix M41 A2 gt An 421 422 An Ann Om Am2 rr Amn In some cases you may want to have finer control of
466. x and scalebox require the graphicx package To tweak the space between columns LaTeX will by default choose very tight columns one can alter the column separation set length tabcolsep 5pt The default value is 6pt 10 5 Sideways tables Tables can also be put on their side within a document using the rotating package and the sidewaystable environments in place of the table environment NOTE most DVI viewers do not support displaying rotated text Convert your document to a PDF to see the result Most if not all PDF viewers do support rotated text usepackage rotating begin sidewaystable begin tabular end tabular end sidewaystable When it is desirable to place the rotated table at the exact location where it ap pears in the source tex file rot float package may be used Then one can use begin sidewaystable H just like for normal tables The H option can not be used without this package 10 6 Alternate Row Colors in Tables The xcolor package provides the necessary commands to produce tables with alternate row colors when loaded with the t able option The command rowcolors lt starting row gt lt odd color gt lt even color gt has to be specified right before the tabular environment starts even even even even even even documentclass article usepackage table xcolor 91 begin document begin center vowcolors 1 green pink begin tabular 111 odd
467. x php ti 158 http en wikibooks org w index php ti 159 http en wikibooks org w index php ti 160 http en wikibooks org w index php ti 161 http en wikibooks org w index php ti 162 http en wikibooks org w index php ti 163 http en wikibooks org w index php ti 164 http en wikibooks org w index php ti 165 http en wikibooks org w index php ti 166 http en wikibooks org w index php ti 167 http en wikibooks org w index php ti 168 http en wikibooks org w index php ti 169 http en wikibooks org w index php tit 170 http en wikibooks org w index php ti 171 http en wikibooks org w index php tit l le User Hankwang le User Hansfn le User Harrikoo le User Harrywt le User Helder wiki le User Helptry le User HenrikMidtiby le User Henry Tallboys le User Herbythyme le User Hermine potter le User Hippasus le User Hokiehead le User Hosszuka le User Hroobjartr le User ILubeMyCucumbers20 le User Iamunknown le User Icc97 le User Igjimh Le User Immae le User Infenw le User Insaneinside le User InverseHypercub le User IrfanAli le User Ish ishwar le User Itai 373 Contributors 4 JECompton 5 Jy 6 Jacho 4 1 JackPotte 7 2 Jacobrothstein 6 2 Jamoroch 1 Jan Winnicki 9 Janltx 1 Janskalicky 2 Jason barrington 1 Jasu 1 Javalenok 9 Jayk 1 Je ne d tiens pas la v rit universelle 9 2 JenVan 86 1 Jer789 87
468. x required graphics grfguide pdf 35 http en wikibooks org wiki grffile 191 Importing Graphics before running latex pdflatex or your TeX IDE But this of course is not a portable method 22 1 7 Images as Figures There are many scenarios where you might want to accompany an image with a caption and possibly a cross reference This is done using the figure environment The following code sample shows the bare minimum required to use an image as a figure begin figure htb includegraphics image png end figure The above code extract is relatively trivial and doesn t offer much functionality The following code sample shows an extended use of the figure environment which is almost universally useful offering a caption and label centering the image and scaling it to 80 of the width of the text begin figure htb centering includegraphics width 0 8 textwidth image png caption Awesome Image label fig awesome_image end figure The figure environment is not exclusively used for images More information on the figure environ ment and how to use it can be found in Floats Figures and Captions 6 22 1 8 Text Wrapping around Images Text can also be wrapped around images This is especially useful if you include tall pictures import section usepackage wrapfig content section begin wrapfigure r 8cm placement and width parameter for the width of the image space centering inclu
469. xcolor manual 3 http mirror ctan org macros latex contrib xcolor xcolor pdf 246 28 Packages Add on features for LaTeX are known as packages Dozens of these are pre installed with LaTeX and can be used in your documents immediately They should all be stored in subdirectories of texmf tex latex named after each package To find out what other packages are available and what they do you should use the CTAN search page which includes a link to Graham Williams comprehensive package catalogue A package is a file or collection of files containing extra LaTeX commands and programming which add new styling features or modify those already existing Installed package files all end with st y there may be ancillary files as well When you try to typeset a document which requires a package which is not installed on your system LaTeX will warn you with an error message that it is missing and you can then download the package and install it using the instructions in the installing extra packages section You can also download updates to packages you already have both the ones that were installed along with your version of LaTeX as well as ones you added There is no limit to the number of packages you can have installed on your computer apart from disk space but there is probably a physical limit to the number that can be used inside any one LaTeX document at the same time although it depends on how big each package is In practice there i
470. xpression actually make it quite useful for manipulating the horizontal spacing between columns Given a basic table and varying the column descriptions begin tabular 1 1 hline stuff amp stuff hline stuff amp stuff hline end tabular ees ee Figure 12 85 Tables tei LI Ieirlj KR EC ECH AE LISER PIB EGAL Figure 15 10 3 Spanning To complete this tutorial we take a quick look at how to generate slightly more complex tables Unsurprisingly the commands necessary have to be embedded within the table data itself 10 3 1 Rows spanning multiple columns The command for this looks like this multicolumn num_ cols alignment contents num_cols is the number of subsequent columns to 86 Spanning merge alignment is either 1 c r or to have text wrapping specifiy a width p 5 0cm And contents is simply the actual data you want to be contained within that cell A simple example Woegin tabular 11 11 Team sheet hline reg A sheet Paul Robinson GK amp Paul Robinson LB amp Lucus Radebe Lucus Radebe DC amp Michael Duberry DH DC Dominic Matteo Michael Duberry RB amp Didier Domi NN ANE MC amp David Batty Dominic Matteo MC amp Eirik Bakke AM MC amp Jody Morris Dider Domi FW amp Jamie McMaster NN ST amp Alan Smith David Batty Eirik Bakke Jody Morris Jamie McMaster Alan Smith Mark Viduka ST amp Mark Vidu
471. y are just comments by LaTeX about things you might want to look into such as overlong or underrun lines often caused by unusual hyphenations for example pages running short or long and other typographical niceties most of which you can ignore until later Unlike other systems which try to hide unevennesses in the text usually unsuccessfully by interfering with the letter spacing LaTeX takes the view that the author or editor should be able to contribute While it is certainly possible to set LaTeX s parameters so that the spacing is sufficiently sloppy that you will almost never get a warning about badly fitting lines or pages you will almost certainly just be delaying matters until you start to get complaints from your readers or publishers 7 3 Examples Only a few common error messages are given here those most likely to be encountered by beginners If you find another error message not shown here and it s not clear what you should do ask for help Most error messages are self explanatory but be aware that the place where LaTeX spots and reports an error may be later in the file than the place where it actually occurred For example if you forget to close a curly brace which encloses say italics LaTeX won t report this until something else occurs which can t happen until the curly brace is encountered e g the end of the document Some errors can only be righted by humans who can read and understand what the document is supposed
472. y2 key3 list of keywords links in new window false boxed links true colored links color of internal links color of links to bibliography color of file links color of external links If you don t need such a high customization here are some smaller but useful examples When creating PDFs destined for printing colored links are not a good thing as they end up in gray in the final output making it difficult to read You can use color frames which are not printed Nusepackage hyperref hypersetup colorlinks false or make links black usepackage hyperref hypersetup colorlinks citecolor black filecolor black linkcolor black urlcolor black oo oe oe 6 _ Chapter 27 on page 241 234 Problems with Links and Equations When you just want to provide information for the Document Info section of the PDF file as well as enabling back references inside bibliography usepackage pdfauthor Author s name pdftitle Document Title pagebackref true pdftex hyperref By default URLs are printed using mono spaced fonts If you don t like it and you want them to be printed with the same style of the rest of the text you can use this urlstyle same 26 4 Problems with Links and Equations Messages like the following pdfTeX warning ext4 destination with the same identifier name equation 1 7 7 30 has been already used duplicate ignored appear when you have m
473. yntactically robust is to comment out the command with a percentage sign for example 303 General Guidelines documentclass article begin document Vinput Section 1 Vinput Section 2 Vinput Section 3 input Section_4 Vinput Section 5 end document This code will process your base file with the article conventions but only the material in the file Section 4 tex will be processed If that was say the last thing you needed to check before sending off to that major journal you would then simply remove all the percentage signs and re run LaTeX repeating the compiling process as necessary to resolve all references page numbers and so on 37 2 3 Using includeonly Using this command provides more complex and hence more useful possibilities If you include the following command in your preamble i e before begin document includeonly filenamel filename2 only the files specified between the curly braces will be included Note that you can have one or more files as the argument to this command separate them with a comma no spaces This requires that there are include commands in the document which specify these files The filename should be written without the tex file extension documentclass book includeonly Chapter_1 Chapter_4 begin document Ninclude Chapter 1 Note that we are using Chapter 1 and not Chapter_1 tex Ninclude Chapter 2 Ninclude Chapter 3 Ninclude Chapt
474. you supply with an argument giving the name of an additional directory path you want searched when a file uses the includegraphics command here are some examples trailing is required graphicspath c mypict 1 camera graphicspath c mypict 1 camera works well in Win XP graphicspath var lib images graphicspath images_folder other_folder third_folder graphicspath images Please see http www ctan org tex archive macros latex required graphics grfguide pdf In the last example shown you would have a directory named images in the same directory as your main tex file i e this is RELATIVE addressing As you may have noticed in the first example I ve used the safe MS DOS form of the Windows MyPictures folder because it s a bad idea to use directory names containing spaces Using absolute paths graphicspath does make your file less portable while using relative paths like the last example you shouldn t have any problem with portability but remember not to use spaces in file names Alternatively if you are using PDFLaTeX you can use the package gr ile which will then allow you to use spaces in file names Note that you cannot make the graphicx package search directories recursively Under Linux Unix you can achieve a recursive search using the environment variable TEXINPUTS e g by setting it to export TEXINPUTS images Snapshots 34 http www ctan org tex archive macros late
475. you would refer to that file by specifying input myfiles filename tex Indeed in our example of the absolute path above you could refer to that file relatively too input documents useful foo tex Of course all commonly used file systems Linux Mac OS X and Windows also feature the UNIX facility outlined above Do note however that LaTeX uses forward slashes even on Microsoft Windows platforms which use backslashes Vin pathnames LaTeX implementations for Windows systems perform this conversion for you which ensures that your document will be valid across all installations This flexibility inherent in the way in which LaTeX is integrated with modern file systems lets you input files in a way which suits your particular set up 37 2 2 Compiling the base file When you compile your document page references and the like will change according to your use of the Ninput and Ninclude commands Normally LaTeX users only run the compiler on parts of the document to check that an individual chapter is syntactically correct and looks as the writer intended A full run is generally only performed for producing a full draft or the final version In such cases it is invariably necessary to run LaTeX twice or more to resolve all the page numbers references etc especially if you are using bibliographic software such as BiBTeX too The simplest way to check that one or more of the various components of your work is s
476. your rights have been terminated and not permanently reinstated receipt of a copy of some or all of the same material does not give you any rights to use it 10 FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE The Free Software Foundation may publish new revised versions of the GNU Free Documentation License from time to time Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns See http www gnu org copylefi Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version number If the Document specifies that a particular numbered version of this License or any later version applies to it you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that specified version or of any later version that has been published not as a draft by the Free Software Foundation If the Doc ument does not specify a version number of this License you may choose any version ever published not as a draft by the Free Software Foundation If the Document specifies that a proxy can decide which future versions of this License can be used that proxy s public statement of acceptance of a version permanently authorizes you to choose that version for the Document 11 RELICENSING Massive Multiauthor Collaboration Site or MMC Site means any World Wide Web server that publishes copyrightable works and also pro vides prominent facilities for anybody to edit those works A public wiki that

Wikibooks.org - Parent Directory

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents